Skip to main content

Full text of "An economic history of England, 1066-1874"

See other formats


By  the  Same  Author 

A  SHORT  ECONOMIC  HISTORY  OF  ENGLAND 


A  Short  Survey  of  the  Economic 

"Development  of  England 

and  the  Colonies 

1874-1914 

by 

Charlotte  M.  Waters 
B.A.  London 
formerly  Head  Mistress  of  the 
County  School  for  Girls  Bromley 


ND 


Noel  Douglas 
38   Great  Ormond  Street ,  London^  W.C.  1 


FIRST       PUBLISHED       IN       MCMXXVI 
MADE    &     PRINTED    IN    GREAT    BRITAIN 
BY   THE  WHITEFRIARS    PRESS,  LTD 
LONDON      AND 
TONBRIDGE 


PREFACE 

The  object  of  this  little  book  is  to  give  those  interested  a  state- 
ment, based  on  a  short  survey  of  their  origin,  of  the  economic 
problems  that  face  the  men  of  the  twentieth  century.  The  fifty 
fears  before  the  War  are  treated  in  some  detail,  and  each  subject 
s  prefaced  by  a  rapid  sketch  of  the  earlier  development,  sufficient, 
t  is  hoped,  to  make  clear  the  situation  in  1874. 

The  selection  of  that  date  has  been  made,  because  it  was  the 
noment  when  the  rapidly  changing  society  of  the  nineteenth 
:entury  became  comparatively  static,  or,  at  any  rate,  it  was  the 
3oint  at  which  the  course  of  history  for  the  next  fifty  years  was 
letermined  and  set.  The  close  of  the  Franco- German  War  of 
[870  marks  the  new  departure,  a  redealing  of  the  cards  politically 
ind  a  definite  entry  of  the  whole  of  Europe  on  the  path  of  industrial 
md  commercial  expansion,  along  which  England  had  already 
;ome  fifty  years'  start. 

Some  knowledge  of  this  economic  basis  of  our  modern  history 
»eems  to  me  very  necessary  to  every  educated  man  and  woman, 
3ut  it  is  not  easy  for  busy  people  to  obtain  it  from  the  multiplicity 
ind  great  detail  of  its  literature.  My  attempt  at  condensation  is 
offered  with  considerable  diffidence,  for  the  mass  of  material  is 
/ast  and  my  skill  very  limited  ;  what  I  conceive  to  be  a  great  need 
ibr  something  of  the  kind  is  my  only  excuse. 

CHARLOTTE  M.   WATERS. 


To  my  Friend 
MARJORY  PEASE,  J. P., 
to  whom  this  book  owes  its  existence. 


. CONTENTS 

ChapUr  Page 

I.    Introductory vii 


II.    Agriculture      .......  23 

III.  Our  Chief  Industries 43 

IV.  Organised  Labour  and  the  Growth  of  Capitalism  58 

V.    State  Control  ;    Factory  Legislation  and  the 

Poor  Law 81 

VI.    Imperialism  and  the  Scramble  for  Markets        .  96 

VI I.    Communications  and  the  Movement  of  Trade. 

Banking  and  Exchange          .         .         .         .  133 

VIII.    Taxation.     Changes  in  Economic  Theory  and 

Outlook 151 

Bibliography    .         .         .         .         .         .         .  173 

Index 175 


Vll 


A  SHORT  SURVEY  OF  THE  ECONOMIC 

DEVELOPMENT    OF     ENGLAND     AND 

THE   COLONIES    1874-19 14 

CHAPTER  I 

INTRODUCTORY 

Before  one  can  survey  in  any  detail  the  economic  development 
of  the  British  Empire  during  the  past  fifty  years,  or  any  part  of 
them,  it  is  necessary  to  have  some  knowledge  of  earlier  conditions 
and  history.  All  societies  are  rooted  deeply  in  the  past,  and  this 
is  particularly  so  in  England,  where  the  most  profound  revolutions 
have  from  time  to  time  been  wrought  without  absolute  fracture  of 
the  existing  system,  and  have  continued  and  carried  with  them 
whole  branches  of  the  original  growth.  Maitland  warned  his 
students  that  no  one  could  understand  modern  English  land  law 
unless  he  had  grasped  the  reforming  measures  of  Edward  I.,  and 
any  study  of  present-day  conditions  and  problems  is  incomplete 
without  some  acquaintance  with  the  history  of  our  land  since 
Domesday. 

In  the  Middle  Ages — that  is  to  say,  between  the  eleventh  and  the 
fifteenth  centuries — English  land  was  held  by  a  system  of  feudal 
tenure  and  cultivated  on  a  basis  of  communal  agriculture.  No 
land  was  held  by  absolute  right ;  all  paid  rent  to  some  one  ;  in  the 
final  event  all  land  was  the  King's.  The  rents  paid  took  many 
forms,  the  highest  and  most  honourable  in  esteem  being  military 
service,  the  lowest  villein  work.  Between  these  extremes  lay 
many  grades,  often  overlapping.  There  was  the  money  rent  of 
the  freeman,  the  service  rent  of  the  sokman,  who  was  yet  free,  the 
heavier  service  rent  of  the  villein,  who  was  a  serf,  but  one  by  no 
means  devoid  of  rights.  Each  held  his  land  by  definite  rent  of 
money  and  service,  from  the  holder  of  many  manors  to  the  villein 
with  half  a  virgate.     Failure  to  pay  might  mean  ejection.     No 

9 


io      ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

man  was  free  from  a  lord.  No  man  either  was  free  of  his  under- 
lings ;  arbitrary  power  of  displacement  was  by  custom,  if  not  in 
law  denied  ;  the  villein's  tenure  was  not  certain,  but  custom  and 
his  lord's  need  of  his  services  gave  him  fair  security.  Gradually, 
as  the  years  rolled  by,  the  closeness  of  the  system  relaxed.  Great 
lords  won  rights  from  the  King,  as  the  barons  did  in  Magna  Carta, 
sokmen  and  the  richer  villeins  bought  out  their  service  rents  and 
substituted  money  ones,  and  by  the  end  of  the  fifteenth  century 
money  rather  than  service  was  the  link  between  lord  and  peasant. 
The  system  of  cultivation,  too,  had  changed.  In  the  twelfth 
century  the  village  cultivated  its  fields  in  strips  of  half  and  whole 
acres,  sharing  ploughs  and  oxen,  each  man  in  turn  ;  while  the 
lord's  land  was  worked  by  the  rent  services  of  his  villeins.  A 
three-field  system  was  general  in  mid  and  south  England,  with  a 
rotation  of  wheat,  barley  and  fallow.  The  system  was  not 
universal  :  the  South-west,  Kent,  and  the  North  had  different 
histories  and  different  methods,  but  the  three-field  system  was 
the  type.  By  1500  had  come  a  great  change  :  service  rents  had 
to  a  great  extent  ceased,  the  villeins  had  obtained  a  large  measure 
of  freedom,  many  of  the  open  fields  with  their  individual  strips 
and  common  cultivation  had  disappeared,  sheep  had  replaced  corn 
over  large  areas,  and  the  capitalist  investor  in  land  had  appeared 
on  the  scene.  The  great  lords  had  thrown  off  many  of  their 
feudal  rents  ;  military  service  was  no  longer  demanded,  since 
professional  men-at-arms  had  replaced  the  feudal  host.  Still 
more  important,  a  large  proportion  of  the  nobles  was  dead  in  the 
Wars  of  the  Roses  ;  those  who  remained  regarded  the  land  as 
their  own  property  and  free  tenure  had  become  absolute  owner- 
ship. The  villein  had  acquired  legal  rights  against  his  lord,  and 
his  tenure,  now  called  copyhold,  could  be  defended  in  the  courts. 
With  this  absolute  ownership  came  the  change  in  agriculture. 
The  growth  of  manufactures  had  produced  a  large  demand  for 
wool,  and  the  impoverished  noble  and  the  nouveau  riche  of  the 
early  sixteenth  century  turned  their  attention  to  its  production. 
Hence  enclosures  (arbitrary  enclosing  of  common  lands),  dis- 
placement of  agricultural  labourers  and  the  appearance  of  the 
unemployed.  Throughout  the  sixteenth  century  the  agricultural 
revolution  went  on  ;  first  the  turning  of  arable  land  to  pasture 
referred  to  above  ;  then  this  was  stayed  by  the  demand  of  the  grow- 


INTRODUCTORY  n 

ing  towns,  especially  London,  for  corn,  and  the  introduction  of 
new  foods,  especially  vegetables,  to  meet  the  rising  standard  of 
life  of  the  people.  By  1600  the  changes  were  nearly  over,  and  the 
body  of  the  feudal  system  nearly  dead,  though  its  spirit  lingered 
yet  ;  many  communal  fields  remained,  but  individual  ownership 
was  quite  as  common  and  was  very  much  more  productive.  The 
unemployed  problem  had  been  partly  dealt  with  by  the  Poor  Law 
of  1 60 1  ;  partly  it  had  solved  itself  in  the  increasing  commercial 
and  industrial  activity  of  the  nation.  In  1660  the  great  landowners 
threw  off  the  last  shackles  of  feudalism  by  transferring  what 
remained  of  their  rents  to  the  whole  nation  in  the  form  of  new 
customs  and  excise  ;  henceforth  they  were  absolute  owners  of  the 
land  that  had  once  been  the  property  of  the  nation. 

For  another  hundred  years  the  tenure  of  English  land  and  its 
cultivation  remained  much  the  same.  There  were  many  great 
landowners  ;  there  was  a  large  body  of  "  yeomen  " — freehold 
working  farmers,  who  themselves,  with  their  families  and  a  few 
hired  labourers,  tilled  the  land  they  owned  ;  there  were  copy- 
holders, descendants  of  the  old  villeins,  whose  tenure,  though 
legally  different,  was  not  greatly  different  in  practice  from  freehold. 
Added  to  these  categories  were  tenant  farmers,  holding  by  lease 
or  at  will  from  the  great  landowners,  and  lastly,  a  considerable 
body  of  hired  labourers,  often  younger  sons  of  the  smaller  farmers 
and  freeholders,  who  were  able  in  some  numbers  to  save  and 
become  farmers  in  their  turn.  The  feudal  spirit  survived,  and 
the  lord  of  the  manor  was  still  the  centre  of  village  life  ;  but  the 
farmers  were  quietly  comfortable  according  to  the  standards  of 
the  time,  and  the  early  eighteenth  century  was  probably  a  period 
in  which  the  country  labourer  was  better  fed  and,  relatively  to  his 
neighbours,  better  housed  than  at  any  time  in  our  history. 

With  1760  came  a  change  ;  the  land  was  getting  impoverished, 
new  and  improved  methods  of  farming  were  introduced,  the  old 
routine  of  wheat,  barley,  fallow  was  broken  by  the  introduction  of 
roots,  and  "  Turnip  Townsend  "  was  perhaps  responsible  for  as 
great  a  revolution  as  Watt  and  his  steam-kettle.  The  change  of 
methods  brought  about  a  demand  for  a  much-needed  change  of 
system.  The  open  fields,  with  intermingled  strips,  suitable  to 
days  when  a  complete  plough-team  was  beyond  the  dreams  of 
any  but  the  rich  lord,  were  very  unfitted  for  experiment  and 


12      ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

development.  None  could  advance  beyond  his  neighbour,  and 
one  lazy  or  stupid  farmer  could  stultify  all  the  efforts  of  his 
neighbours  by  letting  his  undrained  and  unweeded  strip  con- 
taminate theirs.  Besides,  all  the  village  had  pasture  rights  over 
the  arable  fields  after  August  17th,  and  no  work  was  possible  till 
the  winter  ploughing  began.  The  village  herds  could  not  be 
improved  when  all  ran  wild  together  on  the  waste  or  the  stubble, 
and,  unless  winter  fodder  could  be  secured,  most  beasts  had  to  be 
killed  by  November.  When  a  few  enlightened  landowners  had 
shown  what  could  be  done  on  enclosed  lands,  both  in  increasing 
produce  and  improving  stock,  a  cry  arose  for  general  enclosures. 
For  the  whole  story  of  this  revolution  you  must  go  to  histories 
of  the  period  ;  here  we  can  only  note  the  result.  In  1750  half 
England  at  least  was  covered  with  open  fields,  worked  on  much 
the  same  system  as  in  the  thirteenth  century  ;  by  1850  they  had 
almost  disappeared  from  the  land,  which  had  assumed  its  present 
appearance  of  small  hedged  fields,  in  which  each  farmer  farmed 
according  to  his  own  desires,  limited  only  by  the  conditions 
inserted  in  his  lease.  His  success  depended  entirely  on  his  own 
intelligence  and  industry  and  the  amount  of  enlightened  self- 
interest  displayed  by  his  landlord. 

But  beneath  this  seemingly  simple  change  lay  a  catastrophic 
revolution.  Gone  were  most  of  the  600,000  freeholders  of  the 
seventeenth  century  ;  gone  the  labourer  landholder,  who  com- 
bined working  for  wages  with  a  freehold  or  copyhold  holding  of 
a  cottage  and  an  acre  or  two  of  land  ;  gone  the  landless  labourer's 
cow  and  geese,  who  picked  up  a  precarious  living  on  the  commons 
and  wastes,  and  offended  the  scientific  cultivator's  eye  by  their 
miserable  form  and  appearance.  In  their  place  were  tenant 
farmers  farming  large  farms,  from  100  to  200  acres,  paying  high 
rents  and  employing  much  capital.  The  labourer's  wages  had 
sunk  to  a  mere  pittance,  and  were  now  unsupplemented  by  the 
produce  of  either  garden  or  rights  of  common  ;  there  had  been 
a  huge  drift  to  the  towns.  The  produce  of  the  country  had 
greatly  increased,  farming  was  scientific,  highly  productive,  and 
provided  high  rents  for  the  landowners.  But  village  life  was 
stagnant,  and  the  hired  labourers  were  degraded  by  miserable 
feeding  and  disgraceful  housing  to  a  standard  of  life  lower,  rela- 
tively, to  the  rest  of  the  nation  than  had  ever  been  known  in 


INTRODUCTORY  13 

England.  From  1850  to  1870  was  the  golden  age  of  English 
farming  ;  landowners  and  farmers  alike  made  fortunes  ;  the  land 
produced  greatly,  capital  and  science  being  both  brought  to  bear, 
and  in  all  branches,  except  dairying,  farming  reached  its  highest 
point.  But  the  labourers  shared  in  none  of  this  ;  unenfranchised, 
too  isolated  to  join  in  the  new  movements  of  the  industrial  work- 
men to  combine,  placed  by  tied  cottages  at  the  mercy  of  their 
masters,  the  farmers,  they  were  helpless  to  make  even  an  effort. 
The  drift  to  the  towns  continued. 

Industrial  organisation  is  much  later  in  history  than  that  of  the 
land,  and  it  is  never  quite  so  fundamental.  Whole  civilisations 
have  risen  and  waned  in  which  the  organisation  of  industry,  apart 
from  agriculture,  has  been  either  very  simple  or  non-existent. 
In  England  the  early  village  communities  can  hardly  be  said  to 
have  possessed  any.  A  few  craftsmen  in  wood  and  iron  supplied 
to  each  village  its  simple  needs  ;  hardly  anything  was  obtained 
from  outside.  A  smith  worked  up  iron  into  ploughs  and  spades 
and  spears,  the  market  a  few  miles  off  supplied  the  few  crocks 
necessary  in  an  age  of  fingers  and  wooden  platters,  while  clothes 
were  the  work  of  the  women  in  their  homes  from  the  fleece  to 
the  finished  garment.  But  by  the  twelfth  century  towns  were 
common,  and  with  them  came  a  greater  division  of  labour, 
and  butchers,  leather  workers,  armourers,  vintners,  carpenters, 
masons,  weavers,  tailors,  and  others  appeared  in  bands.  Copying 
the  proceedings  of  the  shopkeepers  and  merchants,  to  which  we 
shall  refer  later,  the  craftsmen  organised  themselves  into  gilds, 
which  remained  the  special  feature  of  the  towns  till  the  end  of  the 
sixteenth  century.  These  gilds  were  composed  of  all  the  men  of 
each  craft,  masters  and  workmen  alike,  and  in  the  early  stages  the 
masters  were  merely  the  proficients  of  the  craft,  a  status  to  which 
all  might  eventually  aspire.  The  gilds  were  recruited  by  means 
of  apprentices,  to  whom  the  masters  were  bound  to  teach  the 
"  mystery,"  and  all  members  were  strictly  confined  by  rules  made 
to  ensure  good  workmanship,  fair  charges  and  no  competition. 
The  gild  was  conceived  as  a  brotherhood,  and  all  members  were 
expected  to  assist  their  fellows.  They  acted  as  friendly  societies, 
insured  their  members  against  poverty,  sickness  and  death,  and 
all  their  functions  were  sealed  by  religious  oaths  and  observances. 
The  false  dealer  was  penalised,  and  a  rigid  inspection  into  the 


i4      ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

quality  of  the  work  turned  out  was  maintained.  The  gild  held 
a  monopoly  of  the  craft ;  no  one  outside  its  membership  could 
practise. 

At  first  the  gilds  were  simple  and  democratic  ;  in  small  towns 
they  could  never  be  large  bodies,  but  by  the  fifteenth  century 
many  abuses  had  arrived.  The  government  of  the  gilds  had 
fallen  into  the  hands  of  the  wealthier  members,  who  used 
their  position  to  further  their  own  interests,  and  the  growing 
luxury  of  the  age  had  made  it  necessary  in  many  trades  to  possess 
considerable  capital  before  setting  up  as  a  master.  Consequently, 
the  ex-apprentice  found  himself  a  journeyman  not  for  a  few  years, 
but  for  life,  and  the  small  bodies  that  controlled  the  gilds  made 
matters  worse  by  a  policy  of  exclusiveness,  which,  by  raising  the 
entrance  fees,  made  it  still  harder  to  rise  from  journeyman  to 
master.  Throughout  the  sixteenth  century  two  battles  raged  : 
one  between  the  journeymen  and  the  masters — i.e.,  labour  and 
capital — and  the  other  between  the  masters  of  the  gilds  and  out- 
siders who  tried  to  set  up  business  without  joining  the  gilds. 
In  the  war  between  the  journeymen  and  the  masters  the  latter 
may  claim  the  victory,  though  it  was  tempered  by  occasional 
defections  of  the  workmen,  who,  especially  in  London,  moved 
outside  the  city  walls  and  formed  gilds  of  their  own.  These  in 
turn  usually  became  as  exclusive  and  reactionary  as  their  former 
masters.  In  the  battle  with  outsiders,  the  gilds,  though  supported 
by  the  Government,  were  defeated  ;  the  growth  of  population 
made  migration  to  the  suburbs,  and  even,  in  industrial  areas  like 
Norfolk,  to  the  villages  possible,  and  outside  the  corporate 
boroughs  men  were  free  to  work  as  they  pleased  independently 
of  the  gilds.  Much  of  the  gilds'  wealth  went  in  the  Reformation, 
when  Edward  VI. 's  rapacious  counsellors  seized  their  charitable 
funds  in  the  name  of  religion.  By  the  eighteenth  century  they 
were  little  more  than  picturesque  historic  survivals. 

But  the  decline  of  the  gilds  made  little  difference  in  the  actual 
work  of  the  industries.  These  were  still  organised  on  the  plan 
that  is  known  as  the  "  domestic  system."  The  essential  feature 
in  this  is  that  the  craftsman  works  in  his  own  home,  assisted  by 
his  wife  and  family,  and  possibly  by  one  or  two  apprentices  or 
journeymen.  In  textile  work  he  might  have  two  or  three  looms, 
not  more  ;  in  other  industries  his  tools  were  hand-tools  entirely. 


INTRODUCTORY  15 

Spinning  was  done  by  the  women  in  every  cottage,  and  the  yarn 
sold  to  some  travelling  merchant  ;  the  finishing  trades  were  more 
in  the  hands  of  capitalists,  but  even  here  few  masters  employed 
many  workmen.  In  a  craftsman's  home  agriculture  went  on 
side  by  side  with  his  other  work  ;  and  a  cow,  a  garden,  fowls  and 
geese  helped  to  feed  his  family  for  perhaps  half  the  year.  As 
long  as  no  machinery  more  complicated  than  a  hand-loom  was 
used  this  was  the  best  way,  and  the  cheapest.  A  few  early 
attempts  at  mass  production  had  been  made,  and  Jack  of  Newbury, 
in  the  fifteenth  century,  is  said  to  have  made  a  fortune  on  a  system 
of  factory  organisation.  But  in  1750  England  as  a  whole  was 
still  a  land  of  villages  ;  her  manufactures  were  made  in  the  village 
houses,  and  stone  cottages  with  large  rooms  capable  of  holding 
two  or  three  looms  can  be  found  still  in  all  the  manufacturing 
areas  of  the  seventeenth  century. 

At  the  end  of  the  eighteenth  century  came  a  change.  In  1767 
Hargreaves  invented  his  spinning-jenny,  by  which  one  man 
could  do  the  work  of  ten  women,  and  then  came  Arkwright's 
water-frame  and  Crompton's  mule.  Both  of  these  required  power 
to  work  them,  and  many  of  the  new  mills  settled  by  running 
water,  which  turned  the  wheel  that  ran  the  frames.  But  when 
Watt  had  found  a  means  of  using  compressed  steam,  first  to  pump 
and  then  to  turn  a  wheel,  the  age  of  steam  began.  Within  fifty 
years — that  is,  within  the  lifetime  of  a  single  man — the  textile 
industries  quitted  the  cottage  homes  and  were  collected  in  factories, 
where  a  dozen  and  then  a  hundred  mules  or  looms  could  be 
worked  at  once  and  yards  of  cloth  made  where  only  inches  had 
been  before.  Cotton  took  the  lead,  being  a  new  industry  and  less 
hampered  by  survivals  of  old  gild  regulations,  but  wool  and  silk 
followed  in  due  course.  The  demand  for  machinery  involved  a 
demand  for  coal  and  for  newer  and  better  processes  of  smelting 
and  working  iron.  With  the  new  wealth  thus  created,  badly 
distributed  as  it  was  among  the  few  rather  than  the  many,  came 
the  demand  for  luxuries,  and  new  industries  sprang  up  to  meet  it. 
By  1850  "  domestic  industry  "  was  dead  or  dying  fast  ;  most  of 
our  needs  outside  food  were  being  provided  from  factories  run 
by  a  few  men,  in  which  half  the  nation,  men,  women  and  children, 
laboured  in  darkness  and  filth  almost  from  the  cradle  to  the  grave. 

Such  was  the  "  industrial  revolution  "  of  the  early  nineteenth 


16      ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

century.  It  produced  enormous  quantities  of  material,  gave 
great  wealth  to  some,  and  increased  material  comfort  to  the  whole 
middle  class,  but  turned  the  craftsman  into  a  machine-minder, 
and  the  sturdy,  and  perhaps  stupid,  country  labourer  into  the 
undersized,  anaemic  and  sharp  dweller  of  our  hideous  towns.  It 
brought  to  the  human  race  much  material  advance,  and  much 
that  is  hopeful  for  future  times  ;  but,  owing  to  the  greed  and 
shortsightedness  of  the  few,  it  brought  also  a  train  of  evils  which, 
since  1850,  the  nation  has  tried,  spasmodically,  to  annul,  so  far 
with  indifferent  success. 

And  just  as  the  industry  of  the  Middle  Ages  was  strictly  regu- 
lated, so  was  commerce.  At  first  trade  was  very  local ;  a  small 
market  town  served  an  area  of  some  six  miles  radius,  with  occa- 
sional help  from  travelling  hawkers  and  the  great  annual  fairs. 
All  was  strictly  controlled,  markets  were  privileges  granted  by 
local  magnates,  fairs  belonged  to  great  lords  or  to  the  King.  The 
early  traders  formed  merchant  gilds,  which  strictly  regulated  the 
procedure  of  their  members,  and  at  the  same  time  prevented  any 
competition  from  outside  their  body.  Prices  were  not  left  to  the 
law  of  supply  and  demand ;  the  Middle  Ages  believed  in  adjust 
price  "  for  everything  and  penalised  those  who  tried  to  evade  it. 
Up  to  the  fourteenth  century  almost  our  only  exports  were  raw 
wool  and  hides,  our  imports  wine  and  luxuries.  But  with  the 
increasing  wealth  of  the  nation  came  a  demand  for  other  things. 
Edward  III.  revived  the  woollen  manufacture,  and  by  the  end  of 
the  fifteenth  century  undyed  woollen  cloth  had  largely  replaced 
raw  wool  as  an  export.  The  corn  trade  was  also  straitly  regulated 
by  royal  officials,  both  as  to  price  and  movement. 

With  the  sixteenth  century  came  expansion.  The  centre  of 
world  trade  shifted  westward,  and  by  the  end  of  the  century  the 
Atlantic  rather  than  the  Mediterranean  became  the  centre  of 
commercial  interest.  Eastern  trade  came,  not  by  Venice  and 
Genoa,  but  by  the  Cape  and  Lisbon,  and  English  merchants  were 
seizing  from  the  German  and  Flemish  Hanses  the  trade  of  the 
narrow  seas.  For  trade  on  this  scale  more  was  required  than  the 
resources  of  one  or  two  great  merchants,  or  the  one  or  two  ships 
of  small  ones.  Free  competition  was  threatened  in  the  numbers 
turning  to  so  lucrative  a  trade,  and  free  competition  did  not 
commend  itself  to  the  men  of  that  time.     So  the  great  feature  of 


INTRODUCTORY  17 

the  sixteenth  and  seventeenth  centuries  was  the  regulated  company, 
whose  members,  though  trading  each  on  his  own  capital,  followed 
certain  regulations  laid  down  for  all,  maintained  on  barbarous 
shores  a  system  of  mutual  protection,  and  fiercely  fought  any 
"  interloper  "  who  dared  to  trade  outside  their  membership. 
Joint-stock  companies  were  not  usually  approved,  though  the 
great  East  India  Company  was  of  that  kind. 

Throughout  the  three  centuries  1500  to    1800    foreign   trade 
worked  in  shackles,  probably  necessary  at  first,  later  a  severe 
handicap.     A  theory  was  accepted,  since  known  as  the  Mercantilist 
Theory,  that  trade  with  any  country  should  aim  at  selling  more  to 
that  country  than  you  bought  from  it.     Hence,  gold  would  flow 
to  England  and  her  wealth  increase.     The  idea  probably  arose 
from  the  very  obvious  advantage  that  the  possession  of  gold  gave 
a  nation  in  the  wars  of  a  generation  that  fought  mainly  with 
mercenaries.     In  any  case,  it  became  an  accepted  axiom,  and  in 
the  eighteenth  century  the  trade  with  Portugal  was  thought  to 
be  more  valuable  than  that  with  France,  because  the  former  took 
more  of  our  goods  than  we  of  hers,  while  France  took  little  of  our 
cloth  and  sent  us  her  wines,  her  finished  goods  and  her  objects 
of  luxury  in  great  quantities.     And  since  gold  was  so  valuable 
for  war,  it  was  an  indirect  source  of  power,  and  trade  came  to  be 
regarded  as  subservient  to  the  claims  of  political  national  greatness. 
The  successful  wars  of  the  eighteenth  century — very  largely,  as 
far  as  England  was  concerned,  wars  for  overseas  markets — strained 
this  system  to  the  utmost.     Merchants  were  increasingly  impatient 
of  Government  interference  and  regulation,  and  claimed  that  by 
free  trading  they  could  greatly  increase  the  national  well-being. 
When  the  industrial  revolution  turned  us  into  the  world's  work- 
shop, and  English  textiles  and  English  iron  goods  were  in  demand 
from  the  ends  of  the  earth,  Government  control  seemed  a  short- 
sighted, hampering  nuisance  with  little  equivalent  advantage. 

The  battle  eventually  joined  over  the  Corn  Duties,  but  before 
that  enlightened  statesmen,  like  Pitt  and  Huskisson,  had  been 
modifying  trade  regulations  and  lowering  customs.  The  Naviga- 
tion Acts  were  modified  and  then  repealed  in  1849,  and  commercial 
treaties  arranged  to  encourage  trade  in  all  directions.  But  the 
citadel  of  the  mercantilist  system  was  the  land,  for  even  as  late 
as  1830,  the  landed  interest  controlled  the  Government.     Heavy 

E.D.E.  B 


18      ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

duties  on  imported  corn  had  followed  the  peace  of  1815,  lest  the 
drop  from  war  prices  should  ruin  landlord  and  farmer  alike.  By 
a  sliding  scale  they  tried  to  keep  prices  stable,  a  plan  that  had  been 
working  for  over  200  years.  But  the  standard  price  aimed  at  was 
high,  bread  was  dear,  and  competition  had  driven  down  the 
workers'  wages  to  starvation  point.  The  manufacturers  declared 
more  money  wages  impossible,  and  urged  that,  if  food  were 
cheaper,  real  wages  would  rise  and  England  could  continue  to 
undersell  all  competitors  in  the  world  market.  The  farmers 
maintained  that  to  let  corn  in  free  would  ruin  them.  But  in 
1846  it  was  done,  the  Corn  Laws  were  abolished  and  practically 
free  import  allowed.  The  farmers  were  not  ruined,  because 
prices  did  not  drop  greatly,  and  the  fear  that  they  would  drove 
landlords  and  farmers  alike  to  an  expenditure  of  capital  and  energy 
that  for  twenty  years  proved  very  remunerative.  From  1853  to 
1870  was  the  golden  age  of  English  farming.  Free  Trade  did 
not,  at  the  time,  do  what  the  manufacturers  hoped  in  increasing 
real  wages,  but  it  made  London  the  exchange  port  and  England 
the  centre  of  the  world's  trade.  By  1874  England  held  the 
pre-eminence,  both  for  manufacture  and  trade,  of  the  nations  of 
the  world.  Her  ships  were  on  every  sea  ;  half  the  world's  ships 
were  built  in  her  yards  ;  she  had  led  the  way  in  wood  and  iron 
construction,  in  sail  and  steam.  She  had  invented  and  pioneered 
the  steam  locomotive,  had  found  capital  to  open  up  and  civilise 
distant  lands,  and,  lastly,  had  sent  her  sons  to  occupy  the  ends  of 
the  earth.  On  a  basis  of  unlimited  competition  and  unshackled 
individualism  she  had  in  a  century  created  more  material  wealth 
than  the  world  had  hitherto  known.  That  she  had  also  revolution- 
ised her  social  structure,  had  degraded  her  workers  to  be  the  slaves 
of  the  machine,  had  made  possible  vast  aggregations  of  wealth  in 
the  hands  of  the  few,  and  adopted  the  worship  of  material  success, 
was  discerned  dimly  by  the  few  and  unheeded  by  the  mass.  The 
hero  of  the  age  was  "  A  Man  of  Property." 

Great,  however,  as  were  the  changes  wrought  by  factory 
production  and  the  displacement  of  our  peasantry,  the  changes 
due  to  new  methods  of  transit  were  probably  greater,  and  without 
them  the  others  would  have  been  robbed  of  half  their  effect. 
From  the  going  of  the  Romans  to  the  eighteenth  century  the  chief 
conveyer  of  goods  by  land  had  been  the  pack-horse — slow,  limited 


INTRODUCTORY  19 

in  capacity  and  expensive.  The  first  effort  at  something  better 
was  an  attempt  to  improve  the  roads,  steadily  neglected  for  1,400 
years,  and  the  early  nineteenth  century  was  a  time  of  great  improve- 
ment. From  1820  to  1836  the  great  coaching  roads  saw  a  vast 
extension  of  traffic.  Rather  earlier  had  come  the  canal  system, 
which  linked  up  our  rivers  and  made  water  transit  possible  for 
heavy  goods.  Since  the  days  of  Henry  VIII.  our  ships  had  been 
carefully  fostered  by  Government,  and  Englishmen  were  among 
the  most  daring  and  successful  sailors  in  the  world. 

Still,  none  of  this  was  new  ;  roads  and  ships  and  canals  all  had 
their  origins  far  back  before  the  dawn  of  history.  All  educated 
men  knew  that  they  were  older  than  the  oldest  nation.  It  is 
difficult  for  us  properly  to  appreciate  how  steam  transit  seemed 
to  our  grandfathers.  It  halved  and  quartered  distances  ;  it 
multiplied  almost  without  limit  the  amount  of  goods  that  could 
be  shifted  from  one  place  to  another  ;  it  lengthened  life  by 
halving  time.  The  rush  and  fury  of  the  new  power  greatly 
impressed  the  men  and  women  of  the  'forties.  Elizabeth  Barrett 
expressed  the  feeling  of  her  contemporaries  when  she  wrote  : 

"  From  the  fire  and  the  water  we  drive  out  the  steam, 
With  a  rush  and  a  roar  and  the  speed  of  a  dream  ! 
And  the  car  without  horses,  the  car  without  wings, 

Roars  onward  and  flies 

On  its  pale  iron  edge, 
'Neath  the  heat  of  a  thought  sitting  still  in  our  eyes.' 

And  they  were  right,  the  world  of  steamships  and  railways  is  a 
world  of  a  new  kind,  a  world  that  is  one,  and  with  its  parts  much 
too  close  together  to  dare  to  risk  disunity.  By  1874  all  the  new 
inventions,  to  us  such  commonplaces,  were  in  being  ;  in  England 
the  railway  was  almost  as  we  know  it,  the  telegram  common, 
though  still  a  little  startling  in  its  yellow  envelope  to  people  in 
country  places  ;  the  biggest  steamship  before  1907  had  been  built, 
iron  had  replaced  wood,  and  steel  was  about  to  replace  iron. 
During  the  forty  years  to  come  the  only  really  new  thing  was  the 
telephone,  though  both  flight  and  wireless  telegraphy  were  in 
sight  by  1914.  The  world  of  1874  was  essentially  a  modern 
world  based  on  machine  production,  a  landless  proletariat  of 
wage-earners,  capitalist  enterprise  and  free  competition — a  world 
inconceivable  to  the  men  of  a  century  earlier. 

B  2 


20      ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

It  is  time  to  look  at  the  conscious  theory  that  had  gradually  been 
formed  from  all  these  changes.  Since  the  days  of  Athens' 
greatness  certainly — probably,  if  we  could  know,  for  many 
thousand  years  before  that — there  have  existed  men  who  have 
asked  for  theories  of  government,  rules  for  social  morality,  an 
order  based  on  reason  for  all  the  common  life  of  men.  In  the 
world  of  economics  these  theories  have  been  many  and  varied. 
The  economics  of  the  ancient  Mediterranean  civilisation  were 
based  on  slave  labour,  and  beyond  the  few  who  challenged  the 
morality  of  that  basis  there  was  little  to  think  and  theorise  about. 
Among  the  free  there  might,  from  time  to  time,  be  struggles, 
such  as  those  between  the  great  and  little  landholder  in  Italy,  or 
between  a  rising  commercial  class  and  an  aristocracy  entrenched 
on  the  land.  But  where  the  foundation  was  universally  the  labour 
of  absolute  slaves,  the  economic  system  was  bound  to  fall  into  one 
mould.  The  feudal  system  of  the  Middle  Ages  was  different. 
Economically  there  is  a  great  difference  between  the  slave  and  the 
serf — between  a  man  who  has  no  more  claims  than  an  animal  and 
a  man  who  has  a  few  but  certain  rights  that  it  is  dangerous  to 
invade.  The  owning  of  serfs  carries  with  it  duties  as  well  as 
rights,  duties  that  public  opinion  will  enforce.  The  feudal  system 
probably  grew  out  of  the  need  for  safety  ;  its  conscious  object  was 
stability.  It  was  right  and  best  that  each  should  know  and  keep 
his  own  peculiar  place  in  the  edifice,  and  the  Church  added  its 
approval  in  terms  of  a  providential  ordering  of  things .  The  Church 
itself  was  ordered  in  similar  fashion,  tempered  by  its  practice  of 
the  career  open  to  talent.  Each  grade  had  its  fitting  standard  of 
life  ;  stability  depended  on  discouraging  attempts  to  alter  it. 

Into  this  system  of  a  landed  aristocracy,  supported  by  a  gradu- 
ated arrangement  of  dependents,  commerce  gradually  worked  a 
breach.  At  first  men  bought  and  sold  to  make  a  living  ;  gradually 
the  possibility  of  making  more  proved  too  alluring  to  be  resisted  ; 
it  was  not  long  before  the  profit  maker  appeared  in  the  market. 
He  was  not  welcomed  by  any  class,  but  was  in  time  recruited 
from  all.  Public  opinion,  led  by  the  Church,  greatly  limited  his 
activities.  It  was  considered  wrong  to  ask  more  than  the  "  just 
price,"  to  make  more  than  a  fair  living.  Above  all,  to  ask  profit 
for  a  loan  of  money,  which  entailed  no  work,  was  conduct  un- 
worthy of  a  Christian.     Usury  was  left,  in  theory  at  least,  to  the 


INTRODUCTORY  21 

Jews,  though  we  may  note  that  banking  on  the  scale  of  the  Bardi 
and  the  Medici  was  considered  quite  honourable.  Gradually 
the  breach  widened  ;  trading  cities  like  Venice,  Florence  and 
Milan  showed  an  advance  in  civilisation,  in  manners,  in  luxury 
that  became  the  envy  of  the  feudal  North.  Even  in  the  heart  of 
feudal  territory,  along  the  Rhine,  the  Rhone  and  the  Seine,  great 
cities  grew,  whose  raison  d'etre  was  world-wide  commerce.  But 
with  commerce  on  the  great  scale,  usury  laws,  laws  against  makers 
of  "  corners  "  and  "  rings  "  became  useless,  and  theory  rapidly 
followed  fact.  By  the  sixteenth  century  popular  morality  had  so 
changed  that  most  modern  commercial  transactions  would  have 
been  winked  at,  if  not  praised,  and  trade  and  nationalism  had 
joined  hands  and  justified  each  other  ;  merchant  adventurers  and 
the  Royal  Navy,  often  indistinguishable,  advanced  side  by  side 
for  the  "  greatness  "  of  the  nation.  Commerce  was  still  strictly 
regulated,  but  the  belief  that  the  accumulation  of  riches  in  one 
man's  hand  was  bad  had  gone,  and  the  increasing  wealth  of  the 
few  was  accepted  as  the  wealth  of  the  nation  ;  to  get  riches,  far 
from  being  unworthy  of  a  Christian,  came  gradually  to  be  looked 
on  as  man's  primary  object. 

But  all  was  not  settled  when  it  was  agreed  that  the  nation's 
first  duty  was  to  retain  or  get  wealth  and  power  ;  the  important 
point  arose,  how  ?  The  most  obvious  form  of  wealth  was  gold, 
and  for  two  centuries  at  least  the  belief  held  that  the  nation  that 
had  most  gold  had  most  power.  In  a  time  of  constant  war  there 
was  a  good  deal  of  truth  in  this  ;  the  need  for  easily  convertible 
wealth  was  dominant.  With  gold  one  could  buy  ships  and  men 
and  arms  ;  without  it,  not  even  stored  granaries  and  bursting 
warehouses  availed  to  meet  urgent  needs.  Gold  being  therefore 
power,  such  trade  as  brought  gold  to  the  land  was  considered  most 
desirable.  No  one  saw  that  trade  was  a  universal  and  not  a 
local  thing,  and  gold,  except  for  its  ease  in  conversion,  no  more 
valuable  than  any  other  product.  So  treaties  were  made  and 
customs  levied  with  the  idea  of  directing  trade  into  channels 
thought  desirable  and  diverting  it  from  others,  and  efforts  were 
made  to  use  it  as  an  instrument,  not  so  much  for  increasing  the 
material  comfort  of  the  nation  as  its  political  power. 

By  the  end  of  the  eighteenth  century  this  mercantilist  system, 
as  it  was  called,  was  getting  discredited.     As  early  as  1776  Adam 


22      ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

Smith  had  delivered  in  his  "  Wealth  of  Nations  "  a  smashing 
attack  on  its  assumptions,  and  the  introduction  of  machine  industry, 
with  its  demand  for  foreign  markets,  made  the  old  restrictions 
intolerable.  The  belief  grew  up  that,  if  only  trade  and  industry 
were  left  alone,  with  free  competition,  natural  law  would  bring 
prosperity  to  all.  Each  industry  would  find  the  place,  the  men, 
and  the  market  that  were  best  suited  to  it,  where  it  could  produce 
most  largely,  most  rapidly  and  most  cheaply,  and  the  whole 
world  would  benefit.  Any  attempt  to  produce  in  the  wrong  place 
would  be  defeated,  for  the  product  would  be  more  costly,  and 
would  therefore  find  no  market.  Labour  was  looked  on  as  raw 
material  that  also  would  flow  to  the  place  where  it  was  wanted  ; 
if  it  was  too  abundant  in  one  industry  its  price  would  be  lowered, 
and  immediately  some  of  it  would  move  on  to  a  better  market, 
and  the  price  of  that  left  would  rise.  If  at  any  time  labour  was 
scarce,  its  price  would  rise,  immediately  fresh  labour  would  flow 
in  and  the  price  would  fall.  The  law  of  supply  and  demand, 
left  to  itself,  would  produce  a  natural  order  and  justice  to  all. 
This  doctrine  of  laisser-faire  dominated  the  nineteenth  century, 
and  in  its  name  England  embarked  on  Free  Trade,  unregulated 
industry,  and  the  order  of  the  jungle.  It  produced  great  aggregate 
wealth  and  a  grossly  unjust  sharing  of  it,  a  business  morality  that 
proclaimed  itself  the  civiliser  of  backward  nations  and  justified 
the  proverb  of  caveat  emptor,  a  conscience  that  gave  largely  out 
of  its  great  possessions  while  it  ignored  the  theft  from  the  labourer 
that  had  produced  them.  The  creed  of  laisser-faire  reached  its 
climax  in  the  'fifties  ;  the  Corn  Laws  had  gone  in  1846,  and  every 
fresh  budget  saw  a  lowering  of  tariffs.  But  even  before  its  final 
triumph,  some  of  the  evils  inherent  in  it  had  become  so  scandalous 
that  the  possessing  classes  were  forced  to  go  back  on  it,  and  already 
in  1833  had  begun  our  long  series  of  Factory  Acts,  protecting  the 
worker  from  the  more  outrageous  forms  of  exploitation  ;  and 
there  were  not  wanting  voices  of  power  denouncing  the  iniquity 
of  current  theory  and  practice  and  proclaiming  the  fact  that 
what  injures  one  inevitably  injures  all.  The  workers,  too,  were 
recovering  from  the  helpless  misery  that  had  marked  the  tran- 
sition period,  and  the  'fifties  also  saw  the  birth  of  modern  Trade 
Unionism.  As  yet  a  few  only  doubted  the  current  faiths  ;  many 
were  willing  to  mitigate  the  evils  they  sustained. 


CHAPTER  II 

AGRICULTURE 

The  Decline  of  Agriculture  and  its  Partial  Recovery. — The 

tide  of  agricultural  prosperity  in  England  had  reached  its  height 
in  the  middle  'sixties  ;  till  1875  it  slacked,  and  then  definitely 
ebbed.  There  had  been  an  inflation  of  prices  during  the  Franco- 
Prussian  War  of  1870,  and  shortsighted  landowners  had  in  many 
cases  raised  rents.  When  the  war  boom  died  down,  not  only 
agricultural,  but  also  industrial  capitalists  were  slow  to  realise 
the  moment  for  retrenchment,  with  the  usual  results  of  over- 
production, followed  by  dwindling  markets.  The  workless 
operatives  ceased  to  buy  beyond  the  barest  needs  of  subsistence, 
and  the  home  market  quickly  followed  the  collapse  of  the  foreign, 
for  the  new  methods  of  transit  made  the  world  practically  one. 
The  expected  fall  of  prices  had  not  followed  the  repeal  of  the  Corn 
Laws  in  1846,  and  for  nearly  thirty  years  the  force  of  free  com- 
petition seemed  in  abeyance.  The  more  scientific  agriculture 
embarked  on  in  anticipation  of  it  appeared  to  supply  a  large  part 
of  the  nation's  needs,  and  foreign  competition  seemed  not  yet 
ready  to  seize  the  opportunity  for  free  entrance.  But  in  1873 
there  was  an  industrial  collapse  in  the  United  States,  which  then 
consisted  almost  entirely  of  States  east  of  the  Mississippi. 
Industrial  failure  east  of  the  Alleghanies  drove  men  west  in  search 
of  livelihood,  and  quickly  the  corn  grown  on  the  virgin  soils  of 
the  middle  west  was  pouring  into  the  markets  of  Europe.  At 
the  moment  English  farmers  were  facing  a  succession  of  evil 
seasons  as  well  as  diminishing  markets,  and  the  produce  of  English 
wheat  lands  fell  in  1879  to  15-J  bushels  the  acre.  A  shortage 
should  at  least  have  implied  rising  prices,  which  might  have 
partially  saved  the  farmers  ;  to  their  amazement  no  such  rise 
occurred.  American  wheat,  grown  on  lands  of  illimitable  extent, 
needing  no  enrichment  for  many  years  to  come,  on  soil  so  deep 
that  not  a  stone  could  be  found  to  throw  at  a  wild  beast,  poured 

23 


24      ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

into  English  markets  at  a  price  no  higher  than  the  English  farmers'. 
Here,  indeed,  was  a  new  situation.  For  a  time  the  landlord 
refused  to  see  it,  and  the  farmer  struggled  in  vain  against  a  rent 
it  was  no  longer  possible  to  pay.  And  he  had  only  just  been 
forced  to  pay  his  labourers  more,  too.  What  was  to  be  done  ? 
Unfortunately,  our  system  of  land  tenure  compelled  him  to 
economise  in  the  one  place  where  it  was  possible,  and  where  it 
was  most  disastrous  ;  he  cut  down  his  labour  power  and  "  so 
began  the  starvation  of  English  land."  1  He  had  some  excuse  ;  a 
*  succession  of  bad  seasons  culminated  in  the  summer  of  1879, 
when  3,000,000  sheep  were  lost  by  rot,  and  in  1 880-1  came  one 
of  the  severest  winters  known.  By  1881,  5,000,000  sheep  had 
perished,  and  foot-and-mouth  disease  and  pleuro-pneumonia 
duly  reappeared  among  the  cattle. 

English  agriculture  was  faced  with  an  entirely  new  problem, 
which  at  first  concerned  mainly  the  corn  lands.  No  amount  of 
high  farming  could  force  our  land  to  produce  corn  as  cheaply  per 
bushel  as  America  could  deliver  it  across  the  sea.  An  English 
acre  might  produce  double  that  of  one  in  Illinois,  but  it  did  so 
at  a  cost  of  manure  and  labour  that  was  prohibitive,  even  with  the 
expense  of  5,000  miles  of  transit  on  the  other  side.  Once  the 
situation  was  grasped  the  conversion  of  corn  land  to  meadows  or 
to  market  gardening  went  on  apace,  though  in  the  transition  much 
land  went  out  of  cultivation  altogether,  and  reverted  to  rough 
pasture.  Between  1880  and  1884  the  rents  of  England  dropped 
some  five  and  a  half  millions.  It  was  time,  though  alone  it  was 
not  enough.  For  some  years  land  that  could  not  pay  under  grain 
could  make  a  profit  on  stock  ;  the  low  price  of  grain  that  was 
ruining  one  farmer  at  least  kept  down  the  expenses  of  the  other 
who  bred  stock.  But  not  for  long.  Meat  from  America  and 
Canada  began  to  appear  in  the  English  markets  by  1885,  followed 
after  1890  by  frozen  mutton  from  New  Zealand,  and  chilled  beef 
from  Argentina  ;  imports  of  cheese,  butter  and  wool  increased 
as  well.  For  if  English  farmers  and  landlords  could  not  change 
their  methods  to  meet  the  new  conditions  of  a  world  market, 
other  nations  could  and  did.  "  Whilst  the  changing  world 
conditions  in  cereal  farming  made  the  Dane  alter  his  land  system, 
educate  its  farmers  and  farmers'  sons  in  every  phase  of  agricultural 

1  Hasbach,  "  History  of  the  English  Agricultural  Labourer,"  p.  291. 


AGRICULTURE  25 

economy,  and  use  co-operative  methods  of  production,  collection, 
and  transport,  our  agricultural  community  lived  under  the  same 
old  land  laws,  the  same  old  game  laws,  exacting  railway  rates,  and 
an  almost  entire  lack  of  agricultural  schools  and  colleges  and 
demonstration  farms."  x 

In  1893  a  Royal  Commission  reported  on  the  agricultural 
depression.  It  showed  that  the  value  of  produce  had  diminished 
by  one-half,  and  while  the  cost  of  production  was  certainly  no 
less — for  the  farmer  had  lost  his  best  workers  by  emigration  and 
paid  the  same  price  for  inferior  work — much  corn  land  had 
disappeared  and  could  not  be  restored.  Certain  farmers  had, 
however,  weathered  the  storm  and  indicated  possible  ways  to 
future  recovery.  First,  men  with  ample  capital,  with  well- 
equipped  farms,  had  paid  their  way  even  on  heavy  soils,  and  small 
occupiers  employing  no  labour  but  their  own  had  struggled 
through.  Market  gardening,  fruit  growing  and  milk  producing 
had  been  proved  to  pay.  It  was  on  these  lines  that  improvements 
were  worked  out  in  the  next  twelve  years.  Corn  crops  lessened, 
and  dairying,  market  gardening,  pasture  farming,  flower  growing 
and  poultry  keeping  took  their  place.  On  the  drained  fenlands 
of  the  east  thousands  of  acres  of  potatoes  and  of  bulbs  replaced 
the  waving  corn,  and  Lincolnshire  farmers  became  men  of  financial 
power.  Fruit  growing  became  a  scientific  and  capitalist  venture, 
and  fenced  fields  of  fruit  trees  in  straight  rows  replaced  the 
picturesque  beauty  of  ancient  orchards  where  sheep  and  pigs 
played  havoc  with  the  bark  of  fifty-year-old  trees.  With  the 
margin  of  profit  smaller,  men  began  to  look  to  details  and  to 
welcome  scientific  information.  In  dairy  farming  especially  the 
improvement  was  marked  ;  stock-breeding  societies  and  pedigree 
books  became  general,  fresh  breeds  were  evolved,  and  even  the 
beginning  of  a  scientifically  pure  milk  production  appeared. 
Pasture  lands  received  as  much  attention  as  had  hitherto  been 
bestowed  on  arable,  and  new  manures  were  studied  and  adopted. 
The  use  of  basic  slag,  the  refuse  of  iron  furnaces  ground  to  powder 
as  fine  as  meal,  dates  from  1883. 

The  most  remarkable  advance  of  the  period  was  undoubtedly 
in  the  application  of  science  to  farming.  Geology  and  chemistry 
developed  branches  purely  devoted  to  agriculture.     New  biological 

1  F.  E.  Green,  "  History  of  the  English  Agricultural  Labourer,"  p.  102.J 


26      ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

theories  of  heredity  came  to  the  aid  of  stock-breeders,  and  new 
strains  of  plants  were  created  immune  from  disease  or  possessing 
desirable  attributes,  such  as  early  maturity  or  heavier  yield.  Even 
electricity  was  harnessed  to  increasing  growth.  The  fight 
against  disease  in  animals  made  almost  as  much  progress  as  in 
men,  while  the  study  of  insect  pests  and  remedies  for  them 
greatly  reduced  the  average  loss  of  the  farmer. 

The  necessity  of  reducing  the  cost  of  production  gave  an 
impetus  to  the  use  of  machinery.  The  chief  introduction  has 
been  that  of  the  reaper  and  binder,  since  1880,  and  all  the  various 
long-established  implements  have  been  improved  and  made  more 
efficient.  Oil  engines  became  an  adjunct  to  the  equipment,  and 
wire  and  corrugated  iron,  if  they  did  not  add  to  the  beauty, 
certainly  increased  the  efficiency  of  many  a  farm.  Since  1880 
the  milk  separator  has  become  common,  though  the  milking 
machine  has  taken  little  hold  in  this  country  ;  it  is  troublesome 
to  keep  clean,  and  where  labour  is  cheap,  as  in  England,  has  few 
advantages.  The  extension  of  dairy  farming  is  shown  by  the 
shrinking  of  the  corn  lands  of  England  and  Wales  from  8,500,000 
to  5,750,000  acres  between  1871  and  1901,  and  by  the  increase 
of  permanent  pasture  from  11,000,000  to  15,000,000  acres. 

By  1906  the  revolution  in  English  farming  was  fairly  complete, 
and  from  then  to  1914  financial  prosperity  returned  to  it.  It  is 
now  necessary  to  inquire  whether  this  renewed  vigour  belonged 
alike  to  all  classes  of  the  agricultural  community. 

The  Condition  of  the  Labourer. — How  did  the  lean  years  at 
the  end  of  the  nineteenth  century  affect  the  wage-earner  ?  He 
had  gained  nothing  in  the  "  golden  "  years.  How  came  he  out 
of  the  time  of  storm  ?  For  a  brief  interval  in  1872  the  prospects 
of  the  agricultural  worker  had  brightened.  A  wave  of  Trade 
Unionism  had  swept  the  country  and  reached  even  the  rural 
labourer.  Led  by  Joseph  Arch,  a  labourer  who  was  fortunate 
enough  to  own  a  freehold  cottage,  from  which  he  could  not  be 
ejected,  the  labourers  formed  a  Union  with  5,000  members  and 
sixty-four  branches.  The  farmers  were  taken  by  surprise,  and 
agreed  to  raise  wages  by  sums  ranging  from  is.  6d.  to  4s.  a  week. 
The  workers  asked  for  16s.  a  week  and  an  eleven-hour  day.  The 
Union,  however,  was  too  ambitious  ;  it  set  out  with  too  many 
objects,  loaded  itself  with  benefit  schemes  insufficiently  thought 


AGRICULTURE  27 

out,  and  began  agitating  against  the  existing  land  laws  and  against 
tithes.  When  the  farmers  and  landowners  had  recovered  from 
the  first  shock  they  swiftly  rallied,  met  strikes  by  lock-outs,  and 
eventually  wore  down  the  resources  of  the  National  Union.  In 
1874,  after  distributing  over  £20,000  in  strike  pay,  it  was  defeated, 
and  soon  after  declined  to  a  mere  handful  of  members.  Disunion 
among  the  workers  hastened  the  end.  For  a  time  wages  had 
risen,  but  they  decreased  again,  and,  as  we  have  seen,  waning 
prosperity  was  met  by  the  farmers  by  cutting  down  the  number 
of  labourers  employed.  Corn  lands  fell  to  pasture,  work  became 
scarce  or  irregular,  and,  in  spite  of  very  great  emigration,  the 
demand  for  labour  was  less  than  the  supply.  By  1887  wages  were 
back  nearly  as  low  as  in  1871  and  prices  of  most  necessaries  were 
higher  ;  real  wages  had  seriously  declined. 

Simmons,  the  secretary  of  the  Kent  and  Sussex  Agricultural 
and  General  Labourers'  Union,  stated  in  evidence  before  the 
Commission  of  1881  that  it  was  his  opinion  that,  of  the  three 
classes  hit  by  agricultural  depression, 

"  the  landlord  suffers  least  .  .  .  that  the  farmer  suffers  most, 
but  that  he  feels  his  suffering  less  than  the  labourer.  To  the 
labourer  it  is  a  question  really  of  less  food  ;  to  the  farmer  it  is 
not  absolutely  a  question  of  bread — it  is  comforts  or  no  com- 
forts." 

Under  the  stress  of  unemployment  and  low  wages  the  Union 
rapidly  went  to  pieces  ;  in  1877  it  still  had  55,000  members,  by 
1881  these  had  dropped  to  15,000,  and  in  1887  only  4,254  remained. 
The  increased  use  of  machinery  was  another  factor  in  the  decline. 
In  1884  the  rural  labourer  obtained  the  franchise,  but  it  was  long 
before  he  learned  to  use  it  in  his  own  interest,  even  if  he  has  yet 
done  so.  For  the  next  fifteen  years,  at  any  rate,  he  remained  the 
shuttlecock  of  the  two  traditional  parties — courted  at  election  time 
by  promises  of  help,  never  remembered  after,  not  indeed  intended 
to  be  remembered.  The  town  worker  had  found  the  Union 
without  the  vote  but  a  blunted  weapon  ;  the  rural  worker  was  to 
prove  that  the  vote  without  the  Union  was  a  useless  toy. 

The  disappearance  of  the  cheap  labour  of  women  and  children 
from  the  fields — the  latter  due  to  the  Education  Acts  of  1870-6 — 
helped  to  lower  the  standard  of  farming,  already  injured  by  the 


/ 


28      ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

emigration  of  the  best  workers,  for  it  became  too  costly  to  clean 
the  land  as  had  been  done  in  the  period  of  prosperity. 

In  1890  the  revival  of  Unionism  in  the  towns  spread  to  the 
country.  The  dockers'  strike  1  had  shown  the  danger  to  the 
urban  workers  of  the  mass  of  unorganised  and  potentially  "  black- 
leg "  labour  in  the  surrounding  fields,  and  new  Unions  combining 
agricultural  with  general  labourers  were  formed.  The  old  policy 
of  a  big  national  centralised  Union  was  abandoned,  and  small 
district  Unions  in  direct  touch  with  their  executive  were  preferred. 
Friendly  benefits,  which  had  ruined  the  old  Unions,  because 
adopted  without  any  actuarial  basis  and  often  on  wildly  generous 
scales,  were  discarded.  By  1894  nine  of  these  new  agricultural 
Unions  existed,  somewhat  precariously.  During  the  same  year 
the  societies  for  advocating  the  "  Single  tax " 2  and  for  the 
nationalisation  of  the  land  sent  their  red  and  yellow  vans  into 
hundreds  of  villages,  organising  Unions  or  preaching  their  solution 
of  the  workers'  difficulties. 

In  1893  appeared  another  Government  Report,  which  Hasbach 
summarises  as  follows  : — 

(a)  The  position  of  the  agricultural  labourer  in  the  south  had 
somewhat  improved  since  1867,  though  it  was  still  unsatisfactory. 

(b)  In  the  north,  where  conditions  were  superior,  there  had  been 
no  change. 

(c)  Money  wages  had  increased  and  employment  was,  on  the 
whole,  more  regular.  Wages  ranged  from  10s.  in  Wiltshire  to 
185.  in  Lancashire  and  Cumberland,  with  13s.  6d.  as  average. 
Harvest  wages  had  decreased  owing  to  use  of  machinery. 

(d)  Women  and  children's  labour  had  greatly  decreased,  and 
with  it  the  family  income. 

(e)  The  hours  of  work  were  shorter  and  agreements  between 
the  farmer  and  the  worker  more  definite. 

(/)  The  exodus  from  the  land  continued. 

The  great  obstacle  to  improvement  in  the  conditions  of  the 
agricultural  labourer  was  his  utter  dependence  on  the  farmer  and 
his  resulting  subservience.  The  effect  of  a  century  of  under- 
feeding and  overworking  was  marked.  In  1787  Norfolk  labourers 
had  been  singled  out  for  their  energy,  quickness  and  honesty  ;  in 
1892  they  are  quoted  as  being  particularly  badly  nourished  and 
1  See  p.  64.  a  See  p.  168. 


AGRICULTURE  29 

somewhat  lazy.  Their  wages  were  12s.  a  week.  Their  depend- 
ence on  the  farmer  or  the  landlord  was  absolute  ;  living  in  a  tied 
cottage,1  often  with  no  alternative  employer,  the  labourer  had  to 
please  his  master  or  starve.  He  could  keep  neither  his  wife's  nor 
his  children's  labour  from  the  sweater  ;  he  was  forbidden  often  to 
keep  pig  or  poultry,  or  to  apply  for  an  allotment,  lest  he  be  tempted 
to  steal  the  food  or  the  labour  of  his  employer  ;  he  dared  not 
join  a  Union,  for  dismissal  and  eviction  might  follow.  Stories 
humorously  tragic  are  told  by  organisers,  at  even  so  late  a  period 
as  the  Great  War,  of  how  while  apparently  addressing  an  empty 
road  they  were  listened  to  really  by  a  small  crowd  hidden  in  the 
blacksmith's  shop  behind  them,  or  spoke  their  message  to  an 
extended  line  behind  a  hedge,  which  promptly  ducked  to  invisi- 
bility on  the  approach  of  the  master.  In  1903  Lieut.-Colonel 
Pedder  could  write  :  "  Farm  service  is  still  subjugation.  It  yokes 
and  goads  and  brutalises.  Men  are  still  dismissed  if  their 
acquaintances  do  not  please  their  masters.  Their  wives,  though 
under  no  legal  obligation  to  do  so,  must  still  go  out  to 
field  labour  or  '  give  offence.'  Opposition  in  politics  may 
involve  '  a  march,'  as  they  have  learnt  to  call  a  compulsory 
flitting.  The  Parish  Council  gives  the  master  abundant  tests 
of  submission.  '  I  didn't  know  as  he  was  agin'  her,'  said  a 
labourer  of  fifty-five,  telling  how  he  unadvisedly  '  held  up  his 
hand  '  for  a  lady,  who  was  a  candidate  for  a  seat  in  the  village 
parliament.  '  But  didn't  he  just  give  it  to  I  afterwards  !  ' 
Still  as  a  slave  before  his  lord  represents  the  attitude  of  the  farm 
hand  in  the  presence  of  his  employer.  No  sheep  before  her 
shearers  was  ever  more  dumb  than  the  milkers  and  carters  and 
ploughmen  at  the  village  meetings  to  which  their  masters  may 
choose  to  summon  them.  They  are  cowed.  It  is  to  this  that 
the  race  have  come,  whom  Froissart  described  as  '  le  plus  perilleux 
peuple  qui  soit  au  monde,  et  plus  outrageux  et  orgueilleux.' 
Pride  is  dead  in  their  souls."  2 

The  temporary  burst  of  1890  did  not  last ;  by  1896  Unionism 
among  agricultural  labourers  seemed  more  dead  than  ever,  for  the 
depression  of  agriculture  reached  its  nadir  in  1896  and  hope  had 
deserted  the  English  countryside. 

1  I.e.,  belonging  to  his  employer  and  going  with  the  job. 

2  Contemporary  Review,  1903. 


3o      ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

With  the  new  century  came  a  new  movement  for  the  scientific 
investigation  of  poverty  in  all  parts  of  the  country.  Charles 
Booth  and  Seebohm  Rowntree  were  dealing  with  life  in  the  towns, 
and  other  inquirers  began  to  look  to  the  villages.  The  results  in 
two  of  these  were  typical.  In  a  village  practically  belonging  to 
the  Duke  of  Bedford  it  was  estimated  that  34-3  per  cent,  of  the 
population  had  not  sufficient  to  enable  them  to  remain  in  physical 
health  ;  if  the  working  class  alone  was  considered,  the  percentage 
was  41.  The  Duke  of  Bedford's  wages  were  15s.,  those  of  the 
other  farmers  12s.  to  14s.  Allotments  were  of  little  use,  being  too 
close  to  the  Duke's  game  preserves,  and  leave  had  to  be  obtained 
to  keep  pigs  or  poultry.  The  other  village  was  in  Wiltshire,  and 
had  some  smallholders  and  artisans  among  its  inhabitants.  The 
population,  which  had  halved  in  sixty  years,  was  824.  The 
average  labourer's  wage  was  15s.  y^d.,  including  all  allowances  ; 
carters  got  as  much  as  16s.  gd.  Twenty-eight  families  including 
144  persons  earned  less  than  enough  to  maintain  physical 
efficiency,  considerably  less  than  the  cost  of  that  supplied  in 
workhouses.  All  the  ordinary  labourers  but  one  came  into  this 
category.  Besides  this,  thirty-seven  other  families  only  rose  is. 
above  this  margin,  below  which  a  week  or  two  of  illness  or  unem- 
ployment immediately  precipitated  them. 

In  1906  the  ebbing  tide  of  prosperity,  as  we  have  seen,1  turned 
for  the  farmers,  and  there  were  even  stirrings  among  the  labourers. 
The  Labour  Party,  recently  formed,  was  offering  a  new  political 
outlook  to  the  worker,  and  Trade  Unionism  once  more  turned 
towards  the  land.  A  new  Union  arose,  since  called  "  The 
Eastern  Counties  Agricultural  Labourers'  and  Small  Holders' 
Union,"  of  which  the  driving  force  was  George  Edwards.  A 
salary  of  135.  a  week  for  the  joint  labours  of  himself  and  his  niece, 
who  did  the  clerical  work,  was  all  the  new  Union  dare  give. 
Later  two  organisers  were  appointed  at  equally  inadequate 
payment.  One  of  them  having  ventured  to  become  a  Rural 
District  Councillor  was  dismissed  from  his  daily  work,  and  the 
Union,  unable  to  pay  him  a  salary,  made  a  collection  and  gave 
him  a  hawker's  basket.  Such  were  still  the  difficulties  only 
eighteen  years  ago. 

In  1908  came  the  old  age  pensions  act  ;  mean  and  niggardly 

1  See  p.  26. 


.   AGRICULTURE  31 

as  it  was,  it  offered  a  haven  to  many  a  worn-out  man  and 
woman  before  whom  loomed  the  dread  doors  of  the  workhouse, 
unless  death  should  provide  a  timely  escape.  Five  shillings  a 
week  seems  little  enough  to  give  a  man  after  fifty  to  sixty  years' 
toil  and  privation,  but  it  meant  the  difference  between  a  place  of 
his  own  by  his  son's  or  daughter's  fireside  and  the  pauper  ward 
of  a  brutal  Poor  Law.  Lest  he  might,  however,  take  to  luxurious 
living,  a  kindly  nation  deducted  from  the  pension  any  private 
means  he  might  possess  over  £31  10s.  a  year.  So  much  for  the 
encouragement  of  the  great  Victorian  virtue  of  thrift.  In 
191 1  the  national  insurance  act  gave  the  wage-earner 
some  slight  protection  in  case  of  sickness.  But,  with  all  these 
apparent  improvements,  the  position  of  the  agricultural  labourer 
was  still,  relatively  to  other  workers,  far  below  what  it  had  been 
in  the  eighteenth  century.  In  191 2  R.  E.  Prothero  wrote  : 
"  The  peasant  under  the  old  system  had  a  definite  independent 
place  in  the  community.  He  commanded  respect  for  his  skill, 
judgment  and  experience  in  his  own  industries.  He  was  not 
cut  off  by  any  distinctions  in  ideas,  tastes  or  habits  from  the 
classes  above.  On  the  contrary,  each  grade  shaded  almost 
imperceptibly  into  the  next.  To-day  the  intermediate  classes 
have  disappeared.  Instead  of  the  ascending  scale  of  peasant 
labourer,  the  blacksmith,  carpenter,  wheelwright  and  carrier,  the 
small  farmer,  the  larger  farmer,  the  yeoman  occupying  his  own 
land,  and  the  squire,  there  are  in  many  villages  only  two  categories 
— employers  and  employed.  The  gulf  is  wide  enough.  It  has 
been  broadened  by  the  progress  of  a  civilisation  which  is  more 
and  more  based  on  the  possession  of  money.  All  the  employing 
classes  have  moved  on  and  upwards  in  wealth,  in  education,  in 
tastes,  in  habits,  in  their  standard  of  living.  Except  in  education, 
the  employed  alone  have  stood  comparatively  still.  The  sense 
of  social  inferiority  which  is  thus  fostered  has  impressed  the 
labourer  with  the  feeling  that  he  is  not  regarded  as  a  member  of  the 
community,  but  only  as  its  helot.  It  is  from  this  point  of  view 
that  he  resents,  in  a  half-humorous,  half-sullen  fashion,  the 
kindly  efforts  of  well-meaning  patrons  to  do  him  good,  the 
restrictions  imposed  on  his  occupation  of  his  cottage,  as  well  as 
the  paraphernalia  of  policemen,  sanitary  and  medical  inspectors, 
school-attendance  officers,  who  dragoon  and  shepherd  him  into 


32   ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

being  sober,  law-abiding,  clean,  healthy  and  considerate  of  the 
future  of  his  children.  To  his  mind,  it  is  all  part  of  the  treatment 
meted  out  to  a  being  who  is  regarded  as  belonging  to  an  inferior 
race."  1 

In  1913-14  came  a  stirring  of  the  waters.  A  strike  in  south-west 
Lancashire  over  the  area  which  supplied  market-garden  and  farm 
produce  for  the  towns  of  Liverpool,  Warrington,  St.  Helens, 
Wigan,  and  Southport  was  partially  successful.  The  workers 
secured  a  general  rise  of  2s.  a  week  in  wages,  shorter  hours,  and 
6d.  per  hour  overtime.  It  is  to  be  noted  that  they  were  backed 
by  the  Railwaymen  and  Transport  Workers,  and  that  their  wages 
were  well  above  the  general  level,  for,  though  they  worked  on  poor 
soil,  damaged  by  the  smoke  and  gases  of  a  great  industrial  area, 
the  competition  for  labour  of  these  towns  forced  up  its  price. 
In  both  1 91 3  and  1914  attempts  to  secure  a  minimum  wage  in 
rural  areas  were  made  in  the  House.  That  it  was  needed  seems 
evident  from  the  records  of  a  Herefordshire  county  court,  where 
a  farm  labourer  summoned  for  debt  was  shown  to  have  a  weekly 
wage  of  us.  and  a  cottage,  less  stoppages  for  wet  days.  He  had 
a  wife  and  four  children.  The  alternative  remedy,  proposed  by 
certain  rich  folk,  that  the  labourer  could  well  live  on  oatmeal  if 
only  he  would,  shows  that  their  mental  outlook  had  changed  little 
since  the  eighteenth  century. 

In  the  same  year  the  Land  Inquiry  Committee  published  its 
report  on  the  Rural  Areas,  some  points  of  which  may  be  of 
interest : — 

(a)  Sixty  per  cent,  of  agricultural  labourers  received  under  18s. 
a  week  from  all  sources,  between  20,000  and  30,000  had  less  than 
16s.,  and  real  wages  had  declined  since  1907.  The  Committee 
recommended  a  legal  minimum  wage  fixed  by  wage  tribunals. 

(b)  One  hundred  and  twenty  thousand  new  cottages  were 
wanted  at  once  in  rural  districts,  and  wages  should  be  raised  so 
that  an  economic  rent  could  be  paid.  It  was  estimated  that 
300,000  labourers  lived  in  tied  cottages,  and  the  Committee 
proposed  that  it  should  be  illegal  to  let  cottages  to  a  farmer  to 
sublet. 

(c)  It  was  estimated  that  only  one-sixth  of  the  total  number  of 
cottages  had  a  garden  of  |  acre  or  more,  and  it  was  suggested 

1  Prothero,  "  English  Farming,"  pp.  409-10. 


AGRICULTURE  33 

that  more  power  should  be  given  to  the  Parish  Councils  to  purchase 
land  for  allotments  by  compulsion. 

(d)  The  Agricultural  Holdings  Act  did  not  adequately  com- 
pensate for  the  depredations  of  winged  game,  and  much  good  land 
was  used  for  purposes  of  sport.  It  was  suggested  that  the  tenant 
farmer  should  be  allowed  to  kill  and  take  ground  game  and  snare 
and  keep  rabbits  on  his  own  land,  and  should  be  entitled  to 
compensation  for  damage  done  by  anyone's  game,  not  merely 
that  of  his  own  landlord. 

The  year  1914  promised  to  be  a  notable  one  in  rural  annals. 
At  Helion  Bumpstead,  in  north  Essex,  four  early- Victorian 
farmers  objected  to  their  men  wearing  Union  badges  and  offered 
them  the  choice  between  leaving  the  Union  or  dismissal  and 
eviction.  This  ridiculous  lock-out  developed  quickly  into  a  strike 
and  attracted  much  public  attention.  The  men  asked  for  ids. 
a  week  as  against  the  existing  13s.,  £8  for  harvest  work  of  four 
weeks,  and  a  weekly  half-holiday  ;  tied  cottages  to  be  held  on  a 
three  months'  tenancy.  After  nearly  six  months'  dispute  the 
men  won  15s.  a  week,  £8  for  harvest,  and  no  victimisation.  This 
settlement  was  made  on  August  3rd. 

While  the  North  Essex  farmers  were  of  the  mind  expressed  by 
one  of  them  in  the  words  "  The  men  have  formed  the  Union 
to  rebel  against  their  masters,  and  I  won't  have  none  on't,"  the 
King,  with  a  better  appreciation  of  the  position  of  "  masters  " 
in  the  twentieth  century,  was  recognising  the  Union  and  negotiat- 
ing with  its  leaders.  As  a  result,  labourers  on  the  Sandringham 
estate  were  granted  16s.  a  week  and  a  weekly  half-holiday,  and 
cottages  on  a  six  months'  tenancy.  "  The  King's  pay  and  the 
King's  conditions  "  became  the  worker's  cry  throughout  Norfolk. 
The  demand  for  more  leisure  became  insistent,  and  in  one  case 
the  men,  offered  a  choice  between  more  wages  or  shorter  hours 
chose  the  latter. 

Throughout  the  first  half  of  191 4  strikes  and  rumours  of  strikes 
filled  the  countryside  ;  Wiltshire,  Herefordshire,  Kent  and  Bed- 
fordshire were  not  behind  Norfolk.  Strikes,  successful  on  the 
whole — some  more  some  less — arose  all  over  the  country,  and 
a  big  movement  for  the  betterment  of  the  rural  worker  was 
culminating  in  general  action,  when  on  August  4th  Europe 
plunged  into  the  abyss.     The  men  returned  to  work  for  the  old 

E.D.E.  0 


34      ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

wages  and  on  the  old  conditions,  save  those  who  left  at  once  to 
give  their  lives  for  the  land  they  might  not  own.  Once  more 
the  work  was  all  to  do  again. 

Depopulation  of  the  Countryside — Housing — Increasing 
Dependence  on  Seaborne  Food. — Perhaps  the  most  striking  and 
alarming  phenomenon  of  the  last  fifty  years  has  been  the  exodus 
from  the  rural  areas  of  England.  Between  1871  and  1881  over 
90,000  labourers  left  the  land,  and  in  1891  there  were  90,000  fewer 
still.  From  1891  to  1901  the  number  of  agricultural  labourers 
dropped  some  160,000,  though  this  was  balanced  to  some  extent  by 
an  increase  of  56,000  nurserymen  and  gardeners  ;  in  the  next  ten 
years  there  was  a  partial  recovery  of  35,000.  But  during  the  whole 
forty  years  the  rural  workers  had  decreased  in  number  by  some 
f  per  cent.,  while  the  population  as  a  whole  had  risen  56  per  cent. 
As  it  is  usually  the  best  and  most  enterprising  men  and  women 
who  have  courage  to  make  a  move,  it  follows  that  the  average 
efficiency  of  those  left  is  lower,  and  the  cost  of  production  rises, 
especially  in  work  where  few,  if  any,  are  paid  more  than  enough 
to  keep  them  alive. 

It  is  doubtful  whether  low  wages  were  the  main  cause  of  the 
movement.  The  housing  question  was  probably  the  determining 
factor.  In  1885  a  Royal  Commission  on  Housing  brought  out 
the  fact  that  houses  for  the  agricultural  worker  could  not  be  built 
to  pay.  On  such  a  wage  as  10s.  to  12s.  a  week  no  one  could  pay 
a  rent  that  would  repay  the  builder.  As  a  result  houses  simply 
were  not  built.  In  1890  a  Housing  of  the  Working  Classes  Act 
was  passed  ;  by  1894  eight  cottages  had  been  built.  Such 
cottages  as  existed  were  bad,  when  they  were  not  impossible. 
Two  bedrooms  were  usually  the  maximum  allowance  ;  one  bed- 
room was  not  uncommon.  A  single  bedroom  for  mother, 
father  and  seven  children  was  not  among  the  worst  instances. 
One  labourer  in  a  Suffolk  village  summed  up  the  conditions  of 
his  cottage  thus  :  "  You  may  shut  the  doors  and  windows  close 
enough,  but  you  can't  keep  the  cat  out."  Roofs  in  holes,  through 
which  rain  fell  on  the  bed,  holes  in  the  walls  stopped  with  old  shirts 
and  rags,  falling  ceilings  and  pools  on  the  floors  whenever  it  rained, 
were  characteristic  of  many  of  the  "  cottage  homes  of  England." 
Even  if  watertight  and  upright,  there  was  often  no  water  supply 
but  an  open  ditch,  and  no  sanitation  of  any  kind.     For  a  cottage 


AGRICULTURE  35 

in  which  no  decent  farmer  would  house  a  cow  or  a  pig  wealthy 
landowners  were  not  ashamed  to  exact  a  shilling  or  so  per  week  for 
rent.  And  however  bad  they  might  be,  there  was  nothing  else 
to  be  had.  Young  men  and  women  wanting  to  marry  were  driven 
to  the  towns  in  sheer  despair.  Was  it  any  wonder  that  mothers 
with  any  ambition  for  their  children  urged  them  out  of  the 
stagnant  morass  ?  Not  all  landowners  were  indifferent  to  the 
welfare  of  their  workers  ;  some  even  overdid  their  benevolent 
care.  Beautiful  cottages  with  gardens  and  every  amenity  of  life 
appeared  on  many  a  model  estate,  and  everything  possible  was  done 
for  the  tenants.  But  it  was  too  often  done  for  the  tenants,  and 
not  by  them.  Reading-rooms,  in  which  the  papers  were  strictly 
supervised  ;  clean  cottages,  where  pig  and  poultry  would  spoil 
the  sylvan  beauty  of  the  scene  ;  public-houses  that  were  real, 
well-managed  inns  and  where  politics  were  a  barred  topic — what 
more  could  the  people  want  ?  Surely  he  was  a  brutal  and  ignorant 
peasant  whose  comment  was  reported  :  "  They  durn't  blow  their 
noses  at  Ard'nton  without  the  bailiff's  leave."  The  following 
description  of  a  village  in  Wiltshire  might  be  applied  to  other 
villages  all  over  England  : — 

"  His  lordship  is  lord  of  the  manor,  sole  (absentee)  landowner, 
patron  of  the  living,  receiver  of  rent  and  tithe.  Of  the  nearly 
2,000  acres  of  land  in  the  parish  about  40  are  glebe.  The  noble 
owner  lets  the  rest,  together  with  all  the  cottages,  to  two  farmers. 
The  two  farmers,  besides  controlling  the  cultivation  of  all  the 
land  in  the  parish,  and  the  tenancy  of  practically  all  the  cottages, 
are  the  churchwardens  and  overseers  of  the  poor  and  the  school 
managers.  One  of  them  has  charge  of  the  rate-book.  Nothing 
could  well  be  simpler  than  this  system  of  parish  government. 
The  labourer  who  wants  to  work  in  the  parish  must  obtain 
employment  on  the  Earl  of  Pembroke's  land  under  one  of  the 
Earl  of  Pembroke's  two  farmers,  who  will  house  him  in  one  of  the 
Earl's  cottages,  deducting  the  rent  from  his  weekly  wages.  He 
sends  his  children  to  the  '  national  '  school  (managed  by  the  Earl 
of  Pembroke's  farmers)  and  goes  on  Sunday  to  the  church,  where, 
under  the  eyes  of  the  two  churchwardens  (Lord  Pembroke's 
farmers  again),  he  '  sits  under  '  a  clergyman  appointed  to  the 
parish  by  the  Earl  of  Pembroke.  When  he  gets  too  old  to  work, 
he  must  apply  for  Poor  Law  relief  to  the  same  two  farmers. 

c  2 


36       ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

If,  in  spite  of  all  these  arrangements  for  his  comfort,  he  is  still 
discontented  with  his  lot,  there  is  no  building,  not  even  a  school- 
room, in  which  he  can  meet  to  take  counsel  with  his  fellows, 
unless  he  first  obtains  the  permission  of  the  Earl  of  Pembroke's 
farmers."  1 

His  villein  ancestors  were  hardly  more  enslaved  than  the 
labourer  in  such  a  village,  and  the  villein  had  at  any  rate  greater 
security  in  his  home  and  livelihood.  As  late  as  1894  a  great  ducal 
figure  in  the  West  of  England  threatened  to  evict  all  his  tenants 
if  they  persisted  in  electing  a  churchwarden  he  disliked,  though 
the  chosen  man  was  a  Tory  and  a  naval  officer.     The  Duke  won. 

Is  it  remarkable  that  the  most  spirited  among  the  young  men 
and  women  sought  freedom,  even  in  the  slums  of  the  cities  ? 

And  it  was  not  only  the  labourer  who  drifted  away  :  the  artisan 
was  being  squeezed  out  by  machinery  and  machine-made  tools  ; 
the  wheelwright,  the  carpenter  and  the  blacksmith,  the  makers 
of  rakes,  brooms  and  hurdles,  all  found  their  crafts  superseded  by 
factory-made  articles.  And  with  the  better-class  worker  went 
the  gaiety,  the  colour,  and  the  life  from  the  village.  The  old 
country  customs  were  dying — there  was  none  left  with  energy  and 
leisure  to  keep  them  going  or  find  new  ones.  The  utter  dullness 
of  village  life  became  more  than  the  young  could  stand. 

One  aspect  of  the  depopulation  of  the  rural  areas  that  alarmed 
many  was  our  growing  dependence  on  seaborne  food.  There 
were  some  far-sighted  enough  to  be  aware  that,  while  on  the  one 
hand  we  were  taking  no  care  to  preserve  or  secure  peace  in  the 
world,  we  were  at  the  same  time  drifting  to  a  position  in  which 
an  even  temporarily  victorious  enemy  could  starve  us  to  sub- 
mission. Between  1871  and  1911  the  value  of  the  principal 
foods  imported  doubled,  while  the  population  had  only  risen 
56  per  cent.  If  world  peace  could  be  assured  this  was  a  matter 
of  no  importance,  but  with  millions  of  men  in  arms  by  land  and 
sea  war  was  a  certainty  sooner  or  later. 

State  Intervention — Back  to  the  Land.— This  period  in  agricul- 
ture, as  in  other  branches  of  industry,  is  marked  by  an  increasing 
departure  from  the  practice  of  laisser-faire.  It  had  become 
obvious  even  before  the  depression  that  certain  things  could  only 
be  secured  by  the  intervention  of  the  State.     In  1875  the  most 

1  "  Among  the  Agricultural  Labourers  with  the  Red  Vans,"  1893. 


AGRICULTURE  37 

immediate  need  seemed  to  be  to  secure  to  the  tenant  the  full 
value  of  any  improvements  he  might  make.  If  the  land  was  to 
be  used  to  its  fullest  advantage  it  was  certain  that  the  farmer  must 
be  induced  to  put  into  it  all  the  capital  possible,  and  that  he  would 
not  do  this  unless  at  the  end  of  his  lease  he  could  claim  the  value 
of  what  was  not  yet  used  up.  The  effect,  for  example,  of  many 
manures  lasts  for  years  ;  if  the  farmer  gave  up  his  tenancy  before 
that  effect  was  exhausted  it  seemed  he  had  a  fair  claim  for  com- 
pensation. The  same  applied  to  buildings  which,  once  built, 
could  not  be  carried  away.  In  1875  the  Government  passed 
an  agricultural  holdings  act,  which  was  more  talk  than 
action  ;  but  in  1883  a  more  stringent  law  was  added,  and 
gradually  by  the  end  of  our  period  this  particular  grievance  of 
the  tenant  was  remedied.  After  the  report  of  the  1882 
commission  the  State  bestirred  itself  a  little.  Grants  in 
aid  of  local  taxation  equalised  the  burden  in  some  degree,  and 
measures  were  passed  to  protect  farmers  from  adulterated 
foodstuffs  and  the  competition  of  imitation  butter  and  cheese. 
A  railway  and  CANAL  traffic  ACT  tried  to  equalise  rates 
of  carriage  on  home  and  foreign  produce.  Perhaps  most 
important  of  all,  definite  measures  were  taken  to  prevent  disease 
among  animals.  The  Report  had  chiefly  concerned  itself  with  the 
ills  of  the  farmer,  and  thought  so  little  of  the  importance  of  the 
labourer  that  the  evidence  relating  to  him  was  not  published. 
But  there  were  others  who  held  that  a  really  flourishing  agricul- 
tural society  must  include  a  contented  and  respected  labourer. 
It  was  agreed  that  allotments  had  been  on  the  whole  successful, 
and  were  so  wherever  proper  conditions  attended  their  working. 
The  difficulty  was  to  get  land.  A  movement  was  started  to  apply 
to  lands  held  by  Charitable  Trusts  the  Act  of  1832,  that  authorised 
the  letting  as  allotments  land  set  aside  for  the  poor  in  some  of 
the  Enclosure  Acts.  But  neither  the  various  trustees,  nor  on 
appeal  the  Charity  Commission,  were  inclined  to  fall  in  with 
the  scheme.  The  next  step  was  to  work  for  a  Bill,  backed  first 
by  Sir  Charles  Dilke  and  then  by  Mr.  Jesse  Collings,  which  in 
1882  became  the  extension  of  allotments  act.  It  had, 
however,  been  badly  mauled  in  the  Lords,  where  the  final 
decision  as  to  the  suitability  of  the  land  and  the  settlement  of  any 
disputes  were  entrusted  to  the  Charity  Commission,  instead  ot  to 


38      ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

the  county  courts,  as  in  the  original  Bill.  The  result  was  that 
comparatively  little  was  done,  though  land  worth  a  million  in 
income  was  really  available.  Even  where  allotments  were 
secured,  often  the  conditions  attached  nullified  the  advantages, 
rents  were  often  demanded  in  advance,  and  church  attendance 
and  complete  idleness  on  Sunday  frequently  imposed. 

None  the  less  there  was  an  increasing  section  of  the  com- 
munity perturbed  by  the  state  of  our  rural  districts,  and  a  strong 
movement  with  the  cry  "  Back  to  the  land  "  was  formed.  It 
was  fed  by  two  streams,  one  that  wished  to  restore  the  small 
peasant  proprietor  ;  of  this  the  leader  had  been  John  Stuart  Mill. 
The  other  consisted  of  men  who  believed  that  the  elimination  of 
rent  would  serve  the  purpose.  They  based  their  theory  on  that 
of  Henry  George,1  but  the  chief  English  exponent  was  the  great 
scientist,  Alfred  Russel  Wallace.  Disbelieving  in  the  economic 
efficiency  of  small  properties,  he  advocated  farms  owned  by  the 
State  and  rented  at  a  moderate  sum.  The  farmer,  no  longer 
squeezed  by  a  profit-making  landlord,  would  be  able  to  pay 
his  labourers  properly,  while  the  rent  of  the  land  would  be  a 
firm  basis  of  national  finance.  In  1887  another  allotments 
act  was  passed.  Six  parliamentary  electors  could  request  the 
Sanitary  Authority  of  a  district  to  provide  allotments,  and  it 
might  rent  or  buy  land  for  the  purpose,  even  compulsorily.  But 
all  depended  on  the  Sanitary  Authority's  good-will,  and  not  much 
progress  was  made. 

In  1889  the  ministry  OF  agriculture  was  created. 

In  1890  a  Parliamentary  Committee  reported  on  small  holdings. 
It  showed  that  small  holdings  were  more  productive  than  large 
ones,  except  for  corn  and  sheep,  owing  to  the  greater  quantity  of 
labour  put  into  the  soil.  The  chief  difficulty  in  creating  small 
holdings  was  the  reluctance  of  landlords  to  erect  buildings,  but 
the  demand  for  small-rented  farms  was  general.  None  the  less, 
the  Committee  objected  to  compulsory  measures  for  securing 
land  for  the  purpose.  In  1892  a  small  holdings  act  em- 
powered the  County  Council  to  acquire  land,  borrowing  the 
necessary  money,  and  to  sell  or  rent  it  to  applicants.  The  pur- 
chase might  be  spread  over  fifty  years,  and  the  holdings  could 
vary  from  1  to  50  acres.     The  creation  of  County  Councils  in 

1  See  p.  168. 


AGRICULTURE  39 

1888  had  done  nothing  for  the  labourer,  but  when  in  1894 
Parish  Councils  were  set  up,  with  power  to  acquire  land  and  rent 
it  out  as  allotments  up  to  4  acres  per  applicant,  much  was  hoped 
for,  and  in  this  department  the  new  Councils  achieved  a  real 
success.  By  1907  40,000  men  were  holding  land  directly  from 
the  Parish  Council,  and  often,  by  voluntary  agreement  with  the 
landowner,  more  than  4  acres  could  be  secured.  As  an  illustration 
of  what  could  be  done  in  this  direction  the  proceedings  of  the 
Parish  Council  of  Belbroughton,  in  Worcestershire,  may  be  cited. 
In  1895  it  t0°k  a  field  of  18  acres  and  let  it  to  thirty  out-of-work 
nailers  ;  later  it  added  16,  then  109,  and  then  34  more  acres.  Out 
of  these  177  acres  112  men  obtained  a  livelihood  as  market 
gardeners,  and  employed  twenty-six  horses  to  carry  their  produce 
to  Birmingham  and  to  plough  their  fields.  In  191 9  this  Parish 
Council  controlled  500  acres. 

The  effects  of  allotments  are  as  follows  : — 

(a)  A  gross  increase  of  25  per  cent,  in  the  produce  over  ordinary 
farm  cultivation. 

(b)  Allotments  hinder  the  fall  of  wages,  by  increasing  the 
demand  for  labour  and  by  serving  as  a  reserve  fund  against 
unemployment. 

In  contrast  to  the  practical  failure  of  the  Small  Holdings  Act, 
owing  mainly  to  the  reluctance  of  County  Councils,  composed  as 
they  are  of  members  predominantly  of  the  landowning  class,  to 
put  the  Act  in  force,  the  allotment  movement  may  be  claimed  to 
have  effected  valuable  changes  and  to  have  helped  to  stay  the 
rural  exodus.  Further  help  was  given  by  the  State  in  the 
market  gardeners'  compensation  act  of  1 895,  which  enabled 
a  tenant  to  claim  compensation  for  improvements  even  if  effected 
without  the  landlord's  consent. 

In  1896  increased  care  in  prevention  of  the  spread  of  disease 
was  given  by  requiring  all  foreign  animals  to  be  slaughtered  at  the 
port  of  landing.  Best  perhaps  of  all,  the  State  has  supplied  in 
increasing  value  technical  education  on  agricultural  matters. 
Numerous  institutes  of  all  ranks,  from  the  University  to  the 
Cheese  School,  have  been  founded  and  aided  by  the  State  in  all 
parts  of  the  country.  Training  for  practical  and  scientific  farming 
and  horticulture  is  now  comparatively  easy  to  get.  The  Board  of 
Agriculture  by    free    leaflets    disseminates  the  newest  scientific 


40      ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

discoveries,  and  the  County  Councils  in  agricultural  areas 
encourage  technical  classes  for  the  worker.  Four  Universities 
have  departments  of  forestry.  The  gap  in  all  this  education  is 
the  labourer's  child.  Little  or  nothing  is  done  for  him,  and  he 
leaves  the  elementary  school  at  the  earliest  possible  moment,  not 
having  acquired  a  love  for  books,  and  with  no  help  given  him  to 
acquire  an  understanding  of  his  daily  toil.  Neither  for  his  life- 
work  nor  for  his  leisure  has  the  school  prepared  him,  and  not 
until  the  nation  is  ready  to  double  and  treble  its  expenditure  on 
rural  schools  will  the  gap  be  filled. 

Rural  Problems  of  the  Eve  of  the  War. — There  were  several 
problems  connected  with  rural  life  that  awaited  solution  in  1914, 
and  most  of  them  still  remained  unsolved  in  1924. 

(a)  Could  the  nation  afford  to  allow  the  land  of  England  to  pro- 
duce less  than  its  possible  maximum  ?  Continental  nations  with 
poorer  soil  produced  far  more  per  acre.  What  was  the  cause  of  our 
inferiority,  and  what  the  remedy  ?  Some  blamed  our  land  system, 
the  semi-feudal  power  of  the  owner,  the  clumsy  legal  methods  of 
buying  and  selling  land  ;  some  pointed  to  the  ignorance  and  inertia 
of  our  farming  class  ;  some  believed  the  remedy  lay  in  a  restored 
peasant  proprietorship  and  smaller  farms.  The  Socialists  boldly 
laid  hands  on  the  sacred  ark  and  demanded  the  abolition  of  the 
landowner  and  of  farming  for  profit,  with  the  intermediate  steps 
of  nationalising  the  land  and  the  imposition  of  a  legal  minimum 
wage.  The  only  thing  that  all  were  agreed  on  was  the  need  for 
reform,  lest  the  rot  that  ate  away  the  welfare  of  Italy  2,000  years 
before  should  ruin  us  also. 

(b)  The  menace  latent  in  our  growing  inability  to  feed  our 
45,000,000  with  the  produce  of  our  own  soil  was  evident  to  many. 
Against  modern  weapons  of  war  no  navy,  however  powerful,  could 
guarantee,  with  absolute  certainty,  our  overseas  supplies.  There 
seemed  little  hope  of  world  peace  ;  when  the  storm  broke,  should 
we  survive  ? 

(c)  The  question  of  nationalising  the  land  came  more  and  more 
to  the  fore.  Many  turned  to  history  to  show  that  in  strict  theory 
the  land,  once  the  nation's,  had  been  stolen  bit  by  bit  by  gradual 
repudiation  of  the  terms  under  which  it  had  been  held.  But 
the  English  race  is  sceptical  of  theory,  and  undisturbed  possession 
for  100  years  seems  to  most  of  us  sufficient  title.    A  more  hopeful 


AGRICULTURE  41 

attack  on  vested  interests  was  made  in  the  name  of  expediency. 
Since  all  investigators  found  that  the  private  ownership  of  land 
was  the  principal  hindrance  to  changes  that  were  becoming  more 
and  more  obviously  necessary,  would  it  not  be  well  to  get  rid  of 
it  ?  Since,  too,  under  the  present  system  land  often  increased 
in  value  for  social  reasons  and  without  any  outlay  of  labour  and 
capital  on  the  part  of  the  owner — e.g.,  in  the  suburbs  of  great 
cities — would  it  not  be  more  just  for  the  nation  to  acquire  this 
increment  and  use  it  for  the  good  of  all  ?  These  and  other  points 
of  controversy  were  well  to  the  fore  in  19 14. 

(d)  The  importance  of  securing  a  decent  standard  of  living  for 
all  members  of  the  community  was  becoming  generally  recognised, 
and  the  agricultural  worker's  claim  was  of  long  standing.  How 
was  such  a  standard  to  be  secured  ?  The  one  proposal  that  had 
not  so  far  been  tried  was  the  legally  established  minimum  wage. 
This  seemed  to  be  the  only  possible  line  of  advance,  but  it  was 
still  bitterly  opposed  by  all  the  disciples  of  laisser-faire .  The 
workers  themselves  wanted  also  shorter  hours  ;  in  all  industries 
the  claim  of  the  manual  worker  for  more  leisure  was  making 
itself  heard.  "  What  is  our  life  if,  full  of  care,  we  have  no  time 
to  stand  and  stare  ?  "  It  was  the  inevitable  reaction  from  nine- 
teenth century  speeding  up.  The  eighteenth  century  man  might 
work  fourteen  hours  a  day,  but  he  did  not  do  it  at  top  speed,  nor 
without  intervals  of  talk  and  dawdle.  If  "  work  while  you  work  " 
was  to  be  the  rule,  then  the  worker  demanded  also  time  to  play 
while  he  played.  Thus,  a  decent  minimum  wage  and  a  legal 
maximum  week  were  the  points  at  issue  in  1914. 

(e)  But  wages  and  hours  were  not  the  only  factors  in  a  decent 
life,  above  all  to  the  women.  Housing  in  1914  was  already  more 
than  a  burning  question.  Progressive  men  and  women  all  over 
the  country  were  trying  to  force  the  Rural  District  Councils  to 
fulfil  their  obligations  and  to  build  cottages.  It  was  possible  then 
to  do  it  without  loss  to  the  ratepayers.  The  Councils,  made  up  of 
farmers,  publicans  and  an  occasional  squire,  did  not  want  houses  ; 
they  preferred  tied  cottages  which  they  controlled  and  dismal 
shanties  to  which  even  the  meanest  and  dirtiest  taproom  was 
superior.  By  persistence  here  and  there  something  was  done — a 
dozen  cottages  built  where  fifty  were  needed  perhaps  ;  but  onthe 
whole  inertia  triumphed.     "  Leave  it  to  private  enterprise  ;  don't 


42      ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

risk  an  increase  in  the  rates  "  ;  the  cry  prevailed,  but  private 
enterprise  found  more  profitable  fields  for  its  capital.  Kingsley's 
description  of  rural  homes  in  1847  remained  largely  true  in  19 14. 
(/)  Lastly,  the  tyranny  of  "  sport  "  prevailed  still  in  many 
districts.  In  1903  Kipling  had  called  the  pheasant  the  "  master 
of  many  a  shire  "  ;  it  remained  so.  Valuable  land,  that  could 
have  produced  much  if  cultivated,  was  used  merely  for  the 
preservation  of  game,  foxes  still  raided  the  farmer's  henroost, 
and  ground  game  played  havoc  with  garden  and  allotment.  This 
side  of  the  question  was  receiving  greater  attention,  since  it  was 
becoming  more  and  more  a  point  of  controversy  how  far  the 
name  of  "  sport  "  could  be  attached  at  all  to  the  modern  slaughter 
of  what  are  really  tame  birds.  In  any  case,  there  were  many 
who  dared  to  challenge  the  claim  of  the  amusements  of  the  rich 
to  take  precedence  of  the  nation's  food. 


CHAPTER  III 

OUR  CHIEF  INDUSTRIES 

The  four  great  industries  of  modern  England  are  cotton,  wool, 
coal  and  iron.  Of  these  only  wool  has  a  long  history  of  import- 
ance. All  through  the  Middle  Ages  it  was  the  only  occupation 
that  came  anywhere  near  agriculture  in  extent  and  value.  Up 
to  the  end  of  the  fourteenth  century  we  were  the  great  wool- 
exporting  nation,  and  Flemish  looms  built  the  prosperity  of  the 
Low  Countries  on  English  raw  wool.  From  the  fifteenth  century 
the  form  of  our  wool  trade  changed  from  raw  material  to  unfinished 
cloth,  but  it  remained  the  backbone  of  our  foreign  commerce. 
Iron  we  produced  for  our  own  use,  but  we  imported  a  good  deal  ; 
coal  was  used  for  heating,  but  not  for  manufacture  or  transit, 
and  not  in  any  case  far  from  its  source  ;  cotton  was  only  used  in 
conjunction  with  linen  or  wool. 

Among  the  striking  results  of  the  Industrial  Revolution  at  the 
end  of  the  eighteenth  century  were  the  displacement  of  wool 
by  cotton  and  the  rapid  increase  of  the  demand  for  iron  and  so 
for  coal.  But  for  years  agriculture  remained  the  chief  occupation 
of  the  nation,  in  spite  of  enclosures  and  the  drift  to  the  towns. 
It  was  not  till  the  change  that  came  after  1870,  already  referred 
to,1  that  the  balance  of  occupations  showed  a  decline  in  rural 
pursuits.  It  was  not  only  our  new  dependence  on  seaborne 
food  that  produced  the  change  ;  there  was  also  the  fact  that 
a  large  part  of  the  nation  was  rapidly  raising  its  standard  of  living, 
and  consequently  to  many  food  ceased  to  be  the  chief  item  of 
expenditure.  While  it  is  true  that  far  too  many  of  us  do  not 
get  enough  to  eat,  it  is  also  true  that  more  of  us  are  now  able  to 
satisfy  other  needs  than  mere  hunger.  These  two  factors — sea- 
borne food  and  a  smaller  proportional  demand  for  food  of  all 
kinds — have  combined  to  produce  a  decrease  in  the  percentage 

1  See  p.  23. 
43 


44      ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

of  population  engaged  in  food  production,  and  an  increase  in 
industrial  production  and  in  distribution.  The  table  given  below 
shows  that  since  1870  there  has  been  a  rapid  rise  in  the  figures  of 
the  commercial  class  and  a  smaller  but  still  important  rise  in  the 
industrial.  In  the  professional  class  there  has  been  an  increase 
in  the  worlds  of  knowledge  and  amusement ;  art,  music,  exhibi- 
tions, games,  literature,  scientific  work  and  teaching,  all  attract 
and  find  a  livelihood  for  an  increasing  section  of  the  people,  but 
this  has  been  balanced  by  a  relative  decline  in  the  clerical  and  legal 
professions.  The  relative  positions  of  commerce  and  industry  is 
accounted  for  by  the  growing  productive  efficiency  of  machinery, 
by  which  fewer  men  produce  more  goods,  while  this  increased 
quantity  of  goods  demands  more  hands  for  distribution.  Unfortu- 
nately this  does  not  account  for  all  the  increase  ;  the  growing 
number  of  middlemen  in  all  trades  is  disquieting  ;  goods  often 
pass  through  several  hands,  each  exacting  a  profit  that  is  quite 
unnecessary.  Thousands  of  people  exist  who  merely  buy  to 
resell  goods  they  never  handle  at  all ;  many  of  them  are  social 
parasites  performing  no  useful  function.  As  industry  is  now 
organised  it  is  difficult  to  get  started  in  productive  work  ;  capital 
and  credit  on  a  large  scale  are  needed  :  it  is  comparatively  easy 
to  cut  into  the  distributing  business  by  getting  hold  of  some  one 
else's. 


DISTP 

IBUTION 

OF  OCCUPATIONS 

,  1871-19H 

1871 

1881 

1891 

1901 

1911 

Professional 

684,102 

647,075 

926,132 

972,685 

1,014,220 

Percentage      of 

3 

2'5 

3'2 

2'9 

2-8 

population . 

Domestic 

i,633,SI4 

1,803,810 

1,900,328 

1,994,917 

2,121,717 

Percentage      of 

7-2 

71 

6-5 

61 

5'9 

population . 

Commercial 

815,424 

980,128 

1,399,735 

1,858,454 

2,214,031 

Percentage      of 

36 

37 

4-8 

5*7 

61 

population . 

Agriculture      and 

Fishing 

1,657,138 

1,383,184 

1,336,045 

i,i52,495 

1,260,476 

Percentage      of 

7'3 

5-2 

4-6 

3-5 

3'4 

population. 

Industrial   . 

5,137,725 

6,373,367 

7,336,344 

8,350,176 

9,468,138 

Percentage      of 

22*2 

24-5 

267 

257 

26-2 

population. 

Total  population. 

22,712,266 

25,974,439 

29,002,325 

32,527,843 

36,070,492 

OUR  CHIEF  INDUSTRIES  45 

Cotton. — The  industry  that  best  illustrates  this  modern  tendency 
to  the  increase  of  middlemen  is  that  of  cotton.  It  offers  also  the 
most  striking  example  of  minute  specialisation.  The  cotton 
industry  is  peculiarly  the  product  of  the  Industrial  Revolution. 
It  was  not  until  the  invention  of  spinning  machinery  that  a  yarn 
could  be  woven  strong  enough  to  act  as  warp,  and  eighteenth 
century  cottons  had  linen  warp.  This  newness  gave  it  a  great 
advantage  over  wool  or  linen  in  the  speed  with  which  it  could 
adopt  the  new  inventions.  Unhampered  by  custom  or  law,  the 
early  cotton -spinners,  men  of  the  greatest  acuteness  and  energy, 
often  sprung  from  the  craftsman  class,  drove  ahead  the  new 
manufacture — over  the  bodies  of  men,  women  and  children,  it  is 
true — to  the  position  of  premier  industry  in  the  first  industrial 
nation  of  the  world.  By  1874  all  the  processes  had  been  provided 
with  machines  ;  little  remained  to  do  but  perfect  them.  Spinning, 
and  its  accessory  arts  of  carding  and  roving,  warp  winding, 
weaving,  finishing,  bleaching  and  printing,  were  by  then  all 
performed  by  steam-driven  machinery  in  large  factories,  and, 
except  for  an  increase  in  ring-spinning  instead  of  mule-spinning, 
there  was  no  great  mechanical  development  between  1874  and 
1914. 

The  amount  of  machinery  required  for  modern  textile  manu- 
facture may  be  gauged  by  the  following  sketch  of  the  processes 
involved.  As  soon  as  the  raw  cotton  is  unpacked  from  the  bales, 
in  which  it  arrives  at  the  mill,  it  is  passed  through  machines  for 
removing  grit  and  dirt.  These  are  glorified  wire  cages,  which 
whirl  round  and  round  and  drive  off  the  dirt  by  centrifugal  force. 
Then  follows  a  machine  which  is  devised  to  drive  out  such  cotton 
as  is  of  too  short  staple  for  the  kind  of  yarn  required  ;  these 
machines  are  capable  of  minute  adjustments.  The  cotton  then 
goes  through  the  modern  equivalent  of  carding,  and,  as  finally 
prepared,  comes  from  between  rollers  like  a  fine  veil  of  white 
mist, is  directed  to  the  apex  of  a  triangle,  and  comes  away  in  cream- 
white  snake-like  strands  about  i  inch  in  diameter.  These  strands 
are  then  rolled  three  into  one  and  given  a  slight  twist  by  another 
machine  and  wound  on  bobbins,  which  are  carried  off  in  trucks 
to  the  spinning-room.  There  dozens  of  ring-spinning  or  mule- 
spinning  machines  are  ranged  in  rows  and  worked  by  overhead 
belts.     Mule-spinning  gives    a    perfectly    round    thread  ;    ring- 


46      ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

spinning  flattens  it  slightly.  From  the  bobbins  another  set  of 
machines  wind  the  spun  yarn  into  hanks,  which  go  to  the  dyers  or 
bleachers  if  required,  and  on  its  return  the  yarn  is  wound  off 
again  on  to  the  bobbins.  For  the  weaving  of  patterned  cloths 
these  bobbins  are  placed  on  huge  V-shaped  frames  and  each 
thread  led  off,  pinned  and  passed  through  its  proper  tooth  on  a 
machine  for  winding  warp,  and  so  is  wrapped,  each  in  its  proper 
place,  on  a  large  drum.  These  drums  are  carried  off  to  a  sizing- 
room,  where  the  warp  is  unwound,  passed  through  a  bath  of  size, 
squeezed  between  rollers,  dried  by  passing  over  hot  cylinders, 
and  re- wound  on  drums.  Then  comes  the  only  survival  of  the 
hand-worker,  when  each  new  warp  is  attached  thread  by  thread 
to  the  end  of  an  old  one.  The  men  and  their  attendant  girls  of 
fourteen  or  fifteen  years  of  age  work  at  a  speed  incredible  to  the 
onlooker  ;  but  even  here  the  machine  is  replacing  them,  for  an 
American  invention  can  pick  up  the  two  ends  and  tie  them  at  the 
rate  of  250  knots  a  minute.  Finally,  the  warp  is  placed  on  the 
loom  and  ^he  cloth  woven  ;  the  modern  loom  is  automatic  and 
stops  at  a  broken  thread. 

Obviously  the  machinery  required  is  large  and  expensive,  and 
throughout  the  textile  areas  great  machine-making  businesses 
have  arisen  to  supply  the  need.  Rochdale  and  Keighley  are 
important  centres  of  this  industry,  which  helps  to  restore  the 
balance  of  labour  required — as  between  men  and  women. 

The  difficulties  of  carrying  on  a  complex  and  difficult  technical 
process  have,  however,  brought  about  two  very  important  things. 
In  the  first  place,  each  manufacturer  has  tended  to  confine  his 
attention  to  one  or  two  processes,  so  that  few  businesses  both 
spin  and  weave,  while  the  finishing  trades  of  bleaching  and  dyeing 
are  entirely  separate.  But  the  change  has  gone  further  than  this. 
Most  spinning  firms  spin  only  a  few  kinds  of  yarn  ;  they  may 
specialise  in  very  fine  or  medium  or  coarse  "  counts,"  but  only 
in  a  few  of  one  class.  Each  weaver  also  produces  usually  his 
special  type  of  cloth.  What  is  more,  spinners  of  the  same  class 
of  yarn  and  weavers  of  the  same  type  of  cloth  tend  to  exist  in 
the  same  district.  Thus  spinning  is  mostly  carried  on  in  South 
Lancashire  and  weaving  in  the  North.  Bolton  is  the  centre  for 
the  finer  yarn,  Oldham  for  the  coarser.  The  finer  and  lighter 
fabrics  come  from  Preston  and  Chorley  ;  Blackburn,  Darwen  and 


OUR  CHIEF  INDUSTRIES  47 

Accrington  produce  shirtings  and  cheap  goods  for  India  and 
China  ;  Nelson  and  Colne  made  goods  woven  from  dyed  yarn. 
This  attention  to  the  technical  side  has  prevented  the  manufacturer 
being  also  the  distributor,  to  such  an  extent  that  cotton  has  become 
the  paradise  of  the  middleman. 

Let  us  for  a  moment  follow  a  bale  of  raw  cotton  in  the  twentieth 
century  from  the  shores  of  Carolina  to  its  final  destination  in, 
say,  India  or  London.  It  arrives  at  Liverpool  consigned  to  some 
broker,  who  has  bought  it  from  the  grower  or  the  grower's  agent 
in  America.  This  broker  will  not  sell  it  directly  to  the  spinner, 
but  to  another  broker,  who  has  connection  with  several  spinning 
firms.  Sometimes  it  passes  two  or  three  times  in  this  way,  but 
always  at  least  once  from  a  broker  who  imports  to  a  broker  who 
sells  to  the  cotton-spinning  public.  This  second  broker  knows 
exactly  the  kind  of  cotton  required  by  his  various  clients  and 
buys  accordingly.  Raw  cotton  is  now  so  graded  and  marked 
that  it  can  be  sold  without  examination,  though  a  considerable 
quantity  is  still  sold  by  sample.  When  the  spinner  has  turned 
his  raw  cotton  into  yarn,  he  sells  the  yarn  to  another  broker,  quite 
a  different  man,  for  no  broker  in  raw  cotton  deals  in  yarn,  or 
vice  versa.  This  broker  sells  to  the  weaver  ;  sometimes  he  buys 
and  sells  outright  ;  sometimes  he  merely  acts  as  agent.  The 
cotton  market  is  mainly  at  Liverpool,  the  yarn  market  at  Man- 
chester. The  weaver  sells  his  product,  most  often  "  grey  cloth," 
i.e.,  unbleached  cotton  cloth,  toa"  merchant  "  or  a  "  grey-cloth 
merchant."  The  word  "  merchant  "  in  Manchester  retains  its 
old  meaning  of  a  foreign  trader,  though  "  grey-cloth  merchant  " 
may  mean  one  who  supplies  the  home  market.  The  "  merchant ' 
is  also  known  as  a  "  shipper."  Each  "  merchant  "  has  his  own 
specialised  market,  usually  a  very  narrow  one.  He  sends  the  grey 
cloth  to  be  bleached  or  dyed  and  finished  to  suit  the  requirements 
of  his  market,  and  on  its  return  he  sends  it  to  a  packer  to  be  packed 
for  export.  Packing  is  a  skilled  trade,  and  heavy  goods  are  com- 
pressed under  huge  pressure  to  save  cargo  space.  Probably,  if 
his  market  is  in  a  distant  country,  the  merchant  keeps  an  agent 
or  agents  there  to  whom  the  finished  goods  are  consigned,  carefully 
stamped  with  his  trade  mark  and  carrying  the  prestige  of  his  name. 

Such   is   the  '  organisation   of  the   most   minutely  subdivided 
industry  at  present  existing.     Its  critics  point  to  the  great  number 


48      ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

of  middlemen's  profits  entailed  and  to  the  facility  with  which 
speculation  can  upset  the  markets,  and  maintain  that  such 
specialisation  must  increase  the  risks  due  to  a  drop  in  any  par- 
ticular market.  Those  engaged  in  the  industry,  on  the  other 
hand,  hold  that  the  middlemen's  profits  are  balanced  by  the 
savings  effected  by  the  thorough  knowledge  and  consequent 
economies  possible  in  dealing  with  only  one  small  process,  that 
no  man  can  both  produce  and  market  with  effect,  and  that  attempts 
to  deal  in  several  branches  or  several  markets  are  a  source  of  risk 
through  insufficient  knowledge.  As  to  speculation,  when  ignorant 
it  soon  defeats  itself,  and  when  expert  is  a  cause  of  stability  rather 
than  uncertainty.  Most  of  the  gamblings  in  "  futures  "  are  of 
the  nature  of  "  hedging  "  to  cover  undue  risks. 

Trusts  and  combines  have  appeared  in  the  industry,  and  a 
good  deal  of  it  is  joint  stock.  The  conspicuous  trusts  are  in  the 
sewing-cotton  branch,  where  Coats  now  dominate  the  entire 
output,  and  in  the  finishing  trades  of  bleaching  and  dyeing. 

Another  aspect  of  the  industry  of  some  interest  is  the  number 
of  foreigners  who  have  settled  in  Manchester  to  act  as  buying 
agents  for  their  own  countries.  Consequently,  Manchester  mer- 
chants keep  fewer  representatives  abroad  than  the  nature  of  their 
business  might  suggest ;  Greece,  Spain,  and  Germany  come  to 
buy  at  their  doors. 

The  chief  problem  facing  the  principal  exporting  industry  of 
England  is  that  of  getting  its  raw  material.  The  great  source 
of  supply  is  America,  and  she  each  year  is  using  an  increasing 
proportion  of  her  own  product ;  the  time  may  come  when  she 
will  need  it  all.  Egypt  supplies  a  fine  long-staple  cotton,  nearly 
as  good  as  the  "  Sea-Island  "  kind  of  Carolina,  but  for  the  coarser 
yarns  the  shorter  staple  of  the  American  mainland  is  our  chie 
supply.  Indian  cotton  is  coarse  and  not  greatly  used.  Develop- 
ments are  planned  in  the  Soudan  between  the  two  Niles,  where 
it  is  thought  cotton  can  be  grown  on  irrigated  land,  which  has  the 
advantage  of  a  possible  control  of  the  water  supply.  Cotton 
requires  much  sun  and  plenty  of  water  at  the  right  time  ;  rain 
has  a  way  of  coming  at  the  wrong.  Nigeria  and  Uganda  are  also 
possible  areas  for  a  large  cotton  supply.  Cotton  seeds  are  now 
crushed  for  oil,  which  is  used  as  salad  oil  and  for  making  margarine, 
and  the  remnant  is  made  into  oil-cake  for  fodder. 


OUR  CHIEF  INDUSTRIES  49 

More  than  any  other  industry  cotton  is  localised  ;  76  per  cent, 
of  the  cotton  operatives  of  Great  Britain  and  Ireland  and  96  per 
cent,  of  those  of  England  live  in  Lancashire  and  a  strip  of  North 
Cheshire.  Their  numbers  were  over  half  a  million  in  1901,  and 
ranged  from  41,000  in  Blackburn  and  29,000  in  Bolton  and 
Oldham,  on  through  thirty-six  towns  to  Clitheroe  with  3,300. 
More  than  half  are  women  ;  only  at  Nelson,  Colne,  and  Roy  ton 
do  the  men  workers  slightly  exceed  the  women.  The  whole 
area  is  one  of  the  most  densely  populated  in  Europe,  and,  one 
must  add,  one  of  the  dreariest.  This  dreary  aspect  is  not  essential 
to  the  manufacture,  as  German  industrial  towns  have  proved,  and 
we  may  hope  that  the  twentieth  century  will  see  Lancashire  even 
yet  a  garden  city,  once  its  dwellers  desire  to  have  it  so. 

Wool. — Much  that  has  been  said  about  the  cotton  industry 
would  also  apply  to  wool,  but  the  latter  is  neither  so  narrowly 
localised  nor  so  minutely  subdivided.  This  is  due  partly  to 
its  slow  evolution  out  of  a  domestic  industry,  which  cotton  never 
was,  and  partly  to  the  scattered  areas  that  supply  its  raw  material. 

The  manufacture  of  woollen  cloth  is  the  oldest  of  English 
industries  ;  in  the  early  Middle  Ages  most  people's  clothes  were 
spun  and  woven  by  women  in  their  own  homes,  often  with  wool 
from  their  own  sheep.  The  fleece  was  scoured,  the  wool  sepa- 
rated, carded  and  spun  at  home  ;  every  woman  was  a  spinster. 
Hundreds  of  cottages  had  their  looms  ;  all  better-class  housewives 
could  weave,  and  ladies  of  rank  wove  more  beautifully,  but  not 
less  industriously,  than  others.  Gradually  as  wealth  increased 
came  the  demand  for  cloths  of  special  fineness  or  colour,  and  the 
looms  of  Flemish  gildsmen  worked  up  English  wool  and  returned 
it  as  the  finest  cloth.  Edward  III.  made  a  determined  effort  to 
develop  the  craft  of  weaving  in  England,  inviting  over  foreign 
craftsmen  to  teach  his  subjects,  and  by  the  end  of  the  fifteenth 
century  the  main  export  of  England  was  undyed  cloth,  not  wool. 
During  the  sixteenth  century  there  was  a  fresh  development  ;  an 
influx  of  refugees  from  the  Continent,  wisely  encouraged  by  the 
Government,  taught  English  weavers  the  finer  mysteries  of  their 
art,  and  English  cloth  began  to  rival  the  best  from  Continental 
looms.  Down  to  the  time  of  the  Industrial  Revolution  it  remained 
our  premier  industry.  Its  evolution  from  a  domestic  to  a  factory 
industry  was  much  slower  than  that  of  cotton — partly  because  it 

E.D.E.  D 


5o      ECONOMIC   DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

was   hampered   by    restrictions,   partly   that   it   already   existed 
scattered  over  a  large  area,  and  took,  therefore,  longer  to  concen- 
trate.    Not  till  after  1840  was  wool  carding,  combing  and  spinning 
done  entirely  by  machinery,  and  even  in  1854  hand-looms  were 
still  at  work  in  considerable  numbers.     The  woollen  manufacture, 
unlike  the  cotton,  drew  its  raw  material  from  English  farms, 
nearly  all  our  coarse  wool  being  so  supplied,  only  fine,  long  wools 
being  imported  from  Silesia  and  Spain.     It  is  since  1874  that  the 
enormous  demand  for  overseas  raw  wool  has  come,  though  its 
import  was  increasing  during  the  previous  forty  years.     Nowadays 
the  bulk  of  our  raw  wool  comes  from  the  Southern  Hemisphere — 
Australia,  New    Zealand,    South    America,    and    South  Africa. 
England  still  produces  wool — in  191 2  as  much  as  180,000,000  lbs., 
all  grown  close    to    the    manufacturing  centres.      This  English 
wool  does  not  fetch  the  price  of  Australian,  mainly  because 
English  farmers,  working  on  a  smaller  scale,  cannot  sort,  classify 
and  guarantee  their  wool,  as  the  Australian  squatter  does,  and  they 
steadily  refuse,  by  co-operation  and  businesslike  partnerships, 
to  do  by  joint  action  what  is  impossible  singlehanded.     Where 
such  methods  have  been  tried,  English  wool  holds  its  own  in 
the  London   market — for  London,  though  200  miles  from  the 
manufacturing  district,  is  still  the  scene  of  the  great  wool  sales, 
though  much  is  now  sold  and  bought  in   Sydney  and  other 
Australian  ports.     Science  and  climate  have  combined  to  produce 
in  the  Australian  merino  the  finest  wool-bearing  animal  known, 
and  the  businesslike  methods  of  the  Australian  sheep-farmer, 
backed  by  an  enlightened  Government,  secure  to  the  purchaser 
at  Sydney  a  certainty  of  choice  that  makes  it  worth  while  to  keep 
agents   there.      On   an   Australian   sheep-run,   where   bands   of 
shearers,  working  with  electric  clipping-machines,  can  shear  100 
sheep  per  day  per  man,  the  fleece  is  immediately  separated  into 
four  parts,  according  to  its  length  and  fineness.     Great  care  is 
taken  to  avoid  dirt  and  bits  of  string  and  other  foreign  matter 
getting  in,  and  a  station  with  a  reputation  for  classification  com- 
mands a  high  price.     Some  big  stations  are  beginning  to  scour  their 
own  wool  to  save  the  freight  on  dirt  and  oil.     England  no  longer 
buys  the  bulk  of  Australian  wool,  for  it  is  France  and  America 
that  demand  the  finest  wools.     English  manufacture  is  concerned 
mainly  with  the  heavier  and  coarser  woollens,  and  draws  its 


OUR  CHIEF  INDUSTRIES  51 

supplies  largely  from  South  Africa  and  South  America  and  from 
home. 

England  has  a  considerable  export  trade  in  "  tops,"  i.e.,  wool 
prepared  for  spinning  by  combing.  These  were  sent,  up  to  1874, 
to  Germany,  Russia,  Italy,  and  Belgium.  Yarns  are  both  exported 
and  imported,  for  Continental  firms  often  make  yarns  different 
from  ours,  but  of  use  for  our  cloths.  The  cloth  merchant  both 
exports  and  imports  ;  if  the  former,  he  often,  as  in  the  cotton 
trade,  buys  cloth  "  in  the  grey  "  and  has  it  dyed  and  finished  to 
suit  his  market.  There  are,  therefore,  middlemen  in  wool  as  in 
cotton,  but  not  quite  so  many  and  by  no  means  so  universally. 
Many  manufacturers  deal  direct  with  the  wholesalers,  without 
an  intermediate  agent  ;  some  even  have  a  retail  trade,  or  carry 
it  still  further  and  sell  their  cloth  made  up  into  suits  and 
costumes. 

As  to  specialisation  in  process,  there  is  a  difference  between 
the  worsted  and  the  woollen  branches.  Most  woollen  manu- 
facturers undertake  all  the  processes  from  raw  wool  to  finished 
cloth.  Worsted  is  rarely  spun  and  woven  by  the  same  firm. 
The  processes  are  much  as  they  were  in  the  Middle  Ages,  only 
with  appropriate  machinery  for  each.  Sorting,  scouring,  carding 
and  combing,  oiling,  spinning,  sizing,  placing  the  warp  on  the 
loom,  weaving,  dyeing  and  finishing,  all  go  on  with  many  exten- 
sions and  variations.  For  our  dyes  we  have  had  to  go  to  Germany, 
where  scientific  research  has  for  years  been  devoted  to  their 
development,  and  even  nine  years  after  1914  English  dyers  are 
still  unable  to  find  adequate  substitutes. 

As  a  centre  of  the  woollen  trade  Bradford  takes  the  place  that 
Manchester  does  in  cotton,  but  it  has  more  serious  rivals,  and  the 
whole  industry  lacks  the  concentration  of  the  Lancashire  area. 
There  still  survive  outlying  areas,  like  Stroud  in  Gloucestershire 
and  Bradford-on-Avon  in  Wiltshire,  making  their  own  specialities. 
There  is  even  a  little  industrial  town  on  Dartmoor  that  depends 
for  its  existence  on  a  mill  making  coarse  woollen  cloths.  Kidder- 
minster still  makes  carpets,  though  not  "  Kidderminsters."  Within 
the  West  Riding  the  tendency  for  towns  to  specialise  shows 
itself  as  in  Lancashire,  but  has  not  gone  so  far.  Bradford  makes 
11  tops  "  and  dyes  ;  Huddersfield  is  noted  for  its  fine  cloths ; 
Dewsbury   and  its   neighbours   for   "  shoddy."     This   last   is  a 

d  z 


52      ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

cloth  made  from  wool  got  from  old  cloth,  tailors'  clippings  and 
old  clothes,  which  are  torn  to  pieces,  cleansed  and  re-spun. 

Coal — Coal  had  been  mined  in  England  from  early  times  and 
used  for  heating,  but  the  workings  had  mostly  been  shallow,  and 
often  in  outcrops  only.  The  discovery  in  1735  of  a  means  of 
using  it  for  iron  smelting  gave  a  great  impetus  to  the  demand 
for  it,  and  deeper  and  more  dangerous  mines  became  common. 
The  difficulty  of  carrying  off  the  water  of  these  deep  mines  was 
the  immediate  occasion  for  the  invention  of  the  steam-engine  for 
pumping,  which,  adapted  to  rotatory  motion,  became  the  basis 
of  a  new  era.  Up  to  1874  England  supplied  the  bulk  of  the 
world's  coal ;  after  that  date,  though  the  demand  for  it  continued 
and  increased,  the  United  States  rapidly  overtook  it  and  reached 
the  first  place  in  world  production.  In  1905  the  United  States 
produced  350  million  tons,  the  United  Kingdom  236  million, 
Germany  came  third  with  170  million,  and  France  fourth  with 
35  million.  In  1913,  out  of  a  total  production  in  Great  Britain 
of  287  million  tons,  some  73  million  were  exported.  Our  chief 
coalfields  are  in  South  Wales,  the  Midlands  (South  Lancashire, 
Yorkshire,  Nottinghamshire,  Staffordshire  and  Flint),  North- 
umberland and  Durham,  the  Forest  of  Dean,  the  Upper  Bristol 
Avon  (Radstock),  and  lately  in  Kent. 

The  production  of  coal  has  always  been  a  source  of  anxiety  to 
those  who  regard  with  any  care  the  welfare  of  their  fellows.  In 
the  early  nineteenth  century  the  condition  of  miners  and  their 
families  was  such  as  to  be  incredible,  were  it  not  so  well  authenti- 
cated. Ignorant,  brutal,  pariahs  to  rich  and  poor  alike,  they 
lived  apart  a  life  of  horror.  Not  till  after  1815  was  it  customary 
to  hold  inquests  on  miners  killed  in  the  mines  ;  precautions 
against  accidents  were  almost  non-existent  and  the  mines  almost 
unventilated.  The  Report  of  a  Commission  in  1842  shocked  the 
nation  into  drastic  legislation,  and  the  work  of  women  and  of 
children  under  ten  was  totally  forbidden  underground.  Gradually 
humanity  won  its  slow  triumphs,  and  a  code  of  regulations  was 
formed  that  preserved  the  miner  from  the  grossest  of  his  dangers 
and  introduced  some  decency  into  his  existence.  The  work  of 
Trade  Unions  did  more,  and  things  are  far  better  than  they  were 
in  1850.  But  the  condition  of  the  mining  industry  is  still  unsatis- 
factory and  its  workers  increasingly  restless.     In  spite  of  develop- 


OUR  CHIEF  INDUSTRIES  53 

ments  in  coal-cutting  machinery,  run   by  compressed-air  engines 
or  by  electric  motors,  in  mechanical  transit  underground,  and 
considerably  increased  legal  protection  for  the  workers,  it  remains 
a  very  dangerous  occupation  and  a   badly  organised  industry. 
This  is  largely  due  to  the  great  variation  in  value  of  the  coal  and 
the  conditions  of  its  working,  together  with  great  subdivision 
of  property.     There   are   altogether   some   3,000   collieries   and 
1,500  boards  of  directors.     Coal  seams  are  thin  or  thick,  rich  or 
poor,  and  the  return  for  a  given  expenditure  of  labour  and  capital 
varies  greatly.     Wages  in  any  district  are  determined  by  what 
the  poorest  mine  can  bear  ;    the  advantages  of  a  rich  seam  mostly 
go  into  the  pockets  of  the  royalty  owners  and  the  colliery  com- 
panies.    Besides  this,  the  old  traditions  of  great  profits  make  even 
those  colliery  owners  who    can    afford    it   slow  to  expend  un- 
remunerative   capital  on  the  welfare   of  the  workers.     Miner's 
nystagmus,  a  terrible  form  of  eye   disease,   is  still   more  pre- 
valent than  it  need  be  owing  to  refusal  to  instal  electric  light 
in  place  of  oil  lamps.     The  housing  in  mining  districts  is  the 
worst  in  the  kingdom  ;  thousands  of  houses  have  only  two  rooms, 
often  with  seven  or  eight  inmates  including  several  adults.      It 
has  been  stated  that  houses  condemned  after  the  cholera  epidemic 
of  1840  as  unfit  for  habitation  are  still  occupied  and  even  grossly 
overcrowded.     The  accidents  reported  are  still  a  scandal  ;    the 
average  death  rate  is  over  1,000  a  year,  or  nearly  four  a  day,  and 
there  are  on  an  average  517  casualties  per  day.     The  law  has 
been  strengthened  to  protect  the  men,  but  the  number  of  the 
Inspectorate  is  inadequate.     The  chief  legislation  has  been  : — 
1 88 1.     Act  to  facilitate  the  election  of  checkweighers,1  which 
also  gave  power  to  the  Home  Secretary  to  investigate 
the  cause  of  any  accident,  and  secured  to  relatives  of  a 
man  killed  the  right  to  attend  the  inquest. 
1887.     A  great  Consolidation  Act,  covering  the  Rules  and  Regu- 
lations for  the  Control  of  Mines  up  to  that  date.      It 
specially  strengthened  the  provision  of  periodical  in- 
spections of   a  mine  by  practical  miners  at  the  work- 
men's expense. 

1  Men  appointed  and  paid  by  their  fellows  to  check  the  weighing  by  the 
management  of  the  amount  of  coal  hewn,  on  the  basis  of  which  weight  the  men 
are  paid. 


54      ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

1894.  An  Act  which  forbad  an  employer  to  make  it  a  condition 
of  employment  that  a  certain  man  should  not  be  elected 
as  checkweigher. 

1896.  Act  controlling  the  kind  of  explosives  to  be  used  in 
blasting. 

1900.  Act  raising  the  minimum  age  of  boys  allowed  under- 
ground from  twelve  to  thirteen. 

1908.  Act  limiting  the  shift  to  eight  hours  below  ground,  but 
allowing  overtime  of  one  hour  on  sixty  days  in  the  year. 

191 1.     Another  Consolidating  Coal  Mines  Regulation  Act. 

The  chief  problems  that  now  face  the  mining  industry  are 
these  : — 

(a)  Shall  the  royalty  owners  be  expropriated  without  com- 
pensation ? 

(b)  How  is  the  present  wasteful  division  of  ownership  to  be 
remedied  ?  Much  coal  is  wasted  by  the  necessity  of  leaving  walls 
between  the  mines  of  different  owners. 

(c)  How  is  the  waste  due  to  bad  management  to  be  avoided  ? 

(d)  Is  it  possible  to  reduce  the  number  and  profits  of  the 
middlemen  ?     There  are  at  present  28,000  coal  merchants. 

(e)  How  can  we  obtain  coal  from  pits  that  cannot  be  worked 
at  a  profit,  and  yet  whose  coal  is  needed  ? 

The  only  answer  would  seem  to  be  consolidation,  but  whether 
in  a  gigantic  coal  trust  or  under  some  form  of  nationalisation  is 
hotly  disputed.  The  miners  since  1914  have  put  forward  a 
definite  scheme  of  national  ownership,  combined  with  control  of 
the  industry  by  joint  committees  of  workers  and  consumers,  by 
which  they  hope  to  make  bad  pits  pay  for  good  ones,  to  equalise 
wages  in  the  different  districts  and  to  increase  the  total  output. 
At  the  same  time  they  would  make  the  possibility  of  decent 
conditions  of  living  for  the  miner  a  first  charge  on  the  industry. 
So  far  this  has  been  rejected  by  the  Government,  but  it  has 
received  the  general  approval  of  a  majority  of  a  Royal  Com- 
mission. But  in  1 914  the  miners  were  only  at  the  beginning  of 
this  campaign. 

Iron. — Iron  ore  has  been  worked  in  Britain  since  the  days  of 
the  Romans.  For  centuries  it  was  smelted  in  charcoal  furnaces, 
and  the  chief  sources  of  supply  were  in  Sussex,  where  the  great 
forests  of  the  Weald  were  gradually  depleted  for  its  manufacture. 


OUR  CHIEF  INDUSTRIES  55 

As  the  trees  disappeared  and  the  ore  became  exhausted  the 
industry  moved  to  the  Forest  of  Dean,  in  Gloucestershire,  and 
then  gradually  north  and  east  to  the  Midlands  and  westward  to 
South  Wales.  In  1735  the  Darbys  discovered  a  method  of  coking 
coal  so  that  it  could  replace  wood-charcoal  as  fuel,  and  imme- 
diately the  manufacture  increased,  and  at  the  same  time  gave  the 
impetus  to  coal  mining  already  referred  to.  The  last  charcoal 
furnace  in  Sussex  was  blown  out  in  1827.  The  new  textile  and 
pumping  machinery  produced  a  great  demand  for  iron  in  all  its 
forms,  and  blast  furnaces  soon  turned  the  pleasant  lanes  of 
Warwickshire  and  Staffordshire  into  a  "  black  country."  The 
advent  of  railways  after  1830  made  further  demands,  and  the 
technical  advance  of  the  iron  industry  was  rapid. 

The  chief  advances  made  after  Darby's  invention  were  : — 

The  steam-engine  was  applied  to  drive  the  blast  of  the  smelting 
furnaces.  This  enabled  coal  to  be  used  for  getting  the  carbon 
out  of  the  iron  and  saved  much  labour  and  waste. 

The  Hot-blast,  invented  in  1828  by  J.  B.  Nicolson,  enormously 
reduced  the  amount  of  fuel  required  in  the  furnace,  and  enabled 
raw  coal  to  be  used  instead  of  coke.  In  Scotland  the  production 
of  pig-iron  trebled  between  1830  and  1840  as  a  result. 

In  1840  Heath  made  the  first  improvement  in  steel  by  adding 
manganese  to  crucible  steel  and  so  making  it  easier  to  weld. 
This  made  possible  the  use  of  British  ore  instead  of  kinds  specially 
imported. 

In  1845  J.  P.  Budd  used  the  waste  gases  of  the  furnaces  to  fire 
stoves  which  heated  the  blast. 

After  1850  came  the  opening  up  of  the  Cleveland  district, 
which  had  the  triple  advantage  of  an  easily  melted,  though  not 
rich,  ore,  the  proximity  of  Durham  coke  (the  best  in  the  world), 
and  of  the  sea  for  export. 

From  1855  to  1870  there  were  very  rapid  developments,  chiefly 
in  the  direction  of  substituting  steel  for  iron  in  large-scale  erec- 
tions. In  1856  henry  Bessemer  invented  his  method  of  making 
steel  on  a  large  scale  ;  previously  it  could  only  be  made  in  small 
crucibles.  By  introducing  air  into  fluid  cast  iron  in  large  con- 
tainers, called  converters,  he  produced  such  heat  as  to  drive  out 
all  carbon,  and  could  then  add  the  correct  calculated  amount  for 
the  kind  of  steel  required.     (Steel  is  iron  containing  a  certain 


56      ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

definite  percentage  of  carbon,  i.e.,  between  0-5  and  1*5.)  The 
result  of  this  invention  was  the  use  of  steel  for  such  things  as 
boiler  plates,  railway  lines,  and  then  for  ships.  In  1867  Siemens 
invented  a  method  of  making  steel  direct  from  pig-iron  and  ore, 
and  the  process,  known  as  the  open-hearth  process,  is  still  in  use. 

The  result  of  all  these  inventions  was  the  rapid  replacement  of 
iron  by  steel.  A  technical  writer  in  1864  expresses  grave  doubts 
as  to  the  success  of  steel  ships,  but  a  few  years  later  they  were 
superseding  iron  ones. 

Since  1875  there  has  only  been  one  invention  affecting  funda- 
mentally the  manufacture  of  steel.  Both  the  Bessemer  and  the 
Siemens  were  acid  processes,  and  so  not  suitable  for  use  with 
phosphoric  ores.  The  great  bulk  of  iron  ore,  however,  con- 
tains some  phosphorus  ;  in  many  kinds  there  is  a  considerable 
quantity.  In  1878  two  cousins,  Sidney  Gilchrist  thomas,  a 
police-court  clerk  who  studied  metallurgy  in  his  spare  time, 
and  percy  carlyle  gilchrist,  whose  profession  it  was,  suc- 
ceeded in  devising  a  means  for  dealing  with  phosphoric  ores. 
Their  plan  was  to  add  quicklime  during  the  process  to  combine 
with  the  silicon  and  phosphorus,  and  to  have  a  basic  instead  of  an 
acid  lining  to  the  converter.  This  lining  is  made  of  dolomite, 
a  magnesian  limestone,  ground  to  powder  and  mixed  with  dry 
tar.  This  basic  process  was  applied  eventually  to  both  the 
Bessemer  and  the  Siemens  inventions,  and  large  quantities  of 
basic  steel  of  low  carbon,  called  mild  steel,  are  now  produced 
from  phosphoric  ores.  The  basic  process  produces  more  slag 
than  the  acid  process,  and  hence  the  converters  are  larger,  being 
now  often  15  feet  high  or  more.  The  Bessemer  basic  process 
requires  the  presence  of  much  phosphorus,  by  the  oxidation  of 
which  the  temperature  is  kept  up  ;  the  Siemens  basic  process 
can  deal  with  less  phosphoric  iron,  since  the  heat  here  is  supplied 
by  gas  ignition. 

The  two  chief  developments  in  modern  times  are  on  the  lines 
of  elimination  of  waste  and  the  application  of  machinery,  especially 
electric.  The  gas  from  the  blast  furnaces,  which  once  escaped 
into  the  air  and  was  lost,  is  now  used  in  several  ways.  It  heats 
the  stoves  through  which  the  air  blast  passes  to  be  heated  before 
entering  the  furnace,  it  generates  power  by  means  of  gas-engines 
and  dynamos,  melts  steel  in  the  steel  foundry,  and  distils  tar  and 


OUR  CHIEF  INDUSTRIES  57 

ammonia.  The  tar  makes  oil  gas  and  carbolates  for  disinfecting. 
In  1890  no  less  than  5,000  tons  of  ammonium  sulphate  was 
collected  from  the  ironworks  of  Great  Britain.  For  a  long  time 
little  use  was  made  of  the  slag  ;  some  of  the  harder  kinds  were 
used  for  road  metal  and  for  making  breakwaters  and  ballast  for 
railways.  Slag- wool  was  manufactured  for  non-conducting,  non- 
inflammatory packing.  But  the  great  mass  was  thrown  on  to 
waste  heaps  or  carried  out  to  sea.  More  recently  it  has  been 
made  into  cement  or  bricks  or  flagstones.  The  basic  slag  from 
steel  making  has  found  another  use.  Being  heavily  laden  with 
phosphoric  acid,  it  is  an  excellent  fertiliser  of  the  soil,  if  made 
soluble.  For  this  purpose  it  is  ground  as  fine  as  flour  and  sold 
to  farmers  to  scatter  on  fields. 

Perhaps  the  most  unexpected  thing  about  a  large  modern 
steel-works  is  the  amount  of  machinery  in  use.  Sheds  contain- 
ing gas-engines  and  dynamos  on  a  scale  large  enough  to  supply 
power  to  a  small  town  ;  locomotives  and  railway  trucks  running 
in  every  direction  ;  overhead  cranes  with  long  arms  and  fingers 
picking  up  white-hot  ingots  and  swinging  them  through  space ; 
ladles  with  tons  of  liquid  steel  passing  to  and  fro  on  rails  ;  rolling 
mills  that  roll  out  an  ingot  a  square  foot  in  section  to  a  long  bar 
a  mere  inch  or  so  thick,  while  huge  scissors  and  saws  cut  it  into 
lengths  as  if  it  were  wax  ;  machine-worked  shovels  that  feed  great 
furnaces  ;  not  to  mention  funicular  railways  lifting  several  tons 
of  coke  and  ore  and  limestone  100  feet  in  air  to  feed  the  great 
blast  furnaces,  that  roar  out  a  20-foot  flame  of  white-hot  gases  as 
the  worker  opens  them  to  take  in  the  new  load.  Hydraulic  power, 
steam  and  electricity  are  all  enlisted  in  the  service  of  steel  making. 

On  the  other  hand,  it  is  interesting  to  note  that  the  making  of 
crucible  steel  for  tools  and  cutlery  goes  on  still  in  Sheffield  by 
processes  little  altered  since  the  days  of  Huntsman. 

Other  modern  experiments  are  in  the  direction  of  producing 
steels  having  special  properties  by  introducing  varying  quantities 
of  chromium,  nickel,  manganese,  tungsten,  molybdenum, 
vanadium,  etc.  Steel  has  almost  entirely  replaced  cast  iron, 
but  wrought  iron  is  still  made,  being  unsurpassed  for  certain 
purposes  owing  to  its  fibrous  structure.  It  costs  more  to  make 
than  mild  steel.  Further  developments  are  certain  to  take  place 
as  the  demands  of  air  travel  increase  in  variety  and  quantity. 


CHAPTER  IV 

ORGANISED   LABOUR  AND   THE   GROWTH  OF   CAPITALISM 

It  has  been  said  that  the  world  of  1874  was  essentially  a  modern 
world,  as  those  who  were  adult  before  the  Great  War  knew 
modern  life.  But  there  were  differences.  The  period  round 
1 874  may  in  a  sense  be  described  as  the  close  of  one  era  and  the 
birth  of  another  ;  before  that  date  the  predominant  capitalism 
had  one  form  ;  from  that  date  it  begins  to  assume  another. 
Before  1875  Trade  Unionism  was  on  sufferance  ;  after  that  date 
it  stood  legally  adult,  a  fully-forged  weapon  for  the  liberation  of 
the  worker.  Most  of  the  technical  advances  in  our  industries 
had  been  achieved — men  began  to  turn  their  attention  to  problems 
of  further  organisation.  Lastly,  England's  long  start  as  an 
industrial  nation  was  over.  France  had  already  made  headway  ; 
Germany  was  about  to  enter  the  race  ;  the  United  States  was  soon 
to  challenge  her  in  her  own  field  of  coal  and  iron,  and  to  outdo 
her  both  in  them  and  in  the  new  product,  mineral  oil. 

The  period  before  1870  saw  the  final  triumphs  of  the  principle 
of  unhampered  competition  ;  after  that  date  there  arose  various 
challenges  to  the  system.  In  the  first  place,  a  new  generation 
was  arising  that  wished  to  enjoy  the  results  of  its  fathers'  labours 
rather  than  to  pile  riches  on  riches  by  continual  strife.  Increas- 
ingly, both  for  capital  and  labour,  it  was  recognised  that 
unrestricted  competition  brought  neither  "  the  greatest  good  to 
the  greatest  number,"  nor  even  a  secure  success  to  the  enter- 
prising individual.  On  all  sides  arose  complaints  of  "  cut- 
throat competition,"  of  foreign  "  dumping  "  and  of  "  blackleg  " 
labour.  The  results  came  in  the  early  part  of  the  twentieth 
century  with  "  Trusts  "  l  on  the  one  hand  and  the  "  closed 
shop  "  2  on  the  other  ;    both  would  have  outraged  the  feelings 

1  See  p.  76. 

a  The  name  given  to  the  ideal  condition  of  an  industry  that  employs  none  but 
Trade  Unionists.     It  has  not  so  far  been  realised,  except  for  single  works. 

58 


ORGANISED  LABOUR  AND   CAPITALISM        59 

of  the  men  of  the  'fifties  and  'sixties.  Before  1870  individualism 
was  generally  regarded  as  the  only  possible  system  ;  State  inter- 
ference was  deprecated  and  reduced  to  the  minimum  that  philan- 
thropy would  tolerate  :  with  the  next  forty  years  came  a  great 
extension  of  State  control.  All  things  in  1870  must  be  provided, 
and  would  be  provided  by  private  enterprise,  working  under  the 
law  of  supply  and  demand — this  was  the  mid- Victorian  creed  ; 
but  as  the  century  drew  to  a  close  municipalities  took  to  providing 
themselves  with  all  kinds  of  services — trams,  water,  gas,  electric 
power,  houses  ;   collective  enterprise  became  common. 

During  the  forty  years  of  our  period  the  total  wealth  of  the 
nation  grew.  Some  suspected  that  with  this  increased  wealth  went 
increasing  inequality  of  distribution — that  the  rich  were  getting 
richer  and  a  large  number  of  the  poor  benefiting  not  at  all.  As 
the  war  cloud  gathered  over  Europe  the  stage  was  being  set  for 
a  violent  struggle  between  those  who  had  too  much  and  those  who 
had  too  little.  The  bursting  of  the  storm  postponed  the  battle, 
but  greatly  embittered  the  combatants. 

Trade  Unionism  is  a  product  of  the  Industrial  Revolution, 
though  societies  of  the  early  eighteenth  century  have  been  claimed 
as  such.  The  tradition  of  English  industries  had  been  a  regulation 
of  work  and  wages,  first  by  the  gilds  and  then  by  the  magistrates. 
Both  methods  had  fallen  into  disuse  in  many  trades  and  districts, 
but  when  the  pressure  of  the  new  strongly  competitive  system 
drove  down  wages  the  workers  turned  to  the  Government  to 
save  them  by  the  old  control.  Attempts  to  set  the  law  in  motion 
on  these  lines  failed,  and  finally  resulted  in  1:813  in  the  total  repeal 
of  all  Acts  empowering  magistrates  to  fix  wages.  Combinations 
to  better  their  conditions  were  constantly  formed  and  extensive 
strikes  often  carried  on,  but  until  1824  all  such  societies  came 
under  the  ban  of  common  law  and  were  declared  illegal.  Conse- 
quently Trade  Unions  before  that  date  were  ephemeral,  weak, 
and  easily  beaten.  The  workers  were  faced  not  merely  with 
common  law,  but  even  with  deterrent  Acts  of  Parliament,  passed 
in  1799  during  the  panic  produced  by  the  French  Revolution  and 
known  as  the  Combination  Laws.  Under  them  it  was  a  criminal 
offence  for  even  a  few  workmen  to  make  a  concerted  request  for 
a  higher  wage.  They  were  repealed  in  1824-5,  Dut  trie  workers 
were   still   greatly   handicapped.     After   a   sudden    outburst   of 


60      ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

energy  in  1832-4,  they  found  themselves  badly  beaten  by  falling 
trade  and  the  difficulties  of  combination  among  men  living  on 
or  near  the  starvation  line.  The  early  leaders,  fired  by  the 
Utopian  dreams  of  Robert  Owen  and  the  early  Socialists,  had 
expected  a  new  heaven  on  earth  produced  almost  in  a  moment, 
and  had  aroused  expectations  that  could  only  lead  to  disappoint- 
ment, so  that,  disgusted  with  the  fruits  of  industrial  agitations, 
the  bulk  of  the  workers  turned  to  Chartism  and  remedy  by 
Parliament.  Such  Trade  Unions  as  survived  into  the  'forties 
did  not  officially  embrace  Chartism,  but  most  of  the  active  mem- 
bers were  Chartists. 

With  the  failure  of  Chartism  in  1842,  a  new  era  begins.  A  fresh 
set  of  leaders  arose,  who  saw  that  the  journey  to  economic  freedom 
for  the  worker  must  necessarily  be  long  and  that  it  was  essential 
to  do  one  thing  at  a  time.  So  they  concentrated  on  working  for 
the  removal  of  the  chief  legal  and  industrial  disabilities.  Above 
all  they  aimed  at  establishing  the  moderation  and  reasonableness 
of  the  workers'  claims.  They  discouraged  strikes,  encouraged 
education,  employed  every  legal  resource  to  resist  oppression, 
and  created  a  force  of  full-time  officials  thoroughly  experienced 
in  industrial  conditions  and  possibilities.  From  1850  a  new  type 
of  Trade  Union  appeared,  the  members  of  which  were  skilled 
workers,  and  which,  by  a  process  of  amalgamation,  aimed  at 
enrolling  all  the  men  of  the  craft  in  the  country.  Such  were 
the  Amalgamated  Society  of  Engineers  (1851)  and  the  Amalgamated 
Society  of  Carpenters  (i860).  They  added  to  a  strong  trade 
policy  a  number  of  Friendly  Benefits,  and  all  branches  were 
controlled  by  a  powerful  Central  Executive.  From  i860  to  1871 
the  whole  movement  was  controlled  by  a  group  of  men,  who  have 
been  called  a  Junta ,  of  whom  William  Allen,  of  the  Engineers, 
and  Robert  Applegarth,  of  the  Carpenters,  were  the  chief.  They 
were  extremely  cautious  in  industrial  policy,  but  concentrated 
all  their  force  on  political  reform.  Their  great  achievement 
was  the  passing,  in  1867,  of  the  master  and  servant  act,  by 
which  the  old  injustice  of  making  a  breach  of  contract  by 
the  employee  a  criminal  act,  while  the  master  was  only  liable  to 
be  mulcted  in  civil  damages,  was  repealed.  In  1871  the  funds 
of  the  Trade  Unions  were  secured  by  law  against  attack  ;  but 
while  the  trade  union  act  definitely  established  them  as  legal 


ORGANISED   LABOUR  AND   CAPITALISM        61 

bodies,  the  criminal  law  amendment  act  at  the  same  time 
made  strikes  impossible  by  making  the  most  peaceful  picketing 
illegal.  Four  years  later  a  great  wave  of  Trade  Unionism 
throughout  the  country  forced  a  Conservative  Government  to 
repeal  this  Act,  and  two  other  Acts  put  the  Trade  Unions 
beyond  the  reach  of  the  common  law  of  conspiracy.  It  was 
this  employers  and  workmen  act  of  1 875  that  established 
modern  Trade  Unionism.  While  the  leaders  of  the  great  craft 
Unions  were  thus  laying  the  political  foundations  for  future 
work,  the  two  great  industrial  Unions  of  the  Miners  and  the 
Cotton  Operatives  were  achieving  industrial  victories.  In  i860 
and  1872  mines  regulation  ACTS  were  passed,  while  the  cotton 
workers  had  won  a  great  battle  on  piece-work  rates,  and  in  1875 
secured  a  56^-hour  week. 

Thus  by  1875  trie  organised  workers  of  the  country  were  on 
the  crest  of  a  wave  of  victory  both  political  and  industrial.  Both 
sides  of  the  movement  then  tended  to  rest  on  their  oars.  The 
great  Trade  Unions  of  skilled  workers  were  faced  with  a  bad  drop 
in  national  prosperity,  and  it  seemed  best  to  husband  their  resources 
and  wait  till  the  tide  flowed  once  more.  The  long  struggle  in 
the  political  field  had  turned  the  minds  of  the  national  leaders 
away  from  industrial  action  and  had  also  induced  in  them  a  some- 
what middle-class  outlook  and  acceptance  of  current  economic 
faiths.  Besides,  industrial  problems  had  a  way  of  splitting  the 
ranks  of  the  workers  by  sectional  interests  and  so  weakening  their 
force  in  the  political  field.  The  one  point  still  to  be  won  in 
that  field,  and  which  alone  interested  the  leaders  of  the  Trade 
Union  Congress,  was  the  question  of  employers'  liability. 
Since  1837  the  worker  injured  in  the  course  of  his  employment 
suffered  from  a  serious  disability.  A  passenger  in  a  railway 
smash  had  a  claim  for  compensation  against  the  company  ;  an 
employee,  in  all  cases  where  the  accident  was  due  to  a  fellow- 
workman,  had  none.  A  signalman's  error  might  cost  the  company 
thousands  of  pounds  in  compensation  to  the  travellers  ;  not  a 
penny  piece  would  go  to  the  crippled  guard  or  driver.  In  vain 
did  the  Unions  get  Employers'  Liability  Bills  introduced  year 
after  year  ;  not  till  1880  was  the  duty  of  a  company  in  the  matter 
even  partially  recognised.  Then  the  number  of  railway  accidents 
to  employees  fell  from  1  in  75  to  1  in  195.     But,  by  a  judge's 


62      ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

decision,  employers  and  workmen  could  contract  out  by  mutual 
agreement,  and  the  battle  had  to  be  fought  again.     Finally,  in 
1896,  by  the  workmen's  compensation  act,  compensation  was 
compulsory  in  all  cases,  whether  due  to  the  employer's  fault  or  not. 
But  if  the  recognised  leaders  were  failing  to  lead,  there  was 
plenty   of  unrest  among  the   rank   and   file.     Throughout  the 
'eighties  new  ideas  were  pressing  on  the  public  on  all  sides. 
While  the  leaders  still  clung  to  laisser-faire  and  the  dismal  science, 
the  rank  and  file  were  being  permeated  by  Socialist  ideas.     In 
1880  Henry  George  had  published  "  Progress  and  Poverty," l 
and  the  idea  of  rent  as  a  cheating  of  the  worker  spread  through  the 
land.     This  theory  fell  easily  into  line  with  the  more  properly 
Socialist  ideas  of  Karl  Marx,2  which,  after  1881,  were  eagerly 
spread  by  the  Socialist  Party.     For,  whatever  the  value  of  such 
theories,  the  facts  were  before  the  worker's  eyes.      Obviously 
his  chances  of  rising  above  a  mere  subsistence  wage  into  master- 
ship and  money- making  were  yearly  becoming  less.     Equally 
surely  the  unskilled  labourer  was  sinking  in  greater  numbers 
even  below  the  line  of  that  subsistence.     Only  the  disciples  of 
Marx  offered  him  any  reasonable  explanation  of  these  facts  ;  they 
alone  indicated  a  path  out  of  the  morass.     According  to  them, 
industry  managed  for  private   profit  necessarily  entailed  these 
evils  ;    industry  organised  for  public  needs  could  alone  abolish 
them.     So  said  Hyndman  and  Morris  and  others,  and  those  who 
believed    them   increased    in    numbers.     The    facts,    too,    were 
increasingly  shocking  as  they  became  known.     In  1886  Charles 
Booth,   a   great   merchant  and  shipowner,   started   a   statistical 
inquiry,  the  disclosures  of  which  horrified  the  nation.     Instead 
of  refuting  the  allegations  of  the  Socialist  and  the  "  agitator  "  as 
to  the  misery  of  the  less  skilled  workers,  it  proved  them  true. 
"  In  the  wealthiest  and  most  productive  city  in  the  world,  Charles 
Booth,  after  an  exhaustive  census,  was  driven  to  the  conclusion 
that  a  million  and  a  quarter  persons  fell  habitually  below  his 
'  poverty  line.'     Thirty- two  per  cent,  of  the  whole  population 
of  London  were  found  to  be  living  in  a  state  of  chronic  poverty 
.  .  .  incompatible  with  physical  health  and  industrial  efficiency."  3 

1  See  p.  168. 

2  See  p.  162. 

3  Webb,  "  History  of  Trade  Unionism,"  p.  381. 


ORGANISED   LABOUR  AND   CAPITALISM        63 

In  1888  the  Committee  on  Sweating  proved  conclusively  that 
neither  Trade  Unions  nor  a  democratic  franchise,  nor  Free  Trade, 
had  solved  the  industrial  problem.  The  worker  was  still  at  the 
mercy  of  commercial  gamblers  and  the  slum  landlord.  Since 
neither  political  power  nor  organised  union  availed,  the  workmen 
turned  increasingly  towards  Socialism.  In  1886  a  fruitless 
prosecution  of  the  leaders — Hyndman,  Burns,  Champion,  and 
Williams — for  sedition  gave  advertisement  to  the  movement  and 
in  1887  an  attempt  by  the  police  to  prohibit  meetings  led  to  a  riot 
in  Trafalgar  Square  and  the  imprisonment  of  John  Burns  and 
Cunninghame  Graham. 

But  Socialism  was  not  only  capturing  the  unskilled  labourer, 
for  whom  "  scientific  unionism  "  did  so  little — it  lured  also  the 
younger  men  within  the  skilled  Unions.  In  the  Trade  Union 
Congress  itself,  as  early  as  1879,  Adam  Weiler,  a  friend  of  Marx, 
had  moved  a  resolution  in  favour  of  Land  Nationalisation,  and  in 
1888  he  carried  it  in  the  teeth  of  the  Executive.  He  also  led  a 
movement  for  an  eight-hour  day.  Again,  in  spite  of  the  leaders' 
non-progressive  attitude  over  the  International  Congress  of 
Workers,  they  were  forced  to  call  one  in  London  in  1888,  and  a 
majority  of  the  delegates  chosen  held  Socialist  views.  Among 
them  were  John  Burns,  Tom  Mann,  Keir  Hardie,  and  Mrs. 
Besant.  But  for  a  foolish  personal  attack  on  the  old  leaders, 
which  rallied  to  these  the  sympathies  of  many,  the  Trade  Union 
Congress  would  probably  have  renewed  its  life  with  Socialist 
fire.     As  it  was,  the  fresh  impetus  came  from  outside. 

In  July,  1888,  the  treatment  of  girls  in  the  match  trade  roused 
the  indignation  of  Mrs.  Besant,  and  a  fiery  article  by  her  inspired 
the  girls  to  revolt.  With  no  funds  and  no  organisation,  672  of 
them  came  out  on  strike,  but  public  opinion  was  excited  by 
strenuous  effort  ;  £400  was  subscribed,  and  after  a  fortnight  the 
employers  were  shamed  by  public  obloquy  into  making  some 
concessions.  This  was  a  new  thing — the  girls  had  won,  not  by 
their  strength,  but  by  their  weakness  ;  if  public  sympathy  could 
be  gained,  there  was  hope  for  the  most  oppressed.  At  the  moment 
Burns,  Mann,  Tillett  and  William  Thorne  were  organising  the 
gasworkers,  and  in  August,  1889,  these  suddenly  demanded  a 
reduction  of  hours  from  twelve  to  eight.  The  directors  gave  way 
and  conceded  the  demand  without  a  struggle.     The  gain   has 


64       ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

remained  to  this  day,  with  the  exception  of  the  South  Metro- 
politan Gas  Company,  who  a  few  months  later  forced  their 
workers  back  to  the  twelve-hour  shift,  and  by  bribing  them  with 
a  profit-sharing  scheme  broke  up  the  Union. 

Almost  at  the  same  moment  as  the  Gasworkers,  the  Dock 
Labourers  broke  out  in  a  demand  for  6d.  an  hour,  the  abolition  of 
sub-contract  and  piece-work,  extra  pay  for  overtime,  and  a 
minimum  spell  of  four  hours.  In  three  days  10,000  labourers  left 
work,  the  powerful  Unions  of  the  Stevedores  (more  skilled  work- 
men) joined,  and  for  four  weeks  the  traffic  of  the  world's  biggest 
port  ceased.  Public  sympathy  was  roused  and  a  subscription 
of  £48,736  gave  Burns  the  funds,  not  only  for  strike  pay  to  the 
Unionists,  but  to  the  loafers  who  might  have  replaced  them. 
Such  pressure  was  too  much  for  the  dock  directors,  and  the  men's 
demands  were  almost  entirely  conceded.  Australian  workers  had 
contributed  £30,000. 

The  immediate  result  of  these  three  strikes  was  the  enrolment 
of  large  numbers  of  unskilled  -workers  in  Unions,  while  the 
ranks  of  already  organised  labour  increased  by  200,000.  The 
triumph  of  the  new  movement  came  in  1890,  when  the  Trade 
Union  Congress  supported  the  Eight  Hours  Bill  and  passed  sixty 
other  resolutions,  of  which  forty-five  were  Socialist  in  tendency 
and  called  for  State  interference. 

Meanwhile,  the  form  of  English  Socialism  was  changing. 
The  Fabian  Society  was  founded  in  1883,  and  the  leaders  were 
leaving  Marx  and  advocating  constitutional  collectivism.  A 
determined  effort  was  made  to  permeate  local  government  bodies 
and  to  advocate  municipal  enterprises  for  the  use  of  the  people. 
There  is  a  marked  contrast  between  the  old  Socialism  of  1833-4 
and  the  new.  Then  the  path  of  constitutional  reform  was  blocked 
by  an  oligarchic  Government,  both  in  the  towns  and  in  Parlia- 
ment. In  1890  it  was  possible  to  use  a  new  democratic  organisa- 
tion for  the  establishment  of  Socialist  ideas  ;  political  pressure 
took  the  place  of  Utopian  schemes. 

The  startling  success  of  1890  could  hardly  be  permanent. 
By  1892  trade  was  declining,  and  many  of  the  gains  of  the  good 
years  had  to  be  given  up.  But  the  permanent  results  were  not 
small.  They  lay  chiefly  in  the  new  spirit  that  had  arisen.  Trade 
Unionism  no  longer  confined  itself  to  a  selfish  exclusiveness. 


ORGANISED   LABOUR  AND   CAPITALISM         65 

The  aristocratic  Unions  of  skilled  workers  either  threw  open  their 
doors  to  the  unskilled  of  their  industry  or  busied  themselves  in 
helping  them  to  organise  separately.  Specially  striking  was  the 
change  towards  women.  Their  Unions  were  no  longer  snubbed, 
but  welcomed  to  Congress,  and  in  some  cases  even  the  men's 
Unions  were  thrown  open  to  them.  The  increased  feeling  of 
solidarity  led  to  better  international  relations — the  horizon  was 
widening. 

Let  us  for  a  moment  survey  the  scene  in  1892.  Among  the 
skilled  workers  the  Cotton  Spinners  were  enrolled  in  Unions 
almost  to  a  man,  as  were  the  Boilermakers  in  the  iron  shipbuilding 
ports.  Eighty  per  cent,  of  the  Miners  were  organised,  and 
among  the  Dublin  Coopers,  the  Midland  Flint-glass  Makers,  the 
Nottingham  Lace  Makers  and  the  Yorkshire  Glass-bottle  Workers 
non-unionism  had  ceased  to  be.  While  this  was  the  state  of 
affairs  at  one  end,  at  the  other  organisation  was  at  its  earliest 
beginnings.  Labourers  of  all  kinds  were  almost  untouched  ;  out 
of  200,000  Railway  Workers  only  48,000  were  in  Unions,  these 
mostly  guards  and  drivers.  Tramway  and  Omnibus  Workers, 
Warehousemen  and  Porters  were  still  without  defence.  But 
from  1892  to  1 9 10  there  was  steady  growth,  and  after  1910  a 
great  increase,  which  extended  to  new  trades  and  to  women. 

Since  1875  there  had  been  considerable  change  in  the  relative 
predominance  of  the  industries.  This  was  due  to  the  growth 
of  the  new  Unions  rather  than  to  the  decline  of  the  old.  The 
Cotton  Operatives  became  absorbed  in  the  technicalities  of  their 
own  trade  and  took  less  interest  in  general  labour  questions.  In 
1893  they  secured,  after  a  twenty  weeks'  strike,  the  Brooklands 
Agreement  regulating  their  pay,  and  in  1908  a  fresh  one  advan- 
tageous to  the  operatives.  They  are  a  powerful  Union  and  one 
very  valuable  to  the  general  movement,  because  they  have  success- 
fully stood  for  equal  piece  rates  to  men  and  women,  and  a  standard 
wage  rate  not  to  be  lowered  by  any  excuse  of  inferior  workers  or 
machines.  They  also  desire  the  greatest  improvement  in 
machinery  provided  their  standard  of  life  is  not  thereby  depressed. 
The  Building  Trades,  once  foremost  in  the  Trade  Union  world, 
have  lost  that  position,  partly  owing  to  decline  in  the  numbers 
engaged  in  the  trade  (actually  less  in  191 1  than  in  1901),  partly 
from  sectional   disputes.     The   latter  cause   has   held   back   the 

E.D.E.  B 


66      ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

Engineering  and  Metal  Unions,  while  the  Boilermakers  and  Ship- 
wrights by  amalgamation  and  the  adoption  of  a  uniform  national 
policy  have  increased  in  numbers  and  strength.  The  Steel 
Smelters,  established  in  1886  and  most  efficiently  led,  have  gone 
steadily  forward. 

The  older  Unions  have  been  replaced  in  the  front  ranks  by  the 
rapidly  rising  Miners  and  Railwaymen,  who,  with  the  Transport 
Workers,  could,  if  they  would,  dominate  the  Labour  movement. 
To  them  must  be  added  the  Unions  of  General  Workers,  whose 
progress  since  1890  has  been  remarkable,  so  that  in  1920  they 
formed  30  per  cent,  of  the  whole  Trade  Union  membership,  and 
were  contributing  notable  leaders  to  Labour.  The  women 
workers,  too,  of  whom  100,000  were  organised  in  1890,  had 
doubled  their  numbers  by  1907.     The  National  Insurance  Act, 

191 1,  by  allowing  Trade  Unions  to  administer  the  insurance 
funds,  gave  an  impetus  to  the  formation  of  new  and  the  enlarge- 
ment of  old  ones — e.g.,  the  Workers'  Union  between  191 1  and 
1913  rose  from  5,000  to  91,000. 

Other  tendencies  of  the  time  have  been  the  growth  of 
"  industrial  federation,"  whereby  the  policy  of  the  whole  industry 
can  be  unified  and  controlled,  and  the  increase  of  Unions  among 
the  brain  workers.  An  example  of  the  first  was  the  National 
Transport  Federation,  which  in  191 1  won  the  great  Dockers' 
Strike,  though  it  proved  not  strong  enough  to  prevent  the  em- 
ployers breaking  their  agreement  the  following  year.  In  19 14 
the  Triple  Industrial  Alliance  of  Miners,  Railwaymen  and  Trans- 
port Workers  was  formed — a  failure  eventually,  but  a  significant 
beginning.  Among  the  workers  by  brain  we  may  note  the 
Association  of  Shop  Assistants,  which  developed  rapidly  after 

191 2,  and  the  Railway  Clerks,  established  1897,  who  in  1914  num- 
bered 30,000  (it  includes  Inspectors  and  Stationmasters).  There 
is  a  Bank  Officers'  Guild  and  a  Guild  of  Law  Court  Officials. 
The  National  Union  of  Teachers,  established  1890,  has  over 
100,000  members,  and  even  the  professional  organisations  of 
Secondary  and  University  Teachers  have  been  more  and  more 
forced  into  the  Trade  Union  policy  of  maintaining  a  standard  of 
life.  Societies  with  purely  Trade  Union  aims  have  arisen  among 
doctors,  actors,  and  journalists.  Most  numerous  of  all  are  the 
Unions  of  the  employees  of  the  national  and  local  Governments, 


ORGANISED  LABOUR  AND   CAPITALISM        67 

though  police  and  prison  officials  are,  as  yet,  denied  the  right  to 
join  a  Trade  Union. 

Something  must  be  told  of  the  story  of  the  Miners  and  the 
Railwaymen,  though  more  than  an  outline  is  impossible.  During 
the  'eighties  there  was  a  movement  among  the  numerous  district 
associations  of  miners  to  federate,  and  in  1888  the  Miners' 
Federation  of  Great  Britain  was  formed.  It  was  small  in  numbers, 
but  possessed  of  great  driving  force.  In  1893  tnev  won  a  prac- 
tical recognition  of  a  minimum  wage,  and  in  1908,  when  the 
Northumberland  and  Durham  Union  came  in  and  the  Federation 
rose  to  600,000  members,  they  carried  an  Eight  Hours  Bill  and 
in  191 1  improvements  in  Mine  Regulation.  The  great  strike  of 
1912,  led  by  Robert  Smillie,  of  nearly  a  million  miners  lasted  over 
a  month  and  was  closed  by  a  Government  compromise.  The 
point  at  issue  was  the  inequality  of  piece-work  payments  due  to 
the  varying  ease  or  difficulty  of  the  hewer's  work,  according  to 
to  the  sort  of  place  he  had  to  work  in.  The  miners  wanted  the 
assurance  of  a  daily  minimum  wage,  however  bad  the  place  was, 
and  consequently  however  little  coal  was  won.  The  Govern- 
ment passed  an  Act  giving  district,  not  national,  minima,  these 
to  be  decided  by  district  committees  of  owners  and  workmen. 
It  pleased  neither  party,  but  the  Federation  agreed  to  give  it  a 
trial,  and  found  that  something  had  been  gained.  The  claim  of 
the  Miners'  Federation  is  for  a  unifying  of  the  industry,  so  that  rich 
mines  pay  for  poor  ones,  and  that  the  miner's  wage  shall  be  based 
not  on  what  the  poorest  mine  can  afford,  which  plan  gives  an  undue 
profit  to  the  rich  mines,  but  on  what  the  industry  as  a  whole  can 
provide.  The  owners  still  refuse  to  deal  with  the  Federation  on 
any  national  basis,  so  the  Miners  demand  that  the  State  shall 
own  the  mines  as  a  single  unit.     The  point  is  still  at  issue. 

The  Railwaymen 's  story  holds  points  of  wider  and  more 
general  interest,  for  it  was  they  who  bore  the  brunt  of  the  Taff 
Vale  Decision  and  the  Osborne  Judgment.  The  growth  of  unionism 
among  the  railway  employees  was  slow.  No  lasting  Trade 
Union  was  established  till  1871,  and  in  1892  not  one  in  seven 
of  the  men  were  in  any  Union  at  all.  In  1890  the  Amalgamated 
Society  of  Railway  Servants  tried  to  get  up  a  campaign  for  shorter 
hours,  without  much  effect,  though  a  Select  Committee  of  the 
House  of  Commons  in  1891-2  showed  up  the  scandal  and    the 

E  2 


68      ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

Board  of  Trade  was  given  powers  to  remedy  it,  of  which  it  made 
no  use.  Nine  years  later  they  did  inquire  how  often  men  worked 
for  more  than  twelve  hours  at  a  stretch  (sixteen  was  not  unknown). 
The  Railway  Directors  denied  the  men's  right  to  combine,  and  in 
1896  the  L.  &  N.  W.  R.  tried  to  dismiss  men  who  had  joined  the 
Union.  This  gave  an  impetus  to  the  Amalgamated  Society,  and 
a  simultaneous  demand  was  made  on  all  the  Companies  for 
improvements  for  all  grades  of  workers.  The  men  asked  for  a 
ten-hour  day,  overtime  pay,  and  an  increase  in  wages  of  2s.  a  week. 
The  Directors  of  all  the  Companies  except  the  N.  E.  R.  refused 
even  to  consider  the  request.  It  took  nearly  ten  years  of  steady 
organising  work  before  they  got  a  hearing. 

Meanwhile  a  spasmodic  strike  on  the  Taff  Vale  Railway  in 
South  Wales  had  created  a  crisis.  The  Society  endorsed  the 
strike  and  the  Railway  Company  sued  it  for  loss  caused  by  the 
alleged  unlawful  acts  of  its  officers  in  picketing.  To  the  utter 
amazement  of  all  concerned,  and  apparently  in  direct  contradiction 
of  the  Trade  Union  Acts  of  1871-6,  the  judges  in  1902  declared 
the  Union  responsible  as  if  it  were  a  corporate  body.  This 
decision  cost  the  Railwaymen  £23,000  and  the  South  Wales 
Miners  £50,000,  and  practically  made  all  strikes  impossible. 
It  is  noteworthy  that  no  English  employers  took  advantage  of 
the  decision ;  that  the  Welsh  did  so  may  go  some  way  to  account 
for  the  present  bitterness  in  Welsh  labour  disputes.  Four  years' 
agitation  was  necessary  to  secure,  by  the  trade  disputes 
act  of  1906,  the  return  to  the  position  of  1876.  Actually  the 
workers  secured  more,  and  Trade  Unions  now  occupy  a  privileged 
position  of  immunity. 

In  1907  the  Railwaymen  took  up  their  demands  of  1896,  and  the 
Companies  steadily  refused  to  recognise  the  Union.  A  national 
strike  was  imminent  when  the  Government  interfered  and  per- 
suaded both  sides  to  accept  an  elaborate  scheme  of  Conciliation 
Boards.  Though  the  Boards  proved  far  from  satisfactory,  this 
did  represent  a  move  forward  for  the  Union.  The  Companies 
were  forced  to  recognise  and  deal  with  it,  in  practice  if  not  in 
theory.  The  men  set  to  work  to  use  the  Boards  to  improve  their 
position,  and  truly  there  was  need.  For  a  statistical  inquiry 
showed  that  38  per  cent,  of  the  men  received  20s.  a  week  or  under, 
and  49-8  per  cent,  between  215.  and  305.,  while  the  hours  were 


ORGANISED   LABOUR  AND   CAPITALISM        69 

atrocious.  Progress  was  very  slow ;  the  Companies  developed 
every  kind  of  obstructionist  tactics,  and  even  evasion.  Meanwhile 
the  Union's  energies  were  being  largely  taken  up  by  the  Osborne 
Case,1  and  not  till  191 1  was  it  free  to  make  a  strong  stand  for 
better  conditions.  A  strike  was  declared,  200,000  men  stopped 
work,  and  the  Government  replied  by  an  overwhelming  display 
of  force.  The  men  held  out,  and  at  last  the  Cabinet  forced  the 
Companies  to  let  their  managers  meet  the  men's  representatives 
and  terms  were  made — viz.,  reinstatement  of  all  strikers,  immediate 
consideration  of  all  grievances  by  the  Conciliation  Boards,  and  a 
Royal  Commission  to  inquire  into  them.  In  1912  the  threat  of 
another  strike  forced  the  Companies  to  agree  to  modifications  in 
the  Conciliation  Boards. 

In  191 3  the  four  principal  Unions  of  manual  railway  workers 
amalgamated  as  the  National  Union  of  Railwaymen.  This 
"  New  Model  "  aims  at  including  all  the  workers  in  the  industry. 
It  has  an  elaborate  constitution  on  district  bases  and  vests  a  great 
deal  of  power  in  the  Central  Executive.  In  1914  they  began  to 
demand  Nationalisation  of  the  Railways,  together  with  control 
by  the  workers. 

The  osborne  judgment,  referred  to  above,  calls  for  a 
little  more  explanation.  In  1908  Osborne,  a  member  of  the 
Amalgamated  Society  of  Railway  Servants,  financed  by  interested 
parties,  disputed  at  law  the  right  of  the  Society  to  use  any  of  its 
funds  for  political  purposes  ;  the  action  was  carried  through  to 
the  House  of  Lords  and  Osborne  won.  The  decision  (1909)  of 
a  majority  of  the  Law  Lords  made  it  illegal  for  a  Trade  Union, 
even  by  unanimous  desire  of  all  its  members,  to  devote  any  of  its 
money  to  political  purposes.  Further  still,  they  declared,  the 
Union  could  not  legally  do  anything  that  was  not  specifically 
mentioned  in  the  Act  of  1876.  This  cut  out  all  educational  work, 
all  participation  in  municipal  administration,  all  association  for 
common  purposes,  such  as  Trades  Councils  ;  and  even  the  Trade 
Union  Congress  became  illegal.  The  Unions  were  thrown  back 
on  pure  collective  bargaining  and  the  strike.  We  may  note  that 
Lord  James  of  Hereford,  who  had  had  a  hand  in  passing  the 
Act  of  1876,  dissented  from  this  part  of  the  judgment.  It  took 
four  years  to  get  this  decision  set  aside  by  Parliament,  though  the 

Sec  below. 


70      ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

discontent  was  so  great  that  the  Government  was  forced  in  191 1 
to  bring  in  a  Bill  for  payment  of  Members  of  Parliament  to  the 
extent  of  £400  a  year,  to  relieve  themselves  of  the  charge  that  our 
democracy  was  a  myth,  since  working  men  could  not  enter 
Parliament  now  the  Trade  Unions  were  prevented  from  paying 
them  a  salary.  In  191 3  a  Trade  Union  Act  was  passed  authorising 
a  majority  of  the  members  to  include  in  their  objects  any  lawful 
purpose  whatever  and  to  spend  money  on  it.  A  clause  enacted 
that  payments  for  a  political  purpose  must  be  made  out  of  a  special 
political  fund,  and  any  member  could  claim  exemption  from 
payment  of  that  special  part  of  his  subscription.  This  clause 
also  covers  money  spent  on  supporting  a  newspaper  if  its  object 
is  political. 

trades  councils  have  increased  since  1890,  and  their  local 
influence  is  considerable.  Their  political  work  is  also  growing. 
They  form  a  link  between  the  Labour  Party  and  the  Co- 
operatives. 

The  trade  union  congress  has  hardly  advanced  with 
the  times.  In  1894  the  Parliamentary  Committee  revised  the 
standing  orders  in  the  direction  of  narrowness,  excluded  the 
Trades  Councils,  made  obligatory  the  "  vote  by  card,"  and 
expelled  all  members  except  salaried  officials  or  men  actually 
working  at  their  craft.  Politically  the  Labour  Party  has  replaced 
it ;  industrially  it  does  little. 

the  labour  party. — This  is  an  outcome  of  Trade  Unionism, 
and  so  fitly  comes  in  here.  As  early  as  1887  Keir  Hardie 
urged  the  formation  of  a  separate  political  party  distinct 
from  the  Liberals,  but  he  made  no  impression  on  the  Trade 
Union  Congress.  Hardie  himself  fought  Mid- Lanark  in  that 
year  as  an  Independent  and  polled  619  votes.  In  1892  he  was 
returned  for  West  Ham,  the  first  independent  Labour  Member, 
though  fourteen  other  working  men  sat,  chiefly  as  Liberals. 
In  1893  Hardie  founded  the  Independent  Labour  Party,  which 
in  1895  put  up  twenty-eight  candidates,  all  unsuccessful.  In 
1899  the  rank  and  file  of  the  Trade  Union  Congress  forced  the 
Parliamentary  Committee  to  appoint  a  Committee  jointly  with  the 
Independent  Labour  Party,  the  Fabian  Society,  and  the  Social 
Democratic  Federation  to  draw  up  a  scheme  for  increasing  the 
number  of  Labour  M.P.'s.     The  Committee  formed  a  Labour 


ORGANISED  LABOUR  AND   CAPITALISM        71 

Representation  Committee,  of  which  Ramsay  MacDonald  was 
secretary.  By  1904  it  had  returned  three  members  to  the  House. 
In  the  General  Election  of  1906  fifty  Labour  Candidates  took  the 
field  and  twenty-nine  were  successful  ;  these  promptly  formed  a 
Labour  Party.  By  191 3  it  had  a  membership  of  nearly  two 
millions  ;  the  miner  M.P.'s  had  left  the  Liberals  and  joined  it  in 
1910. 

The  Evolution  of  Capitalism, — For  a  few  centuries  after  the 
break  up  of  the  Roman  Empire  the  capitalist  almost  vanished 
from  Northern  Europe.  In  England  he  may  be  said  not  to  have 
reappeared  till  the  fourteenth  century.  In  that  century  we  find 
merchants  selling  from  their  own  looms  as  many  as  1,000  cloths 
a  year,  obviously  not  entirely  the  work  of  their  own  hands.  We 
also  find  English  merchants  financing  Edward  III.  in  his  French 
wars,  after  his  repudiation  of  his  debts  to  the  Florentine  Bardi 
had  put  an  end  to  his  Continental  borrowings.  In  the  fifteenth 
century  the  number  of  rich  men  setting  others  to  work,  though 
still  small,  was  increasing.  Richard  Whittington  was  not  a  myth, 
whatever  may  be  said  of  his  cat,  and  William  Canynge,  merchant 
of  Bristol,  entertained  Edward  IV.  in  more  than  regal  style. 
These  men,  however,  were  excrescences  on  the  mediaeval  system 
and  quite  as  incompatible  with  any  effective  gild  system  as  they 
were  with  a  truly  feudal  one.  But  the  sixteenth  century  was 
different ;  it  was  an  age  of  brilliant  individuals,  an  age  when  the 
horizon  of  the  world  lifted  and  offered  unlimited  possibilities  to 
the  adventurous.  The  increase  of  capitalists  was  rapid.  They 
are  most  evident  in  history  among  merchants,  but  they  were  quite 
as  numerous  in  industry,  especially  in  the  great  wool  manufacture  ; 
the  Lavenhams  of  Suffolk  could  marry  into  the  peerage.  The 
peerage  itself  was  recruited  from  the  city  by  Tudor  sovereigns, 
who,  indeed,  were  themselves  by  no  means  free  from  bourgeois 
blood.  The  great  merchant  companies  of  the  days  of  Elizabeth 
and  James  were  groups  of  capitalists  trading  under  very  strict 
regulations  and  aiming  at  holding  a  monopoly  of  their  own  par- 
ticular trade.  Throughout  the  seventeenth  and  eighteenth 
centuries  the  system  grew  slowly,  but  could  never  be  dominant 
so  long  as  the  bulk  of  the  nation  were  landowners  and  the  industries 
simply  hand  industries.  In  the  towns  the  capitalist  oligarchies 
obtained    control  ;    in    the    countryside    a    strong    landowning 


72      ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

aristocracy    and    a     sturdy    peasantry    successfully    withstood 
them. 

With  the  enclosures  and  the  resulting  depopulation  of  the  rural 
areas,  synchronising  with  the  change  to  machine  and  consequently 
factory  industry,  the  power  of  the  capitalist  grew  rapidly.  In 
the  first  place,  it  was  easy  in  those  early  days  to  become  a  capitalist ; 
most  of  the  early  makers  of  fortunes  were  men  sprung  from  the 
ranks  of  the  manual  workers.  They  could  begin  with  one  or  two 
spinning- frames  turned  by  water  in  a  ramshackle  shed,  and, 
provided  they  were  prepared  to  live  hardly  and  to  spare  neither 
themselves  nor  the  wretched  children  they  exploited,  could  create 
large  manufacturing  businesses  in  a  few  years.  By  1840  the 
balance  of  power  had  shifted  from  the  land  to  trade  and  industry, 
and  as  between  the  two  last  was  tending  to  dip  in  favour  of  the 
latter.     Manchester  threatened  to  dominate  London. 

The  businesses  of  the  early  nineteenth  century  were  small, 
usually  run  by  one  man  who  was  both  capitalist  and  entrepreneur. 
He  supplied  capital  and  brains  as  well  as  unlimited  hard  work. 
Joint-stock  companies  with  idle  shareholders  were  almost  un- 
known, and  indeed,  until  the  passing  of  the  Limited  Liability  Act 
in  1855,  were  too  risky  for  average  people.  This  accounts  for  the 
very  strong  feeling  of  the  time,  not  yet  entirely  disposed  of,  that 
the  capitalist  was  the  keystone  of  the  whole  structure,  and  as  such 
it  was  necessary  to  ensure  him  ample  reward.  After  1850  the 
size  of  businesses  grew  rapidly  ;  between  the  years  1856  and 
1885,  while  the  number  of  factories  did  not  rise  20  per  cent.,  their 
size  rose  50  per  cent,  and  the  total  output  doubled. 

With  the  increasing  complexity  of  machinery  came  also  a  shift 
in  the  proportion  of  capital  required  to  be  locked  up  in  machinery 
compared  to  that  required  for  current  expenses,  especially  labour. 
This  had  a  social  effect,  for  where  initial  expense  in  plant  is  great 
there  is  no  hope  for  the  small  capitalist,  still  less  for  the  thrifty 
manual  worker.  The  ease  with  which  large  capital  could  be  raised 
for  joint-stock  enterprises  and  their  comparative  safety  after 
1855  made  these  eventually  the  typical  association,  and  after 
1870  we  find  even  businesses  run  by  individuals,  or  small  groups, 
increasingly  incorporating  themselves  as  Limited  Liability 
Companies.  This  has  brought  about  a  change  in  the  relationship 
of  employers  and  employed.     There  is  less  human  contact,  less 


ORGANISED  LABOUR  AND   CAPITALISM        73 

play  for  human  feeling,  both  for  good  and  evil.  Large  joint-stock 
businesses  are  run  by  salaried  officials,  themselves  only  the 
servants  of  an  abstraction — the  interest  of  the  shareholders. 

But  the  great  outstanding  feature  of  modern  times  is  the 
tendency  of  almost  all  business  organisations  to  increase  in  size. 
This  tendency  is  stronger  in  some  businesses  than  others,  and  we 
may  spend  a  few  minutes  looking  at  the  factors  that  influence 
the  result.     The  chief  are  : — 

(a)  There  is  a  saving  in  buying  raw  materials  in  large  quantities 
and  in  marketing  the  manufactured  article  in  bulk. 

(b)  The  best  modern  machinery  only  pays  if  used  on  a  large 
scale. 

(c)  There  is  economy  in  performing  minor  subsidiary  processes 
within  the  same  walls. 

(d)  Up  to  a  certain  point  there  is  a  saving  in  management 
expenses. 

(e)  There  is  economy  of  space,  and  consequently  of  rent. 

(/)  The  profitable  utilisation  of  waste  is  only  possible  on  a 
large  scale. 

(g)  A  large-scale  business  gives  greater  opportunity  for  experi- 
ment, and,  since  even  a  small  economy  in  a  process  may  mean 
a  large  saving  when  multiplied  by  the  figure  of  a  large  output, 
there  is  greater  inducement  to  experiment  in  this  direction. 

(h)  There  may  be  economy  in  advertising  and  travelling 
agents. 

(1)  Large  businesses  have  more  power  to  obtain  the  sole  use  of 
patents  than  small  ones. 

(j)  Large  firms  can  often  depress  wages  when  they  become  the 
sole  or  even  the  largest  employer  of  labour  in  the  district. 

(k)  Large  concerns  can  secure  better  credit  facilities. 

There  are,  however,  cases  where  small  businesses  have  the 
advantage,  such  as  those — 

(a)  Where  the  raw  material  is  irregular  and  troublesome  to 
handle,  or  where  it  is  costly  and  requires  careful  handling— e.g., 
jewel-setting,  first-class  dressmaking,  and  other  luxury  trades. 
In  agriculture,  where  soil  and  climate  vary,  personal  skill  still 
plays  a  big  part,  and  the  limit  of  effective  size  is  soon  reached  in 
Europe. 

(jS)  Where  the  element  of  art  and  special  craft-skill  is  great— 


74       ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

e.g.,  the  best  kind  of  photography,  clock-making,  cabinet-making, 
saddlery,  or  the  minor  metal  trades. 

(y)  Repairing  work  is  often  done  best  by  small  jobbing  men — 
e.g.,  builders,  plumbers,  carpenters. 

It  is  fairly  clear  that  in  any  country  and  under  given  conditions 
there  is  a  maximum  size  to  which  each  class  of  business  tends  to 
grow  if  left  to  itself  in  a  competitive  system.  Legal  control  or  a 
monopoly  will,  of  course,  alter  this  size.  In  determining  for  any 
one  business  where  this  limit  lies  the  chief  factor  is  the  limit  of 
administrative  economy. 

This  question  of  enlarging  the  unit  of  industry  has  been  greatly 
affected  by  the  rapid  growth  of  transport  facilities,  which  has 
extended  markets.  A  market  is  an  area  within  which  a  number 
of  businesses  compete.  In  the  Middle  Ages,  except  for  luxuries 
and  the  one  great  export  of  wool,  such  markets  were  local  and 
confined  to  a  very  small  area.  Steam  transport  not  only  extended 
them  in  distance,  but  also  in  time,  since  durability  is  a  determining 
factor.  An  example  of  this  is  found  in  the  fruit  trade  of  Australia 
and  the  Cape,  which  now  finds  a  market  in  Europe,  and  has  grown 
with  the  demand  of  the  market  thus  opened  to  it  by  quick  transit. 
This  extension  of  market,  sometimes  to  world  limits,  has  greatly 
increased  competition,  often,  of  course,  in  a  wasteful  way,  and 
competition  of  the  keenest  kind  can  only  be  sustained  by  businesses 
with  large  resources.  When  all  the  little  firms  have  retired  from 
the  battle  hopeless,  several  big  ones  will  be  left,  each  struggling 
to  best  the  other  by  cutting  profits.  At  last  the  margin  of  profit 
becomes  so  narrow  and  the  danger  so  great  that  some  sort  of 
arrangement  is  inevitable,  and  hence  arise  trusts  and  com- 
bines and  cartels  and  all  the  varying  forms  of  the  modern 
attempt  to  get  away  from  competition  to  a  monopolistic  control. 
In  England  this  movement  began  a  little  before  1890,  though  as 
early  as  1877  we  find  six  Scottish  whisky  firms  combining  to 
maintain  prices,  and  in  1884  a  fixing  of  freights  by  agreement 
between  the  several  firms  in  the  China  shipping  trade,  together 
with  a  system  of  rebates  to  merchants  who  used  only  single  or 
allied  firms  for  their  goods.  When  the  Mogul  Line  broke  away 
and  resumed  competition,  rates  fell  from  60s.  to  25s.  a  ton.  In 
1890  the  Birmingham  Alliance  was  formed  among  the  makers  of 
iron  bedsteads   and  the  smaller   metal  trades.     The   members 


ORGANISED  LABOUR  AND  CAPITALISM        75 

adopted  a  fixed  price  list  at  which  all  agreed  to  sell.  They  came 
to  terms  with  the  Trade  Unions  and  employed  only  Union 
labour.  They  got  rid  of  rivals  by  underselling  them  wherever 
their  market  was,  till  these  either  fell  out  of  the  trade  or  joined 
the  Alliance.  They,  too,  had  a  system  of  rebates  to  customers. 
The  Alliance  lasted  ten  years,  but  broke  eventually,  owing  to 
disloyal  members  and  to  outside  competition  which  they  failed  to 
remove. 

The  chief  forms  of  these  combinations  are  to  be  found  in  the 
three  great  industrial  nations,  cartels  in  Germany,  pools 
and  trusts  in  America,  and  combines  in  England.  Of  the 
first  the  best  example  is  that  of  the  coal  trade.  The  cartel  is  a 
company  formed  to  sell  the  products  of  several  firms,  and  its 
shares  are  held  by  these  firms.  The  cartel  determines  the  price 
at  which  the  coal  shall  be  bought  from  the  mineowners  and  also 
that  at  which  it  shall  be  sold  in  different  markets,  according  as 
there  is  competition  or  not.  The  cartel  arranges  what  proportion 
of  the  total  production  each  mining  firm  shall  contribute.  The 
object  is  to  limit  production  and  keep  prices  high.  Where  there 
is  no  competition,  the  cartel  will  raise  prices  ;  where  competition 
is  strong,  the  price  is  lowered,  even  to  the  extent  of  making  no 
profit.  In  practice  it  has  not  been  found  possible  to  keep  produc- 
tion down  to  the  limit  of  the  home  market  with  high  prices,  so 
the  extra  product  is  turned  to  an  export  trade  in  which  competition 
lowers  the  profits  considerably,  sometimes  to  a  negative  value. 
But  as  far  as  the  home  market  is  concerned  the  cartel  aims  at  a 
limited  product  with  high  profit.  Before  1900  there  were  345 
cartels  in  Germany. 

The  pool  is  an  agreement  between  manufacturers  to  keep  up 
prices  by  limiting  production,  and  in  this  it  resembles  the  cartel, 
but  its  method  is  different.  An  expert  accountant  is  employed  : 
each  manufacturer  in  the  pool  informs  him  as  to  the  average 
quantity  he  produces  ;  from  this  the  accountant  calculates  what 
fraction  of  the  entire  trade  of  the  pool  each  contributes,  and 
henceforth  the  manufacture  is  confined  to  this  fraction.  If  his 
production  exceeds  his  assigned  quantity,  he  pays  into  the  pool 
an  agreed  percentage  of  his  excess  ;  if  he  has  produced  less  than 
his  assignment,  he  draws  from  the  pool  an  agreed  percentage  of 
his   deficit.      The   pool   usually   fixes   the   selling   price   for  all 


76      ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

members.     By  this  means  competition  is  avoided  and  the  industry 
tends  to  become  stereotyped. 

trusts,  whose  home  is  America,  may  be  defined  as  "  com- 
binations of  capital  which  are  operated  as  business  units  and 
which  exercise  a  substantial  control  of  the  market."1  They  are 
closer  combinations  than  cartels,  and  may  take  several  forms  : — 

(a)  When  all  or  most  of  the  stock  of  combining  businesses  is 
transferred  to  trustees  with  full  control — e.g.,  the  Standard  Oil 
Trust. 

(b)  When  the  trust  purchases  a  controlling  share  in  other 
companies — e.g.,  the  Northern  Securities  Company,  formed  to 
buy  up  a  controlling  share  of  the  stock  of  four  great  railway 
companies  and  run  them  as  one. 

(c)  When  several  businesses  completely  amalgamate — e.g.,  two 
or  more  great  shipping  lines,  such  as  the  Union  and  Castle. 

(d)  When  a  company  is  formed  for  the  sole  purpose  of  buying 
up  completely  several  businesses  in  the  same  or  allied  trades — 
e.g.,  The  United  States  Steel  Corporation. 

It  is  generally  considered  that  if  a  trust  controls  80  per  cent, 
of  the  output  of  an  industry  it  controls  the  market. 

British  combines  are  most  often  amalgamations,  though 
pools  are  also  known.  The  earliest,  having  a  definite  monopoly 
as  their  object,  were  the  Salt  Union  (1888)  and  the  United  Alkali 
Company  (1891).  They  failed  owing  to  foreign  competition. 
Messrs.  Coats  began  amalgamating  in  1890,  and  now  control 
practically  the  world  market  in  sewing-cotton.  There  are  two 
ways  in  which  these  combinations  or  consolidations  are  arranged — 
they  may  be  vertical  or  horizontal.  A  horizontal  combination 
consists  of  several  businesses  of  the  same  kind,  and  usually  at 
the  same  stage  of  manufacture,  so  that  the  market  of  the  par- 
ticular article  is  controlled — e.g.,  tobacco  or  iron  bedsteads.  But 
the  same  process  can  go  on  vertically,  as  when  a  railroad  buys 
up  steel  works  or  coal  mines  to  supply  it  with  its  material,  or  a 
newspaper  amalgamation  owns  paper  mills,  or  a  brewery  combine 
buys  up  all  the  publichouses  in  the  district.  The  extent  of  such 
combinations  in  Britain  is  not  easily  known.  "  What  is  notable 
among  British  consolidations  and  associations  is  not  their  rarity 

1  J.  A.  Hobson,  "  The  Evolution  of  Capital,"  p.  186. 


ORGANISED  LABOUR  AND  CAPITALISM        77 

or  weakness  so  much  as  their  unobtrusiveness."  x  The  cartel 
has  not  appeared  in  England,  but  the  pool  exists,  as  does  the  com- 
plete trust  amalgamation.  These  appear  in  iron,  steel,  mining, 
chemical,  soap  and  cotton  industries  ;  in  railways,  theatres  and 
newspapers.  The  most  "  trusted  "  of  all  British  industries  is 
brewing,  based  on  licences  which  give  local  monopolies.  Other 
forms  of  the  same  thing  are  "  honourable  understandings  "  as 
to  prices,  output  and  division  of  business,  common  among  retail 
dealers  in  a  locality—  e.g.,  coal  merchants  and  milkmen.  Associa- 
tions are  also  formed  for  controlling  contract  tenders,  whereby 
the  profit  is  shared  and  the  lowest  tender  kept  high.  The  growth 
of  multiple  shops  marks  the  same  movement,  and  we  shall  see 
later  2  how  it  dominates  the  world  of  shipping  and  finance. 
The  Report  of.  the  Committee  on  Trusts  gives  some  interesting 
facts  as  to  their  prevalence  in  Great  Britain.  It  compiles  a  list, 
not  complete,  of  thirty-five  combinations  in  the  iron  and  steel 
industry,  and  states  that  in  the  matter  of  iron  castings  used  in 
building  houses  the  combine  controls  90  per  cent,  of  the  total 
industry,  all  the  galvanised  sheet  iron  and  four-fifths  of  the  metal 
bedstead  firms.  Two  great  consolidations  produce  most  of  the 
chemicals  made  in  this  country  ;  the  electric  industries,  soap, 
tobacco,  wallpapers,  salt,  cement  and  textiles  are  also  fields  of 
consolidations.  In  the  building  trade  25  per  cent,  of  the  materials 
is  subject  to  full  control,  and  33  per  cent,  is  partially  controlled. 
The  boot  and  shoe  trade  is  managed  by  the  makers  of  the  necessary 
machines,  and  the  system  makes  it  impossible  for  a  manager  to 
break  away.  It  is  true  that  several  of  our  large  industries  are 
still  fiercely  competitive,  but  the  Committee  reports  :  "  We  are 
satisfied  that  Trade  Combinations  and  Combines  are  rapidly 
increasing  in  this  country,  and  may  within  no  distant  period 
exercise  a  paramount  control  over  all  important  branches  of 
British  trade."  3 

Combinations  of  the  kind  we  have  been  discussing  naturally 
have  all  the  advantages  of  size,  and  to  these  they  add  those  of 
monopoly.     The  chief  claimed  for  them  are  : — 

(a)  If  profits  are  kept  high,  and  not  cut  by  competition,  there 

1  "  Report  of  Committee  on  Trusts,"  1919,  Cd.  9236,  p.  17. 

2  See  pp.  137  et  seq. 

a  "  Report  of  Committee  on  Trusts,"  19191  P-  *«• 


78      ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

is  a  margin  that  can  be  used  to  improve  organisation  or  buy  fresh 
plant. 

(b)  That  there  is  a  shifting  of  competition  from  price  to  quality, 
since  when  prices  are  fixed  competing  firms  can  only  attract  trade 
by  improving  the  quality  of  their  goods.  This,  of  course,  does  not 
apply  to  complete  monopolistic  amalgamations,  nor  to  pools 
where  output  is  limited. 

(c)  A  "  trusted  "  industry  can  capture  foreign  markets  by  using 
its  high  home  profits  to  sell  abroad  at  little  or  no  profit,  and  so 
drive  out  competitors.  This  is  called  "  dumping  "  when  the 
foreigner  does  it  to  us,  "  British  enterprise  "  when  we  do  it  to 
the  foreigner. 

The  dangers  of  great  monopolies,  on  the  other  hand,  are  : — 

(a)  Loss  of  initiative  from  lack  of  competition  as  driving 
force. 

(b)  The  difficulty  of  challenging  a  monopoly  once  established. 

(c)  The  undue  raising  of  prices. 

(d)  Restriction  of  output,  which  makes  the  world  poorer  than 
it  need  be. 

These  dangers  are  often  declared  to  be  small,  if  not  imaginary  ; 
but  the  Committee  on  Trusts  probably  expressed  the  feeling  of 
most  consumers  where  it  reported  :  "  We  are  unable  to  share 
the  optimism  of  those  representatives  of  associations  who  were 
of  opinion  that  under  no  circumstance  was  there  any  possibility 
of  their  operations  leading  to  excessive  prices  or  to  the  detriment 
of  the  public." 

What  checks  are  there  on  this  movement  towards  monopoly  ? 
There  are  a  few  of  limited  effectiveness.  Co-operative  Societies 
form  rivals  that  cannot  be  bought  out,  and  in  a  Free  Trade 
country  foreign  competition  is  some  safeguard.  Trade  Unions 
are  no  help,  however  much  they  may  dislike  big  combines  as 
sources  of  capitalistic  power.  Indeed,  they  are  a  potential  added 
danger,  for  a  conspiracy  of  the  Trust  and  the  Trade  Union  against 
the  consumer  to  raise  wages  and  prices  to  the  utmost  limit  might 
leave  the  victimised  consumer  helpless.  Of  proposed  checks, 
not  yet  in  existence,  the  chief  are  national  ownership  of  the 
industry  and  competition  by  public  bodies.  The  former  would 
be  a  monopoly,  but  its  gains  would  be  distributed  among  the 
whole  nation  ;  the  latter,  provided  it  was  wisely  managed,  would 


ORGANISED   LABOUR  AND   CAPITALISM        79 

probably  act  effectively,  if  it  could  be  kept  free  from  "  graft  " 
and  from  illicit  manipulation  by  big  business. 

One  more  result  of  these  great  combinations  requires  notice. 
Where  industry  falls  under  one  unified  management,  it  is  necessary 
to  find  openings  for  investment  of  the  profits  made  by  it  in  some 
other  direction,  and  the  wider  the  trust  the  narrower  the  outside 
field.  Hence,  trusts  are  apt  to  bring  in  their  train  a  very  undesir- 
able commercial  imperialism.  The  financial  class,  to  which  fall 
most  of  the  profits  of  big  business,  accumulates  money  that  it  does 
not  want  to  consume,  and,  since  the  home  market  is  not  thereby 
increased  and  the  need  for  fresh  capital  does  not  arise  there,  looks 
abroad  for  opportunities  of  investment.  The  story  of  South 
Africa  since  1885  is  one  of  the  best  instances  of  this  result. 

Lastly,  we  must  note  the  growth  of  international  combinations. 
These  usually  agree  that  each  contracting  party  shall  keep  its 
home  market  and  share  the  foreign  ones  between  them.  There 
were,  before  19 14,  such  international  associations  of  Steel  Rail 
Makers  (Germany,  Belgium,  Great  Britain,  France,  America, 
Spain),  which  worked  badly  for  Great  Britain  ;  of  Aniline  Oil 
Producers  (England  and  Germany)  ;  of  Glass  Bottle  Makers 
(the  United  Kingdom,  Germany,  Austria,  Holland,  Norway, 
Sweden  and  Denmark),  which  secured  the  British  markets  to 
British  firms.  The  story  of  the  British- American  Tobacco 
Company,  which  is  said  to  control  the  markets  of  the  world,  is 
perhaps  worth  telling  in  detail.  By  1901  the  American  Tobacco 
Company  dominated  the  industry  of  manufactured  tobacco  in 
the  United  States,  and  had  a  large  export  trade  in  cigarettes. 
To  challenge  the  market  of  Great  Britain  the  American  combine 
bought  at  a  cost  of  £1,000,000  the  firm  of  Ogden's,  Limited.  To 
fight  the  American  invaders  the  English  manufacturing  firms, 
the  chief  of  which  was  W.  D.  and  H.  O.  Wills,  formed  the  Imperial 
Tobacco  Company,  and  for  a  year  a  war  of  cut-throat  competition 
was  waged  between  the  two  combines.  Each  finding  victory 
impossible,  they  decided  to  combine  forces  and  formed  a  company, 
of  which  the  Americans  held  two-thirds  and  the  British  one-third 
of  the  stock.  This  company  was  to  exploit  the  markets  of  the 
world,  while  the  original  companies  kept  their  home  markets  of 
the  United  States  and  the  United  Kingdom.  The  new  company, 
called  the   British- American  Tobacco  Company,  thereupon  set 


80       ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

out  to  gain  a  monopoly  of  all  other  markets,  and  have  largely 
succeeded.  There  is  practically  no  competition  left  in  the 
tobacco  trade,  and  the  consumer  must  pay  the  price  fixed  by  the 
Trust  or  go  without. 

Co-operation. — It  will  perhaps  be  well  to  give  some  account 
of  the  growth  of  co-operation  among  consumers,  since  many  rely 
on  this  to  fight  the  great  combines  that  threaten  the  world. 
Modern  co-operative  stores  date  from  1844,  when  the  "  Rochdale 
Pioneers  "  opened  a  store  in  Toad  Lane  to  supply  themselves 
with  clothes,  food,  etc.  From  this  initial  venture  and  on  its 
model  have  come  the  numerous  "  Co-ops."  of  our  provincial 
towns,  especially  prosperous  in  the  North.  The  principle  is  to 
supply  members  with  goods  they  need  at  nearly  cost  price — this 
is  done  by  charging  current  prices,  but  at  the  end  of  the  year 
distributing  profits  proportionally  to  all  members  according  to 
the  amount  of  their  buying.  This  sharing  out  of  profits  has  a 
double  purpose,  for  not  only  does  it  result  in  goods  being  secured 
at  cost  price,  but  it  is  indirectly  a  sort  of  forced  saving,  and  the 
dividend  plays  a  large  part  in  the  Christmas  finances  of  many 
households. 

Naturally  it  was  discovered  that  further  savings  could  be 
secured  by  Co-operative  Societies  producing  their  own  goods, 
and  in  1863  the  Co-operative  Wholesale  Society  was  formed. 
Its  shareholders  are  not  individuals,  but  the  retail  Co-operative 
Societies,  and  it  acts  partly  as  a  merchant  buying  for  them  on  a 
large  scale,  and  so  saving  money,  and  partly  as  manufacturer  of 
goods  for  them.  The  first  productive  establishment  was  the 
Crumpsall  Biscuit  Works,  started  in  1873,  and  the  C.W.S.  now 
has  factories  in  such  widely  separated  places  as  Denmark  and 
Australia.  It  has  also  become  a  banking  and  insurance  concern. 
By  1906  British  retail  Co-operative  Stores  had  a  capital  of 
£27,000,000  and  had  given  £83,000  to  various  education  projects. 


CHAPTER  V 

STATE  CONTROL,   FACTORY  LEGISLATION  AND  THE  POOR  LAW 

The  first  Factory  Act  that  had  any  effect  in  mitigating  the 
evils  brought  about  by  the  rapid  changes  of  the  Industrial  Revolu- 
tion was  passed  in  1833.  Up  till  then  no  effective  provision  had 
been  made  for  securing  that  the  restraining  legislation  should  be 
carried  out,  but  in  1833  Government  inspectors  for  that  purpose 
were  appointed,  and  in  the  next  forty  years  much  was  achieved 
in  mitigating  the  evils  under  which  women  and  children  worked  ; 
though  nothing  was  directly  done  for  men,  they  secured  shorter 
hours  indirectly,  since  without  the  women  and  children  many 
of  the  works  had  to  close.  The  man  to  whom  most  of  the  legisla- 
tion was  due  was  Lord  Ashley,  afterwards  Earl  of  Shaftesbury, 
who  devoted  his  life  to  the  cause. 

Indirectly  the  regulation  of  factory  life  brought  about  universal 
education,  for  when  Victorian  England  ordered  that  its  working 
children  should  attend  school  at  least  part  time,  it  discovered 
there  were  almost  no  schools  to  attend.  In  1842  the  Report 
of  the  Commission  of  the  Employment  of  Women  and  Children 
in  Mines  and  Collieries  caused  such  consternation  that  their 
employment  underground  was  absolutely  forbidden.  It  is  true 
"  children  "  did  not  yet  include  boys  over  ten. 

In  1844  came  the  first  Act  to  protect  women  in  factories  ; 
that  of  1833  was  concerned  only  with  children  and  young  persons 
under  eighteen.  Its  aim  was  chiefly  to  secure  the  carrying  out 
of  the  law  by  strengthening  the  position  of  the  inspectorate.  It 
also  inaugurated  the  "  half-time  "  system,  by  which  children 
must  attend  school  part  time.  The  age  for  entering  a  factory 
was,  however,  reduced  from  nine  to  eight. 

In  1847  came  a  ten  hours  act  (actually  ten  and  a  half 
for  women),  but  it  was  largely  evaded  till  1850,  when  further 
legislation  procured  its  general  observance. 

A  Commission  of  1861,  sitting  for  five  years,  brought  to  light 

li.D.E.  81  v 


82      ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

many  evils,  such  as  those  of  the  pottery  and  match  trades,  where 
lead  poisoning  and  "  phossy-jaw  "  took  terrible  toll  of  human  life. 
In  1864  the  first  attempt  was  made  to  deal  with  a  home  industry, 
and  in  1867  the  control  of  this  kind  of  work  was  greatly  extended 
by  the  workshops  regulation  act.  In  1874  the  ten  and  a 
half  hours  were  reduced  to  ten  and  the  age  limit  for  children's 
employment  raised  to  nine  and  in  1875  to  ten. 

By  this  time  the  Factory  Code  was  in  a  condition  of  considerable 
confusion.  Hours  had  been  reduced  in  many  industries  to  ten 
daily ;  children  were  freed  from  factory  labour  up  to  ten  years  of 
age.  Something  had  been  done  to  help  the  outworker  and  the 
helpless  women,  but  the  legislation  had  been  piecemeal,  often 
little  more  than  a  temporary  expedient.  In  1876  a  Commission 
was  appointed  to  consolidate  the  Factory  and  Workshop  Acts, 
and  this  was  followed  by  the  factory  act  of  1878.  By 
this  Act  workshops  and  non-textile  factories  were  brought  under 
the  same  rules  (textile  factories  had  already  secured  shorter  hours 
than  others),  but  a  certain  retrograde  movement  in  dealing  with 
women's  work  was  shown  by  the  exemption  from  some  of  the 
more  valuable  regulations  of  women's  workshops  in  which  no 
children  or  young  persons  were  employed.  Also  the  regulations 
as  to  a  ten-and-a-half-hour  day  for  women  in  workshops  were 
rendered  useless  by  allowing  them  to  be  spread  over  the  period 
6  a.m.  to  9  p.m. 

It  will  be  well  to  call  attention  here  to  the  progress  made  in 
the  limitation  of  hours  during  the  past  forty  years  by  the  action 
of  enlightened  employers.  As  the  knowledge  of  hygiene  de- 
veloped, it  became  evident  to  thinking  men  that  to  work  with 
tired  employees  was  bad  business  as  well  as  bad  citizenship.  As 
more  and  more  capital  was  invested  in  fixed  machinery,  output 
per  hour  became  a  more  important  question,  and  it  soon  proved 
to  be  best  business  to  work  shorter  hours  at  full  speed  than  long 
ones  with  tired,  and  consequently  slow  and  inaccurate,  workers. 
By  the  end  of  the  century  many  factories  worked  only  eight 
hours  a  day,  or  at  least  forty-eight  hours  a  week. 

The  progress  of  factory  legislation  after  1878  will  best  be 
followed  under  certain  headings,  showing  the  change  in  outlook 
of  the  nation.  One  of  the  most  notable  examples  of  State  inter- 
ference with  the  doctrine  of  laisser-faire  was  due  to  the  increasing 


STATE  CONTROL,  FACTORY  LEGISLATION,  ETC.    83 

dangers  of  industrial  life.  Legislation  regulating  dangerous 
trades  grows  rapidly  as  we  near  the  end  of  our  period.  In 
1878  children  and  young  persons  were  excluded  from  certain 
branches  of  white  lead  and  other  manufactures.  This  was  the 
first  effective  enactment  in  the  interest  of  health  in  such  industries. 
After  1883  white  lead  factories  could  only  exist  if  they  complied 
with  certain  definite  rules  as  to  ventilation,  lavatory  accommoda- 
tion, baths  for  women  with  hot  and  cold  water,  proper  rooms  for 
meals,  overalls  and  respirators,  and  a  sufficient  supply  of  acidu- 
lated drink.  The  amount  of  detail  deemed  necessary  in  the 
regulations  marks  a  great  change  from  the  pious  but  futile  aspira- 
tions of  early  Factory  Acts.  In  1891  a  big  step  forward  was  made 
in  allowing  the  Home  Office  to  draw  up  rules  for  any  trade  it 
deemed  dangerous  or  injurious,  and  in  1895  this  power  was 
extended  to  men's  factories,  a  notable  change  of  policy.  In 
1 90 1  an  act  was  passed  applying  the  Factory  Acts  to  any 
place,  even  a  home,  where  a  dangerous  trade  was  carried  on. 
From  then  onwards  real  progress  was  made.  Since  1896  doctors 
had  been  compelled  to  notify  to  the  factory  inspectors  all 
cases  of  certain  industrial  diseases — e.g.,  lead,  phosphorus  and 
arsenic  poisoning.  This  was  the  first  fruit  of  the  new  women 
factory  inspectors.  Continued  progress  was  made  in  tighten- 
ing up  the  regulations  as  to  excessive  damp  and  dust  in 
factories,  such  as  in  flax-carding  rooms,  where  the  average  length 
of  life  was  16-8  years  of  work,  and  most  workers  were  dead  at 
thirty.  Though  china-scouring  had  been  pilloried  by  the  Royal 
Commission  of  1841  for  its  fatal  effect  on  the  women  who  did  it, 
nothing  was  done  for  fifty-seven  years.  In  1878  the  inspectors 
found  that  the  death  rate  among  women  so  employed  was  fifteen 
times  that  of  other  women  in  the  same  town.  In  ten  years,  by 
more  stringent  administration  as  to  ventilation,  the  mortality 
was  reduced  by  one-half.  Lead  poisoning  has  been  energetically 
followed  up,  for  it  has  a  way  of  appearing  in  all  sorts  of  different 
industries  besides  pottery,  such  as  electric  accumulators,  india- 
rubber,  file-cutting,  enamelling  of  metals  or  glass,  tinning  of 
hollow-ware,  heading  of  dyed  yarn  ;  by  degrees  women  and 
children  were  either  excluded  from  the  industries  or  protected 
by  rules.  A  remarkable  code  of  Pottery  Regulations  was  enacted 
in  1913.     The  prevention  of  anthrax  in  various  trades  is  still 

r  2 


84       ECONOMIC   DEVELOPMENT   OF  ENGLAND 

engaging  the  attention  of  the  inspectorate.  An  Act  of  1908 
absolutely  forbad  the  making  or  selling  of  matches  containing 
the  terrible  white  phosphorus,  with  its  horrible  risks.  A  growing 
public  opinion  that  industries  that  maim  or  kill  the  worker  are 
not  tolerable  among  civilised  nations  marks  the  beginning  of  the 
twentieth  century. 

A  more  widely  spread  evil  has  demanded  the  attention  of  the 
Legislature.  In  1888  the  Lords  appointed  a  Commission  to 
investigate  cases  of  gross  underpayment  of  the  wage-earner, 
usually  called  sweating.  The  investigation  showed  that  such 
system  of  underpayment  was  not  socially  economical  or  useful, 
but  a  drag  on  industry,  forcing  down  the  prices  and  so  leaving 
the  better  firms  no  margin  for  development  and  experiment. 
In  1 89 1  an  Act  was  passed  that  all  occupiers  of  factories  and 
workshops  must  keep  lists  of  their  outside  workers  and  the  places 
where  they  are  employed,  and  such  lists  must  be  open  to  factory 
and  sanitary  inspectors  ;  by  a  second  Act  in  1895  the  lists  must  be 
sent  to  the  inspectors,  and  after  1901  also  to  the  District  Council. 
These  were  attempts  to  deal  with  the  sweaters'  dens,  but  even  as 
attempts  they  failed  to  touch  the  worst  kind  of  underpayment, 
where  the  employees  were  the  man's  own  family — this  in  spite 
of  the  pertinent  inquiry  of  one  Member  of  Parliament,  why  if  a 
man  chooses  to  employ  in  a  workshop  "  his  sisters  and  his  cousins 
and  his  aunts,"  he  should  be  allowed  to  poison  them  with  foul 
air  and  bad  drains.  In  1891,  1895,  and  1901  attempts  were  made 
to  help  the  exploited  worker  by  ordering  that  each  employer 
must  have  in  writing  particulars  as  to  the  rate  of  wages.  This 
is  known  as  the  "  Particulars  Clause."  All  this  regulation  was 
experimental  and  not  very  effective.  In  1900  Sir  Charles  Dilke 
tried  to  obtain  a  system  of  Wages  Boards,  but  failed.  In  1906  an 
exhibition  of  sweated  work  and  workers  was  organised  by  the 
Daily  News,  which  staried  the  public  and  produced  from  the 
Government  a  Select  Committee  to  consider  the  matter.  After 
two  years'  deliberation  the  Committee  reported  in  favour  of 
Wage  Regulation,  and  stated  that  it  was  as  legitimate  to  establish 
by  law  a  minimum  standard  of  wages  as  of  sanitation  or  work 
hours.  They  declared  that  if  a  trade  will  not  yield  an  income 
"  sufficient  to  enable  those  who  earn  it  to  secure  at  any  rate  the 
necessaries  of  life  ...  it  is  a  parasitic  trade,  and  it  is  contrary 


STATE  CONTROL,  FACTORY  LEGISLATION,  ETC.    85 

to  the  general  well-being  that  it  should  continue."  *  This  is  a 
big  change  in  attitude  from  that  of  1888,  when  a  keen  supporter  of 
Factory  Acts  could  wonder  whether  "  it  was  or  would  long  be 
possible  for  a  manufacturing  country  like  this  to  maintain  its 
labouring  population  at  a  fair  standard  of  decency  or  living  without 
endangering  the  interests  of  its  great  manufacturing  industries."  a 
The  result  of  the  report  was  the  wages  boards  act  of  1909. 
By  this,  in  certain  selected  trades,  equal  numbers  of  employers 
and  employed  were  appointed  by  the  Board  of  Trade  from 
names  submitted  to  them  on  both  sides,  together  with  some 
other  members  not  more  in  number  than  one-third  of  the  repre- 
sentative ones.  Women  were  eligible,  and  one  woman  was 
essential  where  most  of  the  employed  were  women.  These 
Boards  were  to  fix  minimum  wages  for  the  industry.  Four 
trades  were  first  scheduled  —  chain-making,  box-making,  lace 
mending  and  finishing,  and  the  making  of  ready-made  clothes. 
In  the  first  of  these  wages  were  raised  from  5s.  to  us.  ^d. 
for  a  week  of  fifty-four  hours.  No  evil  consequences  to  the  trade 
ensued.  In  191 3  half  a  dozen  other  trades  were  scheduled  and 
Wages  Boards  appointed  in  them. 

One  of  the  most  difficult  trades  to  deal  with  proved  to  be 
laundries.  This  industry  by  1895  had  only  half  developed 
from  the  domestic  to  the  factory  state,  and  great  opposition  was 
made  to  its  regulation.  In  France  and  Germany  laundries  had 
been  under  the  same  regulations  as  factories  for  fifteen  years,  but 
insuperable  difficulties  were  supposed  to  exist  in  England.  An 
Act  was  passed  in  1895  which  made  sixty  hours  a  normal  week, 
but  in  times  of  pressure  this  could  be  extended  to  sixty-six. 
To  meet  the  supposed  needs  of  incapable  housewives  much 
latitude  was  allowed,  and  the  sixty-six  hours  could  be  compressed 
into  five  days,  and  might  even  on  a  single  day  last  from  8  a.m.  to 
11.30  p.m.  But  enlightened  employers,  ably  backed  by  the 
women  factory  inspectors,  succeeded  at  last  in  1907  in  securing 
proper  legislation.  Laundries  were  put  under  the  ordinary 
Factory  Acts,  though  special  overtime  was  still  allowed.  This 
Act  also  placed  laundries  and  workshops  in  charitable  institutions 
under  the  same  regulations  and  inspection  as  others. 

1  Select  Committee  on  Home  Work,  1908,  p.  xiv. 

2  Lord  Dunraven  in  the  House  of  Lords,  February  28th,  1888. 


86      ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

Throughout  the  period,  but  especially  after  1890,  Acts 
or  Orders  in  Council  to  better  the  lot  of  women  and 
children  became  increasingly  strict.  In  1891  the  lowest  age 
for  child  labour  was  raised  to  eleven,  and  regulations  were 
made  as  to  the  employment  of  women  before  and  after  childbirth. 
These  were,  and  still  are,  largely  evaded,  the  poverty  of  the  women 
driving  them  back  to  work  at  all  risks.  In  1901  an  Inter- depart- 
mental Committee  exposed  a  mass  of  evil  employment  of  children 
in  work  untouched  by  Factory  Acts,  in  street  trading,  in  agricul- 
ture, and  in  all  kinds  of  casual  labour.  They  estimated  that 
200,000  children  were  so  employed,  22,000  of  whom  were 
under  ten,  and  500  under  eight.  The  employment  of 
children  ACT  of  1903  followed,  prohibiting  their  employ- 
ment between  9  p.m.  and  6  a.m.,  or  in  any  injurious  occupation, 
or  in  street  trading  under  eleven  years  of  age,  and  local  authorities 
were  given  powers  to  pass  bye-laws  regulating  child  employment. 

The  magnitude  of  the  employment  of  children  and  young 
persons  is  shown  by  the  following  figures  for  the  first  decade  of 
the  twentieth  century.  There  were  in  factories  and  workshops 
over  1,000,000  persons  under  eighteen  years  of  age,  of  whom 
approximately  460,000  were  under  sixteen.  Of  these  latter 
37,000  were  half-timers,  and  the  colossal  waste  of  this  evil  system 
went  on  till  1922. 

One  feature  of  labour  regulation  that  is  likely  to  extend  in 
the  future  is  the  international.  It  is  being  increasingly 
recognised  that  regulations  to  be  effective  in  the  modern  world 
must  aim  at  some  uniformity  between  nations.  International 
Labour  Conventions  were  called  in  1890  and  1906.  In  1900 
an  International  Association  for  Labour  Legislation  was  founded  ; 
it  holds  biennial  conferences,  and  does  much  to  spread  informa- 
tion, and  to  encourage  all  nations  to  come  into  line  with  the  most 
advanced. 

Factory  Inspection — The  first  factory  inspectors  were 
appointed  in  1833,  and  their  numbers  gradually  increased,  and 
their  powers  rapidly.  To  the  able  work  of  these  Civil  Servants 
much  of  the  improvement  in  the  conditions  of  industrial  life  is 
due.  From  the  first  their  quarterly  reports  have  supplied  a  basis 
of  reliable  fact  presented  by  unbiassed  officials  for  legislators  to 
work  on.     Gradually  it  became  evident  that  if  the  law  was  to 


STATE  CONTROL,  FACTORY  LEGISLATION,  ETC.    87 

accomplish  anything  in  restraining  greedy  men  from  grossly 
exploiting  their  fellows  the  Acts  passed  must  be  detailed,  specific 
and  drastic.  It  was  due  to  their  reports  that  protection  was 
extended  from  children  to  young  persons,  and  from  young 
persons  to  women,  and  eventually  even  to  men.  In  1844  the 
power  of  magistrates  to  interfere  with  the  inspectors  was  removed, 
and  the  Secretary  of  State  made  all  regulations  under  the  Acts. 

During  the  last  forty  years  the  growth  of  the  Civil  Service 
has  been  one  of  the  most  notable  features  of  the  time.  Whatever 
may  be  thought  about  this  increase  in  general,  there  is  no  question 
as  to  its  indispensability  in  the  administration  of  the  Factory 
Acts.  The  staff  had  been  increased  in  1864,  but  the  Act  of  1867 
tried  to  avoid  a  further  enlargement  by  transferring  the  control  of 
workshops,  as  distinct  from  factories,  to  the  local  sanitary 
authorities.  The  plan  failed,  largely  owing  to  the  unwillingness 
of  the  local  Councils  to  interfere  with  their  fellow  townsmen. 
For  many  years  after  1871  the  inspectorate  had  more  work  than 
they  could  perform  properly.  In  1893  the  growing  power  of 
organised  labour  secured  the  appointment  of  some  working  men 
as  assistant  inspectors,  and  at  the  same  time  a  beginning  was 
made  in  the  use  of  women  in  this  capacity.  They  were  first 
appointed  by  twos  and  threes  for  special  pieces  of  investigation, 
and  did  most  valuable  work.  By  1914  their  number  had  risen 
to  twenty-one.  The  growing  need  for  them  is  obvious  from  the 
following  figures  :  in  1896  there  were  in  the  United  Kingdom 
144,000  factories  and  workshops,  in  which  1,403,568  women  and 
girls  and  2,699,917  men  and  boys  were  employed.  By  1914 
the  number  of  women  and  girls  so  employed  was  nearly  2,000,000. 
For  the  past  twenty-five  years  women  have  formed  round  about 
one-third  of  the  factory  workers. 

Some  of  the  abuses  shown  up  by  inspection  may  be  noted  ; 
not  all  of  them  are  yet  ended  : — 

(a)  Overwork  of  young  growing  boys  and  girls  :  e.g.,  a  child  of 
fourteen  legally  employed  from  early  morning  till  11  p.m.  in 
cleaning  and  preparing  workrooms,  running  errands  to  match 
silks  and  ribbons,  and  generally  doing  the  work  of  a  young  appren- 
tice, cooking  meals,  including  supper,  and  doing  the  general 
work  of  the  house.  The  law  allowed  her  work  as  an  apprentice, 
and  took  no  notice  of  her  added  labour  as  general  servant. 


88      ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

The  lifting  of  heavy  weights  by  women  and  children  was 
common.  In  tinplate  works  and  the  hollow- ware  trade  girls  of 
thirteen  to  seventeen  were  found  carrying  weights  of  from 
30  to  in  lbs.  in  the  ordinary  course  of  work.  In  the  potteries 
thirteen-year-old  boys  carried  great  lumps  of  clay  totally  beyond 
their  strength.  Loads  of  sharp-edged  tin  plates  weighing  over 
100  lbs.  were  carried  by  girls  of  fourteen.  A  boy  of  fourteen, 
who  himself  weighed  77  lbs.,  was  found  carrying  69  lbs.  of  clay 
to  a  moulder,  and  a  boy  of  thirteen  struggling  up  a  steep  flight  of 
stairs  with  78  lbs.  After  1903  children  under  fourteen  were 
protected  from  this  particular  tyranny.  Girls  and  women 
suffered  in  the  same  way  in  many  textile  factories. 

(b)  The  disastrous  effect  of  systematic  overtime.  Such  hours 
as  the  following  were  legal  in  191 2  in  a  fancy  stationery  factory  : 
from  8  a.m.  to  10  p.m.  on  three  days  a  week,  8  a.m.  to  8  p.m.  on 
two  days,  and  8  a.m.  to  4  p.m.  on  Saturdays.  Always  and  con- 
tinuously the  inspectors  fought  the  half-time  system,  now  at  last 
abolished  in  1922. 

(c)  Occasional  brutality.  As  the  inspectors,  and  especially  the 
women,  came  to  be  known  and  trusted,  complaints  against 
individual  foremen  or  masters  were  more  frequently  made,  and 
investigated.  Usually  the  mere  discovery  by  the  inspector 
effected  improvements. 

(d)  Unhealthy  conditions,  especially  bad  ventilation,  undue 
cold  or  overheating.  Workgirls,  after  a  wet  and  snowy  walk 
were  sometimes  put  to  work  in  unheated  rooms,  while  unventilated 
underground  rooms  with  engines  working  and  artificial  light 
burning  all  day  would  touch  the  other  extreme  of  discomfort  and 
danger. 

Perhaps  the  best  work  of  all  done  by  the  inspectors  was  the 
raising  of  the  standard  of  the  best  employers  and  the  more 
enlightened  local  authorities.  Often  these  only  needed  to  be 
told  what  to  do,  and  then  they  did  it  gladly  ;  others  required  only 
the  assurance  that  the  same  requirements  would  be  exacted  from 
all  their  rivals.  This  was  particularly  the  case  in  questions  dealing 
with  the  health  and  comfort  of  women  workers.  It  is  on  record 
that  at  least  one  factory  owner,  impressed  by  the  value  of  even  an 
occasional  visit  from  a  trained  observer,  appointed  a  woman  on 
his  staff  to  watch  permanently  against  abuses,  and  to  see  that 


STATE  CONTROL,  FACTORY  LEGISLATION,  ETC.    89 

proper  regulations  were  carried  out.  Even  where  employers 
had  not  such  ideals  of  their  responsibility,  the  inspectors  could 
often  shame  them  into  decency  without  the  need  to  threaten  legal 
action. 

Lastly,  the  reports  of  the  inspectors  on  dangerous  trades  has 
led  to  scientific  investigation  as  to  possibilities  of  prevention, 
often  with  success.  Such  action  has  reduced  the  reported  cases 
of  lead  poisoning  from  over  1,000  in  1900  to  230  in  1921,  and 
made  the  life  of  the  workers  in  fish  curing  more  tolerable,  by 
discovering  and  enforcing  suitable  early  treatment  for  the  sores 
produced  by  constant  immersion  in  brine. 

Poor  Relief. — The  care  of  the  poor  as  a  function  of  the  central 
Government  dates  from  1601.  During  the  Middle  Ages  the 
Church  was  responsible,  and  charity  was  universal,  and  a  highly 
esteemed  virtue.  One-third  of  the  tithes  was  regarded  as  due  to 
the  poor  of  the  parish,  the  monasteries  practised  an  open-handed 
hospitality,  and  the  rich  gave  alms  in  the  name  of  religion. 
Towards  the  end  of  that  period,  about  the  fifteenth  century, 
some  of  the  municipalities  began  to  assume  the  duty,  especially 
towards  the  sick  and  aged.  Unemployment,  in  the  modern  sense 
of  the  existence  of  people  willing  to  work  for  whom  no  profitable 
occupation  can  be  found,  hardly  existed.  There  was  doubtless 
a  number  of  idle  vagabonds  who  did  not  work,  and  who  lived 
parasitically  on  society,  but  their  number  does  not  seem  to  have 
been  more  than  society  was  willing  to  support  for  the  good  of 
its  soul. 

Towards  the  end  of  the  fifteenth  century  came  a  new  pheno- 
menon ;  all  over  Europe  appeared  large  numbers  of  men  for  whose 
work  there  was  apparently  no  call.  The  chief  cause  was  the  break- 
up of  the  feudal  organisations,  and  the  establishment  of  centralised 
Governments  that  refused  to  tolerate  private  war.  This  released 
a  large  number  of  men-at-arms  who  despised  ordinary  work,  and 
were  indeed  unfit  for  it.  Then  soon  after  came  a  general  rise  in 
prices,  due  to  an  influx  of  silver  from  the  New  World,  and 
consequently  much  poverty  and  distress.  In  England  the 
situation  was  made  much  worse  by  the  turning  of  arable  fields  to 
pasture  to  meet  the  new  demand  for  wool,  and  the  climax  was 
reached  when  in  1540  the  centres  of  charity,  the  monasteries, 
disappeared  from  the  land.     Throughout  the  sixteenth  century 


9o   ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

the  problem,  both  of  the  impotent  poor  and  the  rogue  and  vaga- 
bond, troubled  the  paternal  Tudor  despotism.  After  many 
experiments,  at  last  in  1597  and  1601  a  great  Code  of  Poor  Relief 
was  drawn  up  and  imposed  on  all  local  authorities.  Its  main 
principles  were  :  (i.)  Maintenance  for  the  sick  and  aged  at  the 
cost  of  the  district  ;  (ii.)  Training  for  the  orphan  ;  (iii.)  Work 
for  those  willing  to  work,  to  be  found  by  the  overseers  ;  (iv.) 
Punishment  of  the  tramp  and  the  idler.  Up  to  the  outbreak  of 
the  Civil  War  this  great  Code  seems  to  have  been  carried  out, 
and  to  have  effected  its  purpose.  Its  success  depended  on  the 
ceaseless  vigilance  of  the  Privy  Council  in  keeping  the  local 
authorities,  i.e.,  the  Justices  of  the  Peace  and  the  Overseers,  up 
to  the  mark.  After  1660  there  was  more  trouble  ;  the  Civil  War 
had  left  the  inevitable  trail  of  unemployables,  the  Government 
was  weak  and  corrupt;  and  abuses  were  rife.  In  1662  a  Law  of 
Settlement  was  passed,  which,  whatever  its  intentions,  had  the 
result  of  preventing  men  from  leaving  a  place  where  there  was  no 
work  in  search  of  one  where  there  was.  In  1723  the  practice  of 
the  Poor  Law  was  tightened  considerably,  and  all  through  the 
century  the  condition  of  the  pauper  suffered  from  the  general 
corruption  of  the  age — he  was  usually  at  the  mercy  of  a  contractor 
who  hired  him  from  the  overseers. 

With  the  period  of  enclosures  and  the  exploitation  of  the 
factories,  the  problem  of  the  unemployed  suddenly  again  became 
formidable.  With  the  outbreak  of  war  in  1794  the  condition  of 
the  workers  became  desperate.  A  short-sighted  policy,  known 
as  the  Speenhamland  system,  was  adopted,  by  which  the  poor 
rate  was  used  to  supplement  wages.  This  resulted  in  the  poor 
farmer,  who  did  not  employ  much  labour,  paying  part  of  the  wages 
for  the  large  farmer  who  employed  many  hands.  It  also  demoral- 
ised both  employer  and  employed.  The  employer  became 
entirely  unscrupulous  in  grinding  down  wages,  knowing  that, 
if  he  paid  as  low  as  45.  a  week,  the  rates  would  add  the  other  3s. 
to  prevent  the  man  starving  ;  the  employed  labourer  became 
utterly  reckless,  since  he  could  never  expect  to  earn  more  than  a 
bare  subsistence,  and  he  got  more  for  every  child  he  recklessly 
brought  into  the  world. 

Thus  the  demoralisation  of  the  very  poor  grew  so  great  that 
any  remedy  seemed  justified.     Unfortunately  the  crisis  came  at 


STATE  CONTROL,  FACTORY  LEGISLATION,  ETC.    91 

a  moment  when  doctrines  of  laisser-faire  were  almost  universally 
accepted.  There  was  a  strong  school  of  economists  who  held  that 
if  no  provision  were  made  for  the  poor,  there  would  soon  cease 
to  be  any  poor.  The  great  thing  was  to  make  pauperism  more 
unpleasant  than  work.  It  was  difficult,  since  in  1830  the  pauper 
could  hardly  be  fed  or  housed  worse  than  the  labourer  and  yet 
be  kept  alive.  So  the  plan  of  attaching  what  was  really  a  penal 
side  to  the  granting  of  relief  was  adopted.  They  called  it  disci- 
pline, but  frankly  admitted  that  its  object  was  to  make  life  in  the 
workhouse  so  intolerable  as  to  force  a  man  to  endure  almost 
anything  rather  than  enter  it.  At  the  same  time  they  aimed  at 
stopping  all  outdoor  relief  to  the  able  bodied.  On  these  lines 
the  great  Poor  Law  Act  of  1834  was  framed,  and  it  is  still  in  force. 
It  laid  down  as  a  principle  that  the  condition  of  the  pauper  must 
be  "  less  eligible  "  than  that  of  the  lowest  paid  worker.  There 
was  probably  no  deliberate  intention  to  include  in  these  hardships 
the  old,  the  sick,  and  the  children,  but  the  growth  of  general 
mixed  workhouses  prevented  any  real  discrimination.  It  is 
impossible  to  combine  in  one  establishment  a  disciplinary  system 
for  work-shies,  a  hospital,  a  school,  and  a  refuge  for  the  aged. 
But  it  satisfied  the  people  of  the  Victorian  era,  it  made  poverty  a 
crime,  and  it  certainly  lessened  the  poor  rate.  It  also  forced  the 
farmer  at  least  to  pay  a  wage  of  bare  subsistence.  What  it  meant 
in  horror  and  suffering  to  the  better  class  poor  will  never  be 
known  ;  some  shadow  of  it  may  be  seen  in  the  writings  of  Dickens 
and  others,  and  in  the  loathing  and  fear  of  the  whole  system 
throughout  the  land  on  the  part  of  the  wage-earning  class. 

As  the  Poor  Law  was  in  1870,  so  it  continued  up  to  1914, 
but  during  the  last  twenty  years  of  this  period  no  existing 
administration  received  more  destructive  criticism.  The  rapid 
growth  of  unemployment  made  the  optimistic  theories  of  the 
laisser-faire  school  impossible,  the  growth  of  humanitarian  feeling 
produced  a  reaction  against  the  "  scientific  "  treatment  of  human 
beings  in  categories.  The  advent  of  women  to  Boards  of 
Guardians  strengthened  this  revolt,  and  all  these  factors  combined 
to  create  a  public  spirit  demanding  reform.  In  1894  the  historian 
of  the  Poor  Law  was  already  complaining  of  the  "  reactionary  ' 
proposal  to  rescue  the  aged  from  the  general  mixed  workhouse 
by  the  grant  of  small  old-age  pensions  ;   by  1908  the  "  reaction  ' 


92      ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

had  materialised  at  the  hands  of  a  Liberal  Government,  the 
old  age  pension  act  of  that  year  secured  to  men  and 
women  over  seventy  the  sum  of  55.  a  week  for  life.  It  was  little 
enough,  but  it  saved  many  an  old  couple  from  the  dreaded 
"  House,"  though  its  limitation  to  those  whose  total  resources 
did  not  exceed  £31  10s.  a  year  was  hardly  an  encouragement  to 
thrift.  But  the  aged  were  not  the  only  sufferers  under  the  law, 
the  case  of  pauper  children  had  long  been  a  scandal,  whilst 
attempts  to  "  deter  "  the  vagrant  were  known  to  have  broken 
down  consistently.  In  1909  a  royal  commission  was 
appointed  to  investigate  the  whole  administration.  Its  two 
Reports  form  probably  a  record  in  the  detail  and  power  of  their 
survey  of  the  whole  matter.  That  of  the  majority  which  proposed 
reform  was  immediately  overshadowed  by  the  brilliance  and 
constructive  ability  of  the  minority.  This  Minority  Report, 
signed  by  two  Labour  leaders  and  a  prospective  bishop,  was 
largely  the  work  of  the  fourth  signatory,  Mrs.  Sidney  Webb. 
It  now  holds  the  field  for  the  basis  for  all  future  dealings  with 
poor  relief.  A  large  part  of  it  consists  of  vivid  descriptions  of 
the  present  condition  of  Poor  Law  administration.  There  is  a 
direct  central  attack  on  the  general  mixed  workhouse,  for,  in  spite 
of  persistent  efforts  since  1866  of  the  Central  Authority  to  secure 
classification  and  segregation,  there  were  still,  in  1909,  15,000 
children  living  under  these  bad  conditions,  in  contact  with  the 
depraved,  the  drunken,  and  the  dissolute  ;  babies  in  nurseries 
tended  by  feeble-minded  girls  or  women  far  gone  in  senile  decay  ; 
babies  who  never  left  the  nursery,  where  the  air  and  the  smell 
were  foul  and  sickening,  for  who  could  carry  sixty  infants  up  and 
down  three  flights  of  stairs  to  the  courtyard  ?  In  spite,  again,  of 
pressure  from  the  Central  Authority,  it  is  shown  that  thousands 
of  sick  and  helpless  men  and  women  lie  neglected,  without  proper 
medical  or  nursing  care,  in  the  hands  of  paupers  or  untrained  and 
overworked  nurses,  and  inadequately  remunerated  doctors. 

The  number  of  mental  defectives  in  the  ordinary  wards  of  a 
general  workhouse  is  estimated  at  over  60,000,  many  of  them 
young  and  growing  up  without  any  attempt  to  train  their  limited 
faculties,  or  to  help  them  to  a  possible  life,  they  are  left  a  nuisance 
to  themselves  and  an  offence  to  other  inmates.  As  to  the  aged, 
three  policies  of  relief  are  described,  the  most  prevalent  being 


STATE  CONTROL,  FACTORY  LEGISLATION,  ETC.    93 

one  of  inadequate  outdoor  relief — 2s.  or  2s.  6d.  a  week — and  if 
the  recipient  has  no  other  resources  and  so  cannot  exist  on  such  a 
sum,  the  general  mixed  workhouse  is  his  only  refuge.  This  is 
the  system  in  nine-tenths  of  the  Unions  of  England  and  Wales. 
The  second  policy  is  to  refuse  all  outdoor  relief,  make  the  work- 
house as  unpleasant  as  possible,  and  see  that  all  "  deserving  ' 
cases  are  helped  by  voluntary  charity.  The  third  policy,  and  the 
one  advocated  by  the  Central  Authority,  of  giving  sufficient 
outdoor  relief  or  else  maintenance  in  comfortable  quarters  apart 
from  the  general  workhouse,  has  not  been  adopted  by  many 
Guardians.  Where  adopted,  the  results  are  good.  In  Scotland 
it  is  general. 

The  Report  also  deals  with  the  Law  of  Settlement,  under 
which,  in  spite  of  many  modifications  and  exemptions,  some 
12,000  persons  are  still  deported  annually,  often  against  their  will, 
from  one  Union  to  another,  at  a  cost  of  not  far  short  of  £100,000 
a  year,  for  which  expense  "  each  Union  succeeds  in  getting  rid 
of  some  paupers  at  the  cost  of  having  others  thrust  upon  it." 

Turning  to  the  able-bodied,  the  Report  describes  the  desperate 
condition  under  present  Poor  Law  practice  of  the  widow  with 
young  children.  Outdoor  relief  is  usually  granted  her  to  the 
extent  of  is.  or  is.  6d.  a  week  for  each  child,  often  nothing  for 
herself.  The  condition  of  such  children  is  often  worse  than  even 
that  of  those  living  in  the  workhouse,  who  are  fed  and  clothed, 
even  if  mentally  and  morally  poisoned.  Should  the  mother  die, 
the  children  may,  however,  be  boarded  out  and  a  payment  of 
4*.  or  5s.  a  week  made  for  them,  or  sent  to  a  Poor  Law  school 
at  a  cost  of  125.  to  215.  a  week  each.  No  Guardians  pay  the  widow 
with  young  children  enough  to  enable  her  to  rear  them  in  efficiency 
and  decency.  As  to  the  able-bodied  man,  whether  a  temporary 
"  unemployed  "  or  a  habitual  vagrant,  his  treatment  at  the  hands 
of  the  Poor  Law  is  mainly  a  matter  of  chance,  and  ranges  "  between 
the  two  extremes  of  a  mere  pretence  of  work,  with  a  good  meal, 
a  bed  in  a  common  lodging-house,  and  a  few  halfpence  in  money 
on  the  one  hand,  and  on  the  other  painful  penal  labour  upon 
relief  physiologically  insufficient  to  make  good  the  wear  and 
tear  involved."  x  Attempts  at  a  really  deterrent  rtgime  for  all 
able-bodied  men  and  women  paupers,  tried  at  Poplar  in  1871,  at 
1  Minority  Report  of  Poor  Law  Commission,  Pt.  II. 


94      ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

Kensington  in  1882,  and  in  Birmingham  in  1880,  had  failed, 
except  in  the  sense  of  keeping  decent  men  and  women  from 
applying  for  relief,  however  dire  their  need.  The  regime  was 
worse  than  that  of  the  prisons,  and  the  Birmingham  Report 
states  that  out  of  ten  inmates  sent  to  such  test  houses  only  one 
arrived.  Those  who  did  venture  in  often  preferred  risking  prison 
to  carrying  out  the  tasks  set,  until  the  magistrates  refused  to 
convict.  But,  as  the  writers  of  the  Report  point  out,  to  rid  the 
workhouse  of  the  able-bodied  loafer  is  not  to  rid  society  of  him  ; 
it  may  only  make  him  a  greater  social  incubus.  As  to  the  vagrant, 
the  638  casual  wards  dotted  about  the  country  are  resorted  to 
nightly  by  numbers  varying  from  7,000  to  17,000,  representatives 
of  a  total  army  "  on  tramp  "  estimated  to  range  with  the  season 
from  30,000  to  80,000  individuals. 

In  face  of  all  these  failures  of  the  system,  the  writers  of  the 

Minority  Report  recommend  a  complete  break-up  of  the  whole 

Poor  Law  organisation,  the  abolition  of  any  one  authority  dealing 

with  "  destitution,"  and  the  transference  of  the  varied  classes, 

who  become  or  may  become   destitute,  to  appropriate  bodies 

already  dealing  with  more  prosperous  members  of  these  classes. 

This  transference  has  in  a  way  already  begun  ;    in   1905  the 

unemployed    workmen    act    created    District    Committees    to 

deal    with    unemployment  ;     in    1907    the    medical    inspection 

of  schoolchildren,  to  be  followed  by  clinics  for  treatment,  was 

imposed  as  a  duty  on  the  Local  Education  Authority,  and  in 

the  same  year  arrangements  for  feeding  hungry  children  became 

part  of  the  business  of  the  same  body  ;    municipal  hospitals  for 

all  kinds  of  infectious  disease  are  common  throughout  the  country, 

some  exist  for  surgical  and  other  cases,  and  provision  is  often 

made  for  tuberculosis  patients,  all  this  being  possible  under  the 

Public  Health   Acts  ;    vaccination  is   obtainable  free,  the  free 

distribution-  of  the  anti-toxin  for   diphtheria   is   common,   and 

several  Public  Health  Authorities  run  cleansing  stations,  subscribe 

to  dispensaries,  or  provide  means  of  home  nursing.     It  is  therefore 

proposed  that  the  present  Poor  Law  Authorities  should  cease  to 

exist,  and  their  duties  be  transferred  to  the  County  and  Borough 

Councils,  working  through  their  various  Committees.     Thus  all 

pauper  children  of  school  age  would  be  dealt  with  by  the  Local 

Education   Authority  under   the  supervision  of   the    Board    of 


STATE  CONTROL,  FACTORY  LEGISLATION,  ETC.    95 

Education  ;  the  care  of  the  sick,  the  incapacitated,  and  the  infant 
would  pass  to  the  Local  Health  Authorities  ;  the  aged  would 
become  pensioners  for  whom  the  Local  Pensions  Committee 
would  be  responsible.  For  the  mentally  defective  of  every  grade 
it  is  proposed  to  create  a  new  Local  Committee  out  of  the  existing 
Asylums  Committee.  For  the  most  difficult  problem  of  the  able- 
bodied,  the  writers  of  the  Report  hold  that  only  a  national  solution 
is  possible,  and  that  only  a  national  body  can  hope  to  deal  with 
unemployment  and  its  causes.  Such  a  body  would  have  to  deal 
with  the  abolition  of  child  labour,  the  creation  of  an  efficient 
system  of  Labour  Exchanges,  with  insurance  against  unemploy- 
ment, with  emigration  and  immigration,  and  scientific  statistics. 
It  would  also  arrange  for  certain  public  works,  such  as  afforestation, 
coast  protection  and  land  reclamation  to  be  carried  out  at  market 
prices,  and  in  the  ordinary  way,  but  spread  over  long  periods,  and 
put  in  hand  or  slackened  off  as  the  fall  or  rise  of  trade  increased 
or  lessened  unemployment.  For  any  residuum  of  able-bodied 
unemployed  men  and  women  that  might  remain  after  all  these 
schemes  were  in  efficient  working  order,  they  recommend  full 
maintenance,  provided  the  recipient  is  willing  to  be  trained  into 
greater  efficiency,  with  no  stigma  of  pauperism  attached.  For 
widows  with  children  there  should  be  provided  a  sufficient 
income  to  rear  their  children  in  decency  and  health,  and  that  a 
minimum  standard  in  these  matters  should  be  demanded  of  them. 
This  Report  created  considerable  controversy  in  the  five  years 
that  remained,  before  the  war  temporarily  solved  the  problem  of 
the  unemployed  and  their  destitute  wives  and  children,  only  to 
revive  it  in  fiercer  form  two  years  after  the  Peace.  The  whole 
question  of  poverty  and  destitution  is  the  most  serious  of  modern 
times,  and  the  next  attempt  to  deal  with  it  will  probably  be  on 
the  lines  indicated  above.  Possibly  some  later  generation  may 
decide  to  prevent  it. 


CHAPTER  VI 

IMPERIALISM  AND  THE  SCRAMBLE  FOR  MARKETS 

We  have  seen  that  about  1870  England  led  the  world  as  an 
industrial  nation,  and  relatively  to  others  had  reached  its  highest 
point.  It  also  held  the  leading  position  in  commerce  and  in 
colonial  expansion,  but  here  its  zenith  was  still  far  off. 

English  foreign  trade,  apart  from  the  export  of  wool  and  the 
import  of  wine,  reached  importance  first  towards  the  end  of  the 
Middle  Ages.  It  was  carefully  fostered  by  Henry  VII.  and 
encouraged  by  all  the  Tudors,  and  the  Merchant  Adventurers 
of  the  late  fifteenth  and  the  sixteenth  centuries  penetrated  to  all 
parts  of  Europe,  with  ships  armed  for  all  eventualities.  From 
1560  onwards  they  began  to  go  farther  afield  and  to  dispute  the 
right  of  Spain  and  Portugal  to  a  monopoly  of  trade  in  all  the  new 
lands  of  the  world.  Throughout  the  seventeenth  century  English 
trade  expanded,  and,  while  the  power  of  Spain  declined,  the 
English  fought  the  Dutch  for  the  carrying  trade  of  Europe.  In 
the  eighteenth  century,  France  and  England  were  at  death  grips 
for  the  control  of  the  markets  of  the  East  and  of  the  West,  and 
our  colonial  Empire  was  the  prize  of  battle.  In  1763  we  held 
the  New  World  from  Baffin's  Straits  to  Georgia  with  an  unlimited 
western  boundary,  and  in  the  East  it  had  been  settled  that  India 
was  to  be  the  spoil  of  England  and  not  of  France.  We  quickly 
lost  the  more  important  part  of  the  New  World,  because  our 
rulers  had  not  vision  enough  to  see  the  right  path,  but  in  another 
fifty  years  we  had  added  another  continent  to  our  Empire  and 
begun  our  adventures  in  Africa.  Meanwhile,  our  trade  was 
hampered  by  most  of  the  old  shackles — Navigation  Acts  that 
forced  our  Colonies  to  trade  only  by  way  of  England  and  in  English 
ships,  duties  on  everything  that  entered  the  country,  protection 
of  English  industries  of  a  kind  that  cared  nothing  for  the  well- 
being  of  other  parts  of  the  Empire,  and  prevented  Irish  woollens 
and  Irish  cattle  from  competing  in  English  markets.     With  the 

96 


IMPERIALISM   AND   SCRAMBLE  FOR  MARKETS      97 

close  of  the  Napoleonic  Wars  came  the  fight  to  remove  these 
hindrances,  and  in  1846  the  battle  was  won  ;  by  1870  English 
trade  was  free,  London  the  exchange  port  of  the  world,  and 
English  commerce  advancing  in  all  directions. 

At  the  same  date  we  were  the  rulers  of  the  largest  colonial 
Empire  in  the  world,  and  had  made  considerable  progress  in 
learning  how  to  govern  it.  Canada  (in  1847),  Newfoundland, 
Australia  and  New  Zealand  (in  1855-6),  had  achieved  responsible 
self-government,  and  by  1872  Cape  Colony  joined  the  fully 
enfranchised  colonies.  In  India  something  of  the  lesson  of  the 
Mutiny  of  1857  had  been  learned,  and  an  era  of  just  and  level 
administration  by  an  efficient,  though  alien,  Civil  Service  had 
begun.  There  was  still  much  to  do  ;  the  condition  of  no  part 
of  the  Empire  was  really  satisfactory,  and  the  prevailing  opinion 
of  the  England  of  the  'sixties  was  that  Colonies  were  an  expensive 
nuisance,  certain  some  day  to  drop  away,  and  meanwhile  a  source 
of  danger  as  exposed  to  attack.  Our  starting  date  of  1874  marks 
a  change  of  attitude,  for,  with  the  increasing  need  of  markets  for 
our  ever-growing  productions,  of  outlets  for  a  too  rapidly  accumu- 
lating capital,  of  more  and  more  raw  material,  especially  such  as 
grows  in  tropical  lands,  came  a  desire  to  link  together  under  our 
control  still  greater  portions  of  the  earth's  surface.  Hence  arose 
an  imperialistic  movement,  and  a  scramble  for  markets  between 
the  white  nations  of  the  world.  The  number  and  power  of  our 
rivals  rapidly  increased,  and  there  was  much  unnecessary  alarm 
because  of  it.  The  rival  that  struck  our  imagination  most  was 
Germany,  for,  since  the  Thirty  Years'  War,  she  had  lost  her 
mediaeval  predominance  in  trade  and  she  had  the  handicap  of  a 
short  and  inferior  coast  line.  But  railways  gave  her  her  chance, 
her  unification  in  one  nation  after  1870  the  power  to  use  it.  The 
iron  of  Lorraine  could  easily  be  joined  to  the  coal  of  Westphalia 
with  the  help  of  the  new  form  of  traction  ;  railways  broke  down 
the  barrier  of  the  Alps  and  threw  open  to  her  the  trade  of  Italy 
and  the  Mediterranean.  Russia,  hitherto  blocked  by  ice  in  her 
ports  for  more  than  half  the  year,  could  send  her  produce  through 
Europe  by  rail,  and  eventually  to  the  Far  East  as  well,  while  the 
great  corn  areas  of  her  plains  became  the  source  of  her  wealth. 
At  the  same  time  a  new  great  nation  was  growing  behind  the 
Alleghanies,  and  by  1890  the  Industrial  Revolution  was  Striking 

E.D.E.  G 


98      ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

the  little  towns  of  the  Middle  West,  as  a  century  earlier  it  had 
fallen  on  the  rural  townships  of  Yorkshire  and  Lancashire. 

Faced  with  these  rivals,  England  looked  round  to  strengthen 
her  commercial  defences  ;  she  saw  her  daughter  nations  potentially 
or  actually  rich  in  much  she  needed,  and  a  movement  arose  to 
make  with  them  a  self-sufficing  Empire.     It    was    difficult    to 
link  strongly   Protectionist   Colonies   with   a  passionately   Free 
Trade  Mother  Country,  though  attempts  were  made,  as  we  shall 
see.     By  1895,  when  Joseph  Chamberlain  took  over  the  Colonial 
Office,  there  were  many  ready  to  follow  him  away  from  Free 
Trade.     For  competition  seemed  very  threatening.     America,  in 
particular,  was  seizing  our  South  American  coal  market,  and  her 
iron  and  steel  manufacturers  were  rushing  far  ahead  of  ours. 
Germany  was  devoting  much  attention  to  the  same  thing,  and 
the  English  Government  bought  guns  from  Krupp.     Chamberlain 
conceived  the  idea  of  a  self-sufficing  Empire  defended  by  an 
Imperial   Zollverein.     His   dreams   of  a   closer   political  union 
were  shattered  at  the  1902  Imperial  Conference,  when  it  was 
evident  that  the  Colonies  were  not  ready  for  such  a  move,  and  in 
1903  he  embarked  on  his  campaign  to  revive  Protection,  so  that 
we  could  start  giving  preferences  to  the  Colonies,  "  even  at  some 
sacrifice."     He  failed  to  convince  the  people  that  they  could 
safely  accept  higher  food  prices  in  the  assurance  that  Protection 
would  give  more  work.     They  retorted  with  figures  of  unemploy- 
ment  in    Protectionist    Germany   and    America.     The    lure    of 
"  retaliation  "  also  failed,  and  the  retort  that  the  exclusion  of 
Continental  bounty-fed  sugar  only  damaged  the  jam  trade  seemed 
conclusive,  if  true.     The  arguments  swung  to  and  fro.     Free 
traders  asked  how  we  were  to  give  preference  to  Australia  when 
her  exports  to  us  were  nearly  all  raw  material  ;   Tariff  Reformers 
urged  that  safety  demanded  an  imperial  food  supply,  opponents 
declared  that  it  could  not  be  done,  and  pointed  to  our  Argentine 
meat  imports,  and  to  the  fact  that  70  per  cent,  of  our  wheat  supply 
came  from  outside  the  Empire  ;    Tariff  Reformers  prophesied 
that  unless  something  were  done  we  should  lose  our  colonial 
markets   and   eventually   our   Colonies.     In    1906   the    Liberals 
gained  power,  and  in  1907  the  Liberal  Government  refused,  at 
the  Imperial  Conference,  to  discuss  any  question  of  taxing  food. 
Another  change  that  occurred  in  this  period  was  the  reduction 


IMPERIALISM   AND   SCRAMBLE   FOR  MARKETS       99 

of  our  transhipment  trade.  Up  to  1870  London  had  been  the 
great  entrepot  of  the  world  ;  rapid  transport  made  this  less 
necessary.  Cargoes  could  be  dropped  easily  en  route  at  convenient 
places  and  railways  swiftly  carried  them  inland. 

Railways  altered  also  the  lines  of  our  colonial  expansion.  In 
the  eighteenth  century  and  up  to  1850  the  profitable  trade  lands 
were  on  the  coast  or  were  islands  ;  railways  made  the  great 
interior  areas  equally  valuable.  In  Africa,  Britain  especially  has 
developed  inland,  so  that  her  possessions  lie  on  the  map  a  long 
red  stripe  almost  down  the  middle  of  the  continent,  with  sea-exits 
to  the  south  and  east,  but  with  a  seaboard  otherwise  held  by  rival 
nations.  Very  different  this  from  1763,  when  there  was  a  violent 
controversy  as  to  the  retention  of  Canada  or  of  Guadeloupe  and 
Martinique  after  the  Seven  Years'  War. 

With  the  growing  international  rivalry  came  the  search  for 
new  markets  and  the  scramble  for  such  of  the  world's  surface 
as  was  not  yet  fully  occupied.  This  is  best  shown  in  the  story 
of  Africa  told  below.  There  was  danger  in  this  expansion, 
though  perhaps  a  danger  we  could  not,  at  this  date,  easily  avoid. 
It  was  pointed  out  in  1899  by  Sir  Henry  Campbell  Bannerman, 
when  he  urged  "  the  danger  of  this  expansiveness  is  that  it  with- 
draws the  energies  and  enterprise  of  our  countrymen  from  markets 
which  they  used  to  control  ...  in  the  vain  pursuit  of  a  will-o'- 
the-wisp  of  a  market  which  does  not  and  may  not  exist  for  years 
to  come."  Dangerous  or  not,  the  expansion  was  made  ;  how 
far  it  was  responsible  for  the  catastrophe  of  1914  only  posterity 
can  decide. 

A  word  must  be  said  about  the  curious  revival  of  Chartered 
Companies,  by  which  much  of  the  work  was  done.  They  differed 
from  the  old  Companies,  by  having  no  monopoly  of  trade.  Their 
advantages  and  disadvantages  have  been  the  subject  of  much 
controversy.  On  the  one  hand  it  is  claimed  that  they  did  pioneer 
work  that  it  would  have  been  costly  and  even  impossible  for  the 
Government  to  undertake  ;  that  they  occupied  territory  which 
might  have  been  taken  by  some  other  nation  to  the  exclusion  of 
British  trade  ;  that,  their  work  done,  they  stepped  aside  and  the 
nation  acquired  the  results  of  their  labours.  Against  them  it  is 
urged  that  their  almost  irresponsible  powers  (they  raised  troops. 
made  treaties,  and  waged  native  wars)  always  ended  in  involving 

«-  2 


ioo     ECONOMIC   DEVELOPMENT   OF   ENGLAND 

the  Imperial  Government  in  some  disaster  or  other,  embroiled 
it  with  other  nations  and  cost  it  expensive  expeditions.  In  all 
cases  they  were  eventually  bought  out  by  the  Government. 
The  chief  ones  were  :  The  British  North  Borneo  (1881),  The 
Royal  Niger  (1886),  The  British  East  Africa  (1888),  and  The 
British  South  Africa  (1889). 

Such  was  the  general  outline  of  colonial  development  up  to 
19 1 4  ;  we  must  now  look  at  the  Colonies  as  individual  States. 

Canada. — The  earliest  part  to  be  occupied  by  Europeans 
was  Newfoundland,  whither  came  in  the  sixteenth  century 
French  and  English  fishing  fleets,  with  temporary  sojourns  on 
the  coast.  The  island  was  definitely  acknowledged  as  English 
in  1 71 3,  but  there  was  little  law  and  order  before  1791,  and  the 
rule  of  might  flourished  among  the  700  fishing  smacks  of  the  two 
nations,  while  the  Devonshire  merchants  who  controlled  the  trade 
steadily  objected  to  any  sort  of  justice  or  order  being  established. 
After  1 81 3  grants  of  lands  were  officially  made  to  settlers,  and  in 
1832  they  obtained  a  Legislature. 

Hudson's  Bay  Territory  had  also  been  ceded  to  England  by 
the  Treaty  of  Utrecht.  But  the  land  between  this  area  and 
Newfoundland,  along  the  banks  of  the  St.  Lawrence,  had  been 
both  discovered  and  colonised  by  the  French.  Farmers  had 
settled  all  along  the  river,  which  was  the  only  highway,  each 
with  a  small  frontage  and  an  indefinite  stretch  inland.  French 
law  and  its  system  of  seigneuries  were  imported  entire,  but  under 
the  conditions  of  a  new  country  they  shed  most  of  their  feudal 
tyranny,  and  the  tenants,  with  security  of  tenure  and  few  or  no 
corvees,  were  satisfied  to  keep  it.  The  colony  had  been  kept 
strictly  Catholic,  no  Huguenot  being  admitted.  As  a  result  of 
the  Seven  Years'  War,  which,  as  far  as  the  English  and  French 
were  concerned,  was  a  war  for  overseas  markets,  the  dream  of  a 
great  French  colonial  empire  in  the  West  had  vanished,  and  in 
1763  the  whole  of  North  America  between  the  Mississippi  and 
the  Atlantic,  together  with  Canada  and  Cape  Breton  Isle,  was 
acknowledged  to  be  English.  Thanks  to  the  tact  and  good  sense 
of  the  early  Governors,  who  left  the  French  colonists  their  laws 
and  customs,  the  attempt  of  the  revolting  Colonies  of  New  England 
to  lure  these  to  an  alliance  failed,  and  it  was  to  Canada  that 
American  "  loyalists  "  migrated  after  1783.     The  American  War 


IMPERIALISM   AND   SCRAMBLE   FOR   MARKETS     101 

of  1812  raged  along  the  border,  but  the  Canadians  held  out, 
though  by  this  time  the  difficulties  between  the  two  sets  of 
colonists,  one  British  and  Protestant,  the  other  French  and 
Catholic,  had  become  acute.  English  Governors  sent  out  were 
often  ignorant  and  tactless,  and  discontent  on  the  part  of  the 
Canadians  grew.  Their  grievances  were  many.  The  Assembly 
had  the  right  to  withhold  money,  but  could  not  control  its  expendi- 
ture ;  in  Upper  Canada  (Ontario)  the  power  had  got  into  the 
hands  of  a  few  families,  and  the  reservation  of  a  seventh  of  the 
land  for  the  clergy  became  a  grievance,  since  it  was  often  undeve- 
loped and  a  hindrance  to  others.  Papineau  in  French  Canada 
and  Mackenzie  in  Ontario  led  revolts,  which  failed,  but  called 
forth  an  investigation  by  the  Home  Government.  The  Earl  of 
Durham  was  sent  out  in  1838  as  High  Commissioner,  with  Buller 
as  official  and  Gibbon  Wakefield  as  unofficial  assistants.  He 
recommended  the  union  of  the  two  Canadas  and  the  granting  of 
responsible  government.  The  former  was  carried  out  by  Charles 
Poulett  Thomson,  afterwards  Lord  Sydenham,  in  1839-41,  and 
the  latter  fully  established  by  Lord  Elgin  in  1847.  In  1846 
another  crisis  had  arisen.  England  adopted  Free  Trade,  and  the 
preference  we  had  previously  given  to  Canadian  products  lapsed, 
while  the  Navigation  Laws  were  still  in  force.  Consequently, 
Canada  competed  on  equal  terms  with  the  world,  but  in  a  market 
restricted  to  the  United  Kingdom.  A  movement  for  union  with 
the  United  States  was  the  result,  but  this  was  checked  in  1849 
by  the  repeal  of  the  Navigation  Laws,  and  in  1854  Lord  Elgin 
made  a  reciprocity  treaty  between  Canada  and  the  United  States. 
In  the  years  that  followed  progress  towards  democracy  was  made  ; 
the  clergy  reserves  were  transferred  to  the  municipalities  for 
educational  purposes,  and  the  seigneurial  system  abolished.  In 
1867  the  British  North  America  Act  established  the  dominion 
of  Canada,  which  included  Upper  and  Lower  Canada,  Nova 
Scotia  and  New  Brunswick.  In  1870  Canada  purchased  the 
North-West  Territory  from  the  Hudson's  Bay  Company  and  the 
Colony  on  the  Red  River  was  made  into  the  province  of  Manitoba. 
In  1871  British  Columbia  entered  the  Dominion.  In  1859 
Canada  had  made  the  final  assertion  of  independence  in  her  own 
affairs  by  adopting  a  protective  tariff,  in  spite  of  protest  from  the 
Colonial  Office.     In  1872  the  boundary  line  between  Canada  and 


102     ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

the  United  States,  which  in  1818  and  1846  had  been  fixed  by 
agreement,  was  finally  completed  after  arbitration  by  the  German 
Emperor. 

Thus  in  the  early  'seventies  the  greater  part  of  the  occupied 
territory  of  Canada  was  united  under  a  Dominion  Government ; 
she  had  established  a  protective  tariff,  and  it  was  by  no  means 
certain  that  her  eventual  destiny  did  not  lie  with  the  United 
States  rather  than  with  England.  But  British  Columbia  had 
stipulated,  when  she  joined  the  Dominion,  that  a  trans-continental 
railway  should  be  built  to  link  her  up  with  the  older  provinces. 
After  a  good  deal  of  dissension  and  delay  the  Canadian  Pacific 
Railway  Company  began  the  enterprise.  The  Government  gave 
it  a  subsidy  of  £5,000,000  and  25,000,000  acres  of  land,  together 
with  all  the  completed  bits  of  railways,  worth  at  least  another 
£5,000,000.  This,  however,  proved  insufficient,  and  more  help 
was  given  before  the  railway  was  finally  complete  in  1885.  This 
railway  was  one  of  the  determining  factors  in  sending  Canadian 
trade  east  and  west  instead  of  north  and  south. 

Meanwhile  unjust  treatment,  by  the  Government,  of  the  half- 
breeds  round  about  Manitoba  caused  another  and  the  last  rising 
in  Canada.  The  leader  was  the  old  rebel  hero,  Louis  Riel,  but 
it  was  suppressed  by  Canadian  volunteers  without  help  from  the 
British  Army.     Riel  was  captured  and  hanged. 

During  the  'eighties  there  had  been  much  talk  of  complete 
commercial  union  with  the  United  States,  but  the  majority 
became  increasingly  in  favour  of  uniting  more  firmly  with  the 
mother  country,  and  in  1897  the  Canadian  Government  gave  its 
first  preferential  tariff  to  England,  reducing  the  duties  on  British 
goods  to  12^  per  cent,  below  those  of  other  countries.  Later 
this  preference  was  raised  to  33^  per  cent.  The  more  far-seeing 
of  Canadian  statesmen  realised  that  linking  to  the  United  States 
would  eventually  mean  absorption  in  them,  while  a  bond  with 
England,  3,000  miles  or  so  away,  had  a  far  better  chance  of  com- 
bining mutual  defence  with  mutual  independence. 

Since  1900  the  growth  of  the  Dominion  has  been  rapid.  The 
great  wheat  areas  of  the  north-west  have  replaced  the  trackless 
prairie,  and  in  1905  two  new  provinces  were  added — Saskatchewan 
and  Alberta.  In  five  years,  1901-6,  the  population  of  the  prairie 
provinces  and  Manitoba  nearly  doubled,  i.e.,  it  rose  from  419,000 


IMPERIALISM  AND   SCRAMBLE   FOR  MARKETS     103 

to  808,000.  The  Government  set  about  providing  experimental 
farms  and  agricultural  colleges  ;  cheese  factories  and  creameries, 
and  other  forms  of  co-operative  farming  are  spreading  in  Ontario 
and  Quebec  ;  fruit-growing  is  extending  in  Ontario,  Nova  Scotia, 
and  British  Columbia.  Farmers  usually  own  their  farms,  which 
are  of  moderate  size,  50-200  acres.  On  the  prairies  the  average 
farm  is  240  acres.  One  of  the  chief  industries  of  the  Dominion 
is  the  lumber  trade,  for  the  forests  are  still  extensive,  though  they 
have  been  shamefully  wasted.  A  new  trade  in  wood  pulp  for 
paper  making  has  arisen,  and  saw  mills  have  increased,  so  that 
most  of  the  export  is  sawn  wood.  Half  the  lumber  export  goes 
to  the  United  States,  the  rest  to  Britain.  Coal  is  found  in  Nova 
Scotia  and  Vancouver,  iron  to  the  north  of  Lake  Superior,  gold 
in  Nova  Scotia,  British  Columbia  and  the  Yukon  ;  in  the  last 
the  discovery  is  as  recent  as  1897.  Silver,  nickel  and  most  other 
minerals  have  also  been  found,  and  some  petroleum  wells.  Fish 
and  furs  are  still  very  valuable  exports.  Canada  is  only  at  the 
beginning  of  its.  history,  though  it  is  the  oldest  of  the  great  white 
daughter  States.  In  some  ways  it  has  kept  more  closely  to  British 
precedents  than  the  others,  and  politically  has  advanced  no 
further.  For  our  more  original  offspring  we  must  go  further 
afield. 

Newfoundland  has  persisted  in  remaining  outside  the  Dominion ; 
it  exports  fish  and  their  products  such  as  oil,  as  well  as  iron  and 
wood  pulp.  In  1905  the  fisheries  provided  68  per  cent,  of  her 
exports.  Newfoundland  is  the  halfway  house  for  the  Anglo- 
American  cable. 

India, — The  story  of  our  adventure  in  India  is  a  long  one,  and 
is  the  most  remarkable  instance  of  the  unpremeditated  nature  of 
our  Empire.  It  began  in  1600  with  the  formation  of  the  East 
India  Company,  a  Regulated  Company  formed  to  trade  with 
India,  China,  and  the  islands  of  the  Pacific.  For  the  safety  of 
its  agents  it  secured  a  few  fortified  places  on  the  Indian  coast, 
the  earliest  being  Surat,  in  1609,  and  Madras,  in  1639.  Gradually 
it  ousted  the  Dutch,  who  in  turn  drove  the  English  out  of  the 
Malay  Archipelago,  and  for  over  100  years  shared  with  the  French 
and  the  Portuguese  the  lucrative  trade  of  the  East. 

The  first  step  towards  Empire  was  taken  by  the  French  by 
one  of  those  makers  of  Empire,  the  despair  or  the  glory  oi  their 


104     ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

compatriots,  according  to  their  point  of  view.  Joseph  Dupleix, 
Governor  of  the  French  Settlements,  dreamed  dreams  of  a  French 
Empire  in  the  East,  and  set  about  realising  them  by  intervening 
in  the  quarrels  of  the  native  chiefs.  It  was  a  good  time  for  his 
purpose,  for  the  death  of  Aurungzeb  in  1707  had  been  followed 
by  the  break-up  of  the  Mogul's  Empire,  the  rise  of  the  Mahratta 
chiefs  and  general  anarchy.  The  details  do  not  matter  ;  he  might 
have  won  but  for  two  things,  the  British  command  of  the  sea  and 
the  appearance  on  the  scene  of  his  own  English  counterpart, 
Robert  Clive.  The  tragic  story  of  England's  doings  in  India 
between  1750  and  1830  fortunately  has  not  to  be  told  here  ;  we 
need  merely  mark  the  results.  By  1805  the  East  India  Company 
controlled  on  behalf  of  the  English  Government,  directly  or 
indirectly,  all  India  south  and  east  of  a  line  from  Baroda  to  Delhi, 
except  Nepaul  and  Bhotan,  though  a  wedge  of  nominally  indepen- 
dent Mahratta  chiefs  occupied  the  basins  of  the  Nerbudda  and 
the  Mahanadi.  By  1835  we  were  already  considering  the  dangers 
of  a  hostile  Afghanistan  and  edging  into  Burmah. 

The  East  India  Company  had  not,  however,  been  left  in 
absolute  control  all  this  while,  for  the  English  Government 
was  more  than  a  little  doubtful  of  the  power  of  that  body  to  control 
the  imperialism  of  its  officials.  In  1773  Lord  North's  Regulating- 
Act,  while  it  left  the  Company  in  full  control  of  the  territories  it 
had  bought,  stolen  or  occupied,  asserted  the  full  dominion  of 
Parliament  over  all  British  subjects  and  appointed  a  Council  to 
exercise  some  control  over  the  Governor.  In  1784  Pitt's  India 
Act  limited  the  control  of  the  Company  and  forbad  further 
annexations,  declaring  that  "  to  pursue  schemes  of  conquest  and 
extension  of  dominion  are  measures  repugnant  to  the  wish,  the 
honour  and  policy  of  the  nation."  When  Lord  Wellesley  assumed 
the  Governorship  in  1798,  his  seven  years'  rule  was  one  long 
contradiction  of  the  order,  with  the  result  stated  above.  Mean- 
while the  trading  character  of  the  East  India  Company  had  been 
disappearing  ;  in  1813  the  only  Indian  monopoly  left  was  tea, 
and  in  1833  it  had  lost  that  of  the  China  trade.  At  the  same  date 
an  Act  deprived  it  of  all  trading  character  and  described  its  mem- 
bers as  "  Trustees  for  the  Crown  of  the  United  Kingdom." 

In  1839  came  the  first  Afghan  War  and  the  appearance  of  the 
Russian  bogey  ;   this  brought  about  the  annexations  of  Scind  in 


IMPERIALISM   AND   SCRAMBLE   FOR   MARKETS     105 

1839,  and  of  the  Punjab  in  1849.  The  career  of  Dalhousie, 
1848-56,  was  marked  by  considerable  extensions  of  our  rule, 
based  on  the  "  doctrine  of  lapse,"  by  which  he  claimed  for  British 
rule  certain  native  States  left  without  a  direct  heir,  denying  the 
Indian  custom  of  adoption.  Besides  States  thus  acquired,  he 
also  annexed  Lower  Burmah  and  Oudh,  for  reasons  whose 
adequacy  is  the  subject  of  debate.  In  1853  Disraeli  indicted  the 
Company's  government  as  productive  of  "  constant  wars,  con- 
stant deficits,  no  education,  few  public  works,  and  maladministra- 
tions of  justice."1  With  1857  came  the  Mutiny  and  the  end  of 
the  East  India  Company.  Since  1858  the  Government  of  India 
has  been  vested  in  a  Secretary  of  State,  assisted  by  a  Council. 
The  doctrine  of  lapse  was  repudiated,  and  later  extensions,  up 
to  1870,  were  small  and  chiefly  on  the  north-west  border  for 
defensive  purposes.  The  old  covenanted  service  of  the  East 
India  Company  developed  into  the  Government  bureaucracy, 
known  as  the  Indian  Civil  Service.  In  1833  an  Act  had  declared 
that  neither  race  nor  religion  should  debar  from  the  service,  and 
in  1853  nomination  had  been  abolished  and  replaced  by  com- 
petition open  to  all  British  subjects,  including  natives  of  India — in 
theory.  Since  1861  there  has  been  a  definite  restriction  in  the 
employment  of  natives,  and  in  practice  all  higher  posts  remained 
in  the  hands  of  Englishmen.  In  1908  only  107  posts  out  of 
1,370  carrying  a  salary  of  over  £800  were  occupied  by  Indians. 

After  1874  the  two  developments  in  India  that  call  for  attention 
are,  first,  the  wars  and  annexations  on  the  north-west  and  north- 
east, due  to  fear  of  other  European  powers  encroaching  on  our 
domain  ;  and,  secondly,  the  beginnings  of  a  machine  industrialism 
grafted  on  an  ancient  economy  of  village  industries. 

In  1878  there  was  a  war  with  Afghanistan,  the  real  object  of 
which  was  to  say  "  hands  off  "  to  Russia,  who  was  the  bogey  of 
the  last  twenty  years  of  the  nineteenth  century  as  Germany  of 
the  first  twenty  of  the  twentieth.  In  1885  we  annexed  Upper 
Burmah  to  keep  out  France.  In  1893  the  boundary  between 
British  India  and  Afghanistan  was  fixed,  and  in  1895  in  the 
Chitral,  and  in  1897  against  the  Afridis  we  spent  men  and  money 
to  make  the  border  tribes  respect  it.  Finally,  in  1907,  came  an 
Anglo-Russian  convention,  which  declared  Afghanistan   outside 

1  Page,  "  Commerce  and  Industry,"  p.  216. 


106       ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

the  Russian  sphere  of  influence,  and  recognised  a  British  interest 
in  South  Persia,  where  there  is  much  oil.  Meanwhile,  in  1896, 
Central  Siam  had  been  neutralised  to  prevent  a  clash  between 
us  and  the  French,  who  were  in  Cochin  China,  and  in  1904  we 
made  an  agreement  with  Tibet  and  China  that  no  foreign  power 
should  intervene  in  Tibet. 

While  thus  securing  its  frontiers  the  Government  of  India 
paid  some  attention  to  internal  development.  By  1905  there 
were  210  cotton  mills  in  India,  70  per  cent,  of  them  in  Bombay, 
while  thirty-nine  jute  mills  appeared  in  Calcutta.  Unfortunately, 
little  attention  was  paid  to  our  own  terrible  history  of  the  intro- 
duction of  machine  industry,  and  child  labour  and  long  hours 
characterise  the  new  movement  in  India  also.  There  have  also 
developed  in  India  breweries  and  railway  workshops,  while  tea- 
growing  has  increased  rapidly.  Fifty  years  ago  England  drank 
China  tea  ;  now  it  is  a  luxury  for  the  rich,  and  the  cheaper, 
rougher  teas  of  India  and  Ceylon  have  replaced  it.  Coal,  iron 
and  gold  are  the  chief  mineral  products,  while  petroleum  and 
rubies  come  from  Burmah.  The  result  of  all  this  is  seen  in  the 
seaborne  trade,  which  has  quadrupled  since  1858,  and  India  is 
second  on  the  lists  of  Great  Britain's  markets.  From  India  come 
raw  cotton,  raw  jute,  raw  hides  and  skins,  opium,  tobacco,  seeds 
and  grain  ;  its  imports  are  manufactured  goods,  principally 
cotton. 

Such  a  development  would  be  impossible  without  railways  ; 
there  were  in  1906  some  32,000  miles,  all  controlled  by  the 
Government.  With  canals  and  forests  they  yield  a  revenue  of 
£5,000,000.  The  railways  pay  on  the  average  5  per  cent,  on  the 
capital  outlay. 

India  has  always  been  a  land  liable  to  famine,  owing  to  the 
uncertainty  of  the  rainfall,  and  the  English  Government  has  so 
far  only  succeeded  in  partially  mitigating  it.  As  late  as  1896  a 
famine  cost  5,000,000  lives  above  the  normal  death  rate,  and 
lowered  the  birth  rate  by  2,000,000  ;  this  in  spite  of  £8,000,000 
sterling  spent  on  relief.  In  the  next  fifteen  years  famine  came 
three  times,  and  in  1900  cholera  followed.  The  chief  hope  of 
remedy  lies  in  irrigation,  and  a  considerable  length  of  irrigation 
canals  has  been  built  ;  but  the  country  is  so  vast — twenty  times 
the  size  of  Great  Britain — that  even  thousands  of  miles  of  channels 


IMPERIALISM   AND   SCRAMBLE   FOR  MARKETS     107 

only  deal  with  a  fractional  area.     The  forests  are  administered 
by  the  State  and  produce  a  large  revenue. 

On  the  assumption  that  development  of  its  material  resources 
is  a  good  thing  for  a  people,  considerable  praise  must  be  given  to 
the  work  of  Englishmen  in  India  ;  unfortunately,  there  is  little 
to  be  said  for  it  on  the  intellectual  side.  Small  effort  has  been 
made  to  provide  education  for  any  but  the  few  capable  of  its 
higher  branches  and  with  money  to  pay  for  it.  Seven  out  of 
eight  children  never  enter  a  school,  four  out  of  five  villages  possess 
no  school  to  be  entered  ;  90  per  cent,  of  the  men  and  99  per  cent, 
of  the  women  cannot  read  or  write.  It  has  seemed  better  to  the 
powers  that  be  to  guard  the  frontiers  than  to  train  the  mind. 

South  Africa. — The  Cape  was  first  discovered  in  1487,  and  in 
1652  the  Dutch  East  India  Trading  Company  had  put  a  trading 
station  there  on  the  route  to  India.     In  1657  a  few  free  settlers 
were  allowed.     Immediately  the  question  of  labour  came  to  the 
fore.     The    natives    were    either    Bushmen    or    Hottentots,    the 
former  being  the  earliest  known  inhabitants.     Both  were  in  the 
pastoral  stage,  agriculture  was  unknown,  and  there  was  no  military 
organisation.     Neither  could  be  induced  to  do  hard  work,  so 
the  Dutch  settlers  imported  negro  and  Malay  slaves.     In  1685 
there  was  an  influx  of  French  Protestant  refugees.     It  was  some 
time  before  the  colonists,  moving  east  and  north,  met  the  great 
Bantu  tribes,  Kaffirs,  Zulus,  etc.,  who,  unlike  the  Hottentots, 
declined  to  be  killed  off,  either  by  arms  or  disease.     The  Colony 
was  very  restless  and  not  very  prosperous,  but  in  1795  it  was 
captured  by  the  English  and  ceded  to  Britain  in  18 14-15.     At 
first  we  ruled  it  on  the  Dutch  system,  but  in  1834  it  became  a 
Crown  Colony.     The  freeing  of  the  slaves  in  that  year  caused 
great  discontent  among  the  Dutch  burghers,  and  in  1836  a  section 
of  them   determined   to   move   inland   beyond    British   control. 
They  particularly  objected  to  the  tolerance  of  natives  too  near 
their  frontier,  and  in  this  they  had  some  reason,  though  their 
own  treatment  of  the  black  man  was  such  as  to  make  him  more 
turbulent.     So  they  moved  north  into  the  lands  which  had  been 
depopulated  by  the  Zulus  and  formed  two  states,  the  Orange 
Free  State,  south  of  the  River  Vaal,  and  the  South  African  Republic 
north  of  it.     A  year  earlier,  in  1835,  settlers  in  Natal  had  asked  for 
recognition  by  the  Home  Government,  but  it  was  refused,  and 


108     ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

in  1840  they,  too,  formed  a  Republic.  However,  in  1844  Natal 
was  annexed,  and  in  1847  British  Kaffraria  was  formed.  In 
1850-53  came  the  "  Great  Native  Rebellion  "  of  Kaffirs  and 
Hottentots,  and  in  1853  Cape  Colony  was  given  representative 
government.  The  English  colonists  opposed  the  full  advance  to 
responsible  government,  fearing  the  Dutch  majority,  and  it  was 
not  till  1872  that  they  ventured  to  accept  it.  Meanwhile,  English 
policy  had  been  playing  fast  and  loose  with  the  burghers  of  the 
Great  Trek.  In  1848  England  annexed  the  Orange  Free  State, 
in  1852  she  recognised  the  Transvaal  as  independent,  and  in 
1854  abandoned  the  Orange  Free  State.  In  1856  Natal  was  made 
a  Colony  separate  from  the  Cape,  and  in  i860  the  racial  problems 
were  increased  by  the  introduction  there  of  Indian  coolies.  In 
1865  ostrich  farming  was  added  to  the  industries  of  the  Colony, 
and  in  1867  the  diamond  rush  began,  which  led  to  the  annexation 
of  Basutoland  and  Griqualand  West  in  1871.  Kimberley  dates 
from  1870.  Gold  had  been  known  for  some  years  to  exist  in 
various  districts,  but  the  Boers  had  made  prospecting  illegal, 
rightly  foreseeing  the  result  of  admitting  thousands  of  new  settlers 
to  their  primitive  pastoral  existence.  In  1868,  however,  the 
finances  of  their  Republic  were  so  bad  that  they  reversed  their 
policy,  and  during  the  'seventies  several  goldfields  were  opened 
up.  The  real  gold  era  did  not  begin  till  after  1880.  Copper, 
tin  and  coal  mines  were  also  worked  at  this  time,  but  the  main 
industries  were  agricultural  and  pastoral.  Horses,  cattle,  sheep, 
goats  and  ostriches  were  bred.  The  sheep  were  grown  mainly 
for  wool,  and  merinos  were  preferred. 

In  South  Africa  political  and  economical  history  are  inextricably 
mixed.  For  the  best  part  of  a  century  it  has  been  a  battlefield 
for  rival  races,  rival  moralities,  rival  views  of  what  constitutes 
the  good  in  life.  And  this  battle  has  gone  on  against  a  background 
of  native  races,  too  backward  yet  to  mix  happily  with  the  invaders, 
not  primitive  enough  nor  decadent  enough  to  vanish  in  the  clash 
with  the  bringers  of  a  more  complex  order.  Perhaps  we  may 
sum  up  the  situation  by  saying  that  in  South  Africa  the  seven- 
teenth and  the  nineteenth  centuries  fought  it  out,  in  the  presence 
of  an  overwhelming  audience  of  an  early  iron  age,  which  was  at 
the  same  time  a  constant  danger  to  both  the  warring  centuries. 

In  1874  the  recalcitrant  Dutch  burghers  seemed  to  have  effec- 


IMPERIALISM   AND    SCRAMBLE   FOR   MARKETS     109 

tually  established  their  independence  in  their  northern  wilds,  but 
all  was  not  well  with  them.  Financial  stress  had  already  forced 
them  to  admit  to  their  borders  the  gold-seeking  element  that 
could  only  be  a  danger  to  their  peaceful  pastoral  existence  ;  the 
nineteenth  century  was  encroaching  on  the  seventeenth.  In 
1877  a  fresh  danger  arose  ;  the  Transvaal  burghers  were  in 
danger  of  being  exterminated  by  the  Zulus,  and  Great  Britain 
stepped  in  and  annexed  the  Colony.  Two  years  later,  Cetewayo, 
the  Zulu  king,  was  overthrown  and  the  danger  at  an  end,  but 
Great  Britain  did  not  keep  some  of  her  promises  with  regard  to 
the  autonomy  of  the  Colony  and  the  Transvaal  Boers  revolted. 
They  defeated  the  British  troops  at  Majuba  Hill  in  1881,  and  the 
recognition  of  the  Transvaal  as  an  independent  Republic  under 
British  suzerainty  followed.  This  withdrawal  on  the  part  of 
Britain  came  on  the  eve  of  a  great  expansive  movement,  which 
culminated  in  a  general  scramble  for  the  whole  African  continent 
between  the  great  European  Powers.  Consequently  the  policy 
was  almost  certain  to  be  reversed  eventually,  and  the  certainty 
became  absolute  when  the  great  gold  reef  of  the  Witwatersrand 
was  opened  up  in  1884.  A  vast  influx  of  nineteenth-century  men 
followed,  and  rapidly  became  a  cancer  in  the  body  politic  of  the 
seventeenth-century  Boers.  On  its  side  the  nineteenth  century 
disputed  the  right  of  a  handful  of  farmers  to  keep  a  rich  territory 
to  themselves,  or  to  tax  and  repress  the  enlightened  energy  of 
modern  capital.  Cecil  Rhodes,  the  most  prominent  Englishman 
in  Cape  politics,  a  man  with  vast  visions  of  a  great  African  Empire 
for  England,  strove  on  the  one  hand  to  reconcile  Dutch  and 
English,  and  at  the  same  time  to  develop  a  purely  English  region 
to  the  north,  a  territory  now  called  Rhodesia.  His  difficulties 
were  increased  by  the  presence,  wherever  gold  or  diamonds 
appeared,  of  groups  of  international  capitalists,  to  whom  politics 
were  merely  a  useful  card  in  the  game  of  beggar-my-neighbour. 
South  Africa  was  rapidly  becoming  the  home  of  trusts.  By  1888 
the  De  Beers  Company  controlled  the  diamond  output,  which  was 
duly  regulated  in  the  interest  of  high  prices.  The  inevitable 
clash  between  the  capitalists  of  the  Rand  and  the  obstinacy  of 
Paul  Kruger,  the  President  of  the  Boer  Republic,  was  anticipated, 
and  for  a  time  postponed,  by  the  Jameson  Raid  of  1895,  but  four 
years  later  the  seventeenth  century  made  its  last  stand,  and  for 


no     ECONOMIC   DEVELOPMENT   OF  ENGLAND 

three  years  held  the  nineteenth  at  bay.  By  the  Peace  of  Vereeniging 
in  1902  the  war  ended,  in  the  admission  of  the  Boers  that  they 
could  not  indefinitely  fight  the  Empire,  and  on  the  other  part 
by  a  promise  of  early  and  complete  self-government.  This 
promise  was  fulfilled  in  1907  and  1908,  and  was  followed  in  1909 
by  the  Union  of  all  the  Colonies  of  South  Africa  south  of  the 
Limpopo.  Owing  largely  to  the  statesmanship  of  the  two  Boer 
generals,  Botha  and  Smuts,  the  Union  has  become  a  reality  and 
the  self-government  real.  The  Union  has  still  to  solve  the 
problem  of  the  black  natives,  for  here  the  whites  are  faced 
with  an  overwhelming  and  increasing  number  of  backward  but 
advancing  peoples  ;  that  is,  indeed,  the  problem  of  all  Africa. 

Meanwhile  the  produce  of  the  country  grows.  The  chief 
items  are  gold,  diamonds,  copper,  tin  and  coal,  horses,  cattle, 
sheep,  goats  and  ostriches.  There  is  a  large  wool  export,  and 
that  of  fruit  is  increasing ;  wine  has  been  made  and  exported 
since  early  days. 

Australia. — It  is  pleasant  to  turn  from  the  home  of  racial 
squabbles  and  established  trusts  to  the  two  most  purely  English 
of  our  Colonies,  where  a  democratic  franchise  has  produced 
results  at  times  startling  to  European  conservatism.  Australia 
and  New  Zealand  have  been  throughout  the  last  fifty  years  the 
scene  of  a  most  interesting  series  of  experiments  on  the  lines  of 
State  Socialism. 

At  first  sight  it  seems  remarkable  that  Australia  and  New  Zealand 
should  have  remained  so  long  outside  the  known  world  ;  the 
cause  lay  in  the  fact  that  all  the  fertile  coast  lands  of  the  former 
faced  east  and  south,  while  ships  travelling  from  the  Spanish  ports 
of  South  America  were  blown  north-west  to  the  Philippines  or 
New  Guinea  by  the  prevailing  winds  of  the  South  Pacific.  Torres, 
in  1595,  must  have  sighted  Australia  and  sailed  right  through  the 
strait,  but  he  did  not  land.  In  1606  a  Dutch  explorer  reported 
"  no  waterway  "  south  of  New  Guinea,  and  so,  although  his 
compatriots  did  actually  discover  patches  of  the  west  coast,  as  it 
appeared  barren  and  useless  they  took  no  further  trouble  beyond 
calling  it  New  Holland.  In  1636  Tasman  sailed  to  Mauritius, 
struck  south  till  he  reached  the  belt  of  west  winds,  and  then  sailed 
with  them  till  he  hit  up  against  Tasmania  and  then  New  Zealand, 
and  returned  home  to  Java  by  the  north  of  New  Guinea,  missing 


IMPERIALISM   AND   SCRAMBLE   FOR   MARKETS     in 

Australia  entirely.     At  this  date  all  geographers  believed  in  a 
great  southern  continent  stretching  across  the  Pacific,  and  Tasman 
thought  New  Zealand  was  an  outlying  part  of  this.     At  the  end 
of  the  seventeenth  century  Dampier  explored  the  west  coast  of 
Australia,  but  the  east  and  south  remained  hidden.     In   1768, 
after  the  Seven  Years'  War,  the  English  Government  decided  to 
send  some  of  its  out-of-work  naval  captains  exploring.     Among 
these  Lieutenant  JAMES  cook  took  a   party  of  astronomers  to 
Tahiti  to  observe  a  transit  of  Venus,  and  then  went  on  to  search 
for  the  great  south  continent.  Sailing  1 ,700  miles  south  from  Tahiti 
he  turned  west  and  eventually  met  the  east  coast  of  New  Zealand. 
He  sailed  round  it,  and  showed  it  to  be  two  big  islands,  was  blown 
north,  struck  the  south-east  corner  of  Australia,  followed  the 
coast  north  to  Cape  York,  found  he  had  got  to  New  Holland,  and 
promptly  annexed  the  whole  land  in  the  name  of  George  III. 
With   him  was   a   botanist,  Joseph   Banks,  who   conceived   the 
greatest  enthusiasm  for  the  new  land  and  strongly  urged  colonisa- 
tion.    When  the  question  of  providing  for  "  loyalist  "  emigrants 
from  the  revolted  American  Colonies  came  up,  it  was  proposed 
to  settle  them  on  land  in  Australia,  with  convicts  to  solve  the 
labour  problem.     There  was  the  usual  delay  and  muddle,  and 
in  the  end  the  "  loyalists  "went  elsewhere,1  and  only  the  convicts 
reached  the  new  land,  the  first  batch  being  sent  in   1787.     A 
settlement  was  made  at  Sydney,  and  for  twenty  years  the  twin 
problems  of  food  supply  and  discipline  were  faced  by  the  Governor. 
In  1797-98  Flinders  and  Bass  explored  the  south  and  east  coasts 
and  round  Tasmania,  and  after  1800  Tasmania  also  became  a 
penal  settlement.     In  1803  Flinders  circumnavigated  Australia. 

In  Australia  the  natives  gave  little  trouble.  Tribes,  possibly 
of  Indian  Dravidian  stock,  in  a  primitive  stage  of  hunting  life, 
were  sparsely  scattered  over  the  land.  Contact  with  white  races 
soon  diminished  them,  and  they  rapidly  decreased  in  number. 
The  black  fellows  of  Tasmania  were  of  even  more  primitive  stock, 
and  they  were  killed  off  by  the  white  convicts  like  pestilential 
animals.  For  themselves,  possibly,  their  fate  was  fortunate,  but 
the  loss  to  science,  in  the  extermination  of  a  people  less  developed 
than  any  now  extant,  was  considerable. 

Meanwhile,  in  New  South  Wales  free  settlers  were  arriving, 

1  Sec  p.  100. 


ii2     ECONOMIC   DEVELOPMENT   OF  ENGLAND 

and  in  1804  Macarthur  imported  some  merino  sheep  from  the 
Cape,  and  Australia's  staple  industry  was  founded.  From 
1 8 10-2 1  General  Lachlan  Macquarie  pursued  the  enlightened 
policy  of  encouraging  the  convicts  to  earn  their  freedom,  and,  to 
provide  them  with  lands,  he  opened  up  the  hinterland.  The 
period  1825-31  saw  the  great  explorations  of  Sturt  in  the  Murray- 
Darling  region  and  a  strong  struggle  against  an  unprogressive 
Governor  and  a  fight  for  political  liberties.  Some  sort  of  order 
was  produced  in  Tasmania  after  1 824,  though  it  was  order  without 
freedom,  and  attempts  in  1824  t0  colonise  West  Australia 
failed. 

From  1831-46  New  South  Wales  was  controlled  by  two  great 
Governors,  Richard  Bourke  and  George  Gipps  ;  between  them 
they  reformed  the  old  convict  settlements,  got  rid  of  transportation 
in  1840,  and  evolved  a  plan  of  "  assisted  emigration  "  to  get  out 
steady  settlers  and  young  women.  Meanwhile,  in  1834  South 
Australia  was  started  by  a  band  of  colonists,  but  some  bad  mistakes 
were  made  which  led  to  land  speculation,  and  the  early  years  were 
anarchic.  George  Grey  (1841-45)  brought  about  order,  and  from 
that  time  South  Australia  continued  quietly  prosperous.  It  was 
spared  the  problem  of  convict  settlers.  In  1836  Melbourne 
was  founded,  and  later  partially  controlled  from  Sydney.  Mean- 
while, a  new  problem  arose  in  New  South  Wales  ;  men  began 
to  move  out  of  the  settled  parts  and  occupied  large  areas  of  the 
interior  as  sheep  ranges.  They  were  known  as  "  squatters  "  and 
were  really  trespassers.  But  the  Government  did  not  dare  to 
interfere  much,  for  the  prosperity  of  the  Colony  was  largely 
dependent  on  the  wool  industry.  Bourke  went  so  far  as  to  charge 
j£io  for  a  licence  to  trespass,  and  by  1846  a  few  hundred  squatters 
were  spread  all  over  the  Murray- Darling  basin,  which  had  been 
surveyed  by  Sturt  and  Mitchell  a  few  years  before.  In  1842 
New  South  Wales  obtained  self-government  with  a  high  property 
qualification  for  the  franchise,  and  the  landed  interest  was  supreme. 
In  1846  the  colonists  successfully  resisted  an  attempt  by  Earl 
Grey  to  resume  transportation,  and  secured  for  themselves  and 
for  Tasmania  freedom  for  ever  from  this  imposition.  In  West 
Australia  alone  convict  settlements  remained  till  1868  ;  this  was 
at  the  colonists'  request,  the  labour  problem  seeming  at  the 
moment    otherwise    insoluble.     In   1851  four  separate  Colonies 


IMPERIALISM   AND   SCRAMBLE   FOR  MARKETS     113 

were  recognised  :    New  South  Wales,  Tasmania,  South  Australia 
and  Victoria. 

But  that  same  year  of  1851  saw  a  change  that  revolutionised 
the  Colonies.  Gold  was  discovered  on  the  Macquarie  River  in 
New  South  Wales,  and  then  at  Ballarat  and  Bendigo  in  Victoria. 
There  was  an  immediate  rush  from  the  towns,  and  labour  became 
scarce.  Next  year  crowds  followed  from  Europe  and  America. 
This  influx  changed  the  character  of  the  Australian  people, 
taking  the  power  from  the  hands  of  the  landowners  and  squatters 
at  the  very  time  that  constitutions  were  crystallising.  As  a  result 
they  became  much  more  democratic  than  anything  in  Europe, 
though  we  must  note  at  the  same  time  that  the  franchise  in  South 
Australia,  where  gold  was  not  found,  was  the  most  democratic 
of  all,  being  based  on  adult  male  suffrage.  In  1855  all  four 
States  gained  responsible  government.  In  1859  Queensland  was 
formed  into  a  State. 

The  story  of  Australian  exploration  is  not  less  great  than  that 
of  Africa.  In  1840  Eyre  had  crossed  from  Sydney  to  St.  Vincent 
Gulf,  while  Leichhardt  and  Mitchell  had  opened  up  parts  of 
Queensland  in  1843-44,  and  1845-46.  In  1848  Leichhardt  tried 
to  cross  the  continent  from  the  Darling  Downs  to  Perth  ;  his 
whole  party  disappeared  and  left  no  trace.  In  1855  Gregory 
discovered  the  Lake  District,  and  in  1862  Sturt  crossed  the 
continent  from  north  to  south,  which  Burke  and  Willis  had  done 
two  years  before  over  a  route  further  east. 

Railways  came  slowly  in  Australia,  and  in  1870  there  were 
not  laid  1 ,000  miles  ;  after  1875  there  was,  however,  rapid  progress. 
The  tendency  in  Australia  to  State  control  has  not  been  imposed 
from  without,  but  has  evolved  naturally  from  its  special  needs. 
A  scattered  population,  practically  of  one  race,  soon  realised  that 
its  chief  needs  were  such  as  demanded  big  capital,  and  that  such 
capital  could  only  come  from  the  combined  efforts  of  all  its 
inhabitants.  No  man,  no  group  of  men,  in  Australia  could  find 
the  money  to  provide  railways,  on  which  the  return  for  many 
years  must  lie  in  the  indirect  benefit  of  all  and  not  in  dividends 
to  shareholders.  Two  alternatives,  therefore,  presented  them- 
selves :  State  enterprise  or  the  domination  of  English  capitalists. 
The  former  did  not  terrify  them,  nor  were  they  convinced  of  its 
inevitable  failure,  for  from  the  earliest  beginnings  of  the  Colony 

E.D.E.  '• 


ii4     ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

men  had  had  to  turn  to  the  Government  to  tide  them  over  ever- 
recurring  difficulties  of  labour,  of  drought,  and  of  famine.  On 
the  other  hand,  America  was  already  showing  the  danger  of  large 
accumulations  of  capital  in  a  few  hands,  in  a  country  organised 
as  a  democracy.  On  the  whole,  the  Australian  judged  it  would 
be  easier  to  control  his  collective  self  than  a  few  swollen  members 
who  had  gathered  up  the  reins  of  power.  Australia  was  not 
troubled,  like  South  Africa,  with  a  racial  division  among  the 
voters,  nor  by  a  native  problem,  which  might  some  day  have  to 
be  solved  by  admitting  black  men  to  the  councils  of  the  white. 
If  ever  a  democracy  was  favourably  placed  for  engaging  in  State 
as  opposed  to  private  enterprise,  here  was  one. 

First,  of  course,  came  the  land  question,  the  progress  of  which 
we  have  followed  up  to  the  semi-legalisation  of  the  squatter's 
position.  After  1850  it  was  complicated  by  the  rapid  increase 
of  population  due  to  the  gold  rush,  and  the  demand  for  land 
became  constant.  At  first  the  policy  was  tried  of  giving  land  to 
any  one  who  would  fence  and  improve  it  and  live  on  it.  A  time 
of  violent  speculation  followed,  land  often  being  taken  merely 
with  a  view  to  forcing  the  squatter  to  buy  out  the  holder  and  so 
waste  his  capital.  The  land  did  not  get  occupied,  and  the  squatter 
had  less  money  for  using  it  as  pasture.  In  1885  an  attempt  was 
made  to  introduce  order,  and  in  New  South  Wales  all  squatters' 
runs  were  halved,  and  one-half  leased  to  them  for  a  term  of 
years  ;  the  rest  was  open  for  selection  by  agriculturists.  Victoria 
followed,  and  South  Australia  resumed  leased  land  at  six  months' 
notice  ;  other  Colonies  had  plenty  still  undistributed.  By  1891 
in  Australia  and  New  Zealand  altogether  about  125,000,000  acres 
had  been  alienated,  though  only  one-fifth  of  it  was  closely  settled. 
Of  late  the  tendency  everywhere  has  been  to  lease  land  rather  than 
to  give  or  sell  it,  usually  on  a  perpetual  quit  rent. 

In  1858  the  torrens  land  transfer  act  had  arranged 
for  a  register  of  all  lands  on  transfer,  and  thus  made  buying 
land  a  simple  and  easy  process,  not  a  complicated  and  ex- 
pensive puzzle  as  in  England.  By  1888  it  seemed  safe  to  give 
up  State  assistance  to  emigration,  except  in  Queensland  and  West 
Australia  ;  Victoria  had  ceased  subsidies  soon  after  the  gold  rush. 
Of  all  State  enterprises  the  most  important  were  the  railways  ; 
in  1906  some  15,000  miles  had  been  built,  for  which  £132,000,000 


IMPERIALISM   AND   SCRAMBLE   FOR   MARKETS     115 

had  been  borrowed  ;  this  was  nearly  three-fifths  of  the  public 
debt.  They  pay  their  way,  and  without  them  the  country  could 
not  have  been  developed.  In  1872  the  stupendous  achievement 
of  the  overland  telegraph  from  north  to  south  through  the  arid 
central  plains  linked  the  Colony  with  England  by  way  of  Java. 

The  land  and  its  communications  are  the  fundamental  matters 
in  every  State,  but  the  Australians  were  not  content,  having 
settled  there,  to  leave  economic  forces  to  work  themselves  out, 
either  to  success  or  disaster.  They  had  no  mind  to  see  reproduced 
unnecessarily,  in  a  new  uncrowded  land,  the  miseries  so  difficult 
to  cure  in  old-established  congested  Europe.  About  1896,  people 
became  aware  that  long  hours  and  sweated  labour  were  far  too 
common.  Trade  Union  action  had  secured  decent  conditions 
for  skilled  men  ;  women,  and  the  weaker  workers  generally,  had 
been  left  to  the  untrammelled  play  of  "  economic  forces." 
Australia  had  no  tradition  of  laisser-faire ,  quite  otherwise,  and 
each  State  in  turn  took  up  the  matter  and  dealt  with  it  drastically. 
Victoria,  in  1896,  by  its  Shops  and  Factories  Acts  established 
Wages  Boards  in  certain  industries  and  extended  them  in  1900. 
South  Australia  quickly  followed,  and  a  minimum  wage  now 
secures  the  workers  in  most  trades  throughout  the  Common- 
wealth. The  attempt  to  prevent  strikes  and  lock-outs  by  com- 
pulsory arbitration  was  an  experiment  initiated  in  the  early  part 
of  the  present  century.  As  one  would  expect,  there  is  free 
primary  education,  except  in  Tasmania,  and  no  State  help  for 
denominational  schools.  New  South  Wales  has  State  High 
Schools  ;  other  States  give  scholarships  to  private  schools.  There 
are  four  Universities. 

But  if  Australia  is  to  maintain  a  standard  of  decent  living  for 
all  her  citizens,  it  is  obvious  that  she  must  take  precautions  as  to 
whom  she  will  admit  among  them.  Hence  has  arisen  what  is 
the  most  fixed  determination  of  rich  and  poor  alike,  the  mainten- 
ance of  a  "  White  Australia."  Not  merely  will  she  keep  at  bay 
the  backward  dark  races  of  Polynesia,  or  even  the  Indian  coolie, 
either  of  whom  would  drag  down  by  his  low  standard  of  living 
the  welfare  of  her  workers  ;  she  is  even  more  fiercely  determined 
to  bar  her  doors  to  the  two  great  yellow  civilisations,  whose 
numbers,  once  admitted,  might  so  easily  dominate  her  own  less 
prolific,  and,  indeed,  less  industrious  race.     And,  looking  over 

11  j 


u6     ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

the  many  countries  of  the  world,  where  problems  arise  from  the 
mixing  of  widely  differing  races  and  cultures,  who  dare  say  she  is 
wrong  ?  Those  who  venture  to  criticise  point  out,  that  in  a  fertile 
area,  which,  including  New  Zealand,  is  five  times  the  size  of  France, 
there  are  less  than  six  million  inhabitants,  and  that  in  certain 
parts  of  it  field  labour  is  almost  impossible  to  white  men.  Will 
Japan  and  China,  the  former  now  ranking  as  a  first-class  military 
and  naval  Power,  indefinitely  put  up  with  the  assumption,  by  a 
comparative  handful  of  white  men,  of  the  right  to  reserve  to 
themselves  one  of  the  choice  spots  of  the  earth,  which  they  do 
not  even  effectually  occupy  ?  That  is  a  question  to  which  an 
answer  must  be  found  in  the  near  future.  The  weak  place  in 
the  Australian  defence  is  the  Northern  Territory,  a  fertile  stretch 
of  land  lying  close  to  the  Equator.  Its  cultivation  by  "  Kanaka  ': 
labour — indentured  men  from  the  Melanesian  islands — tried  for 
a  time,  has  been  stopped,  and  though  in  Queensland  the  use  of 
machinery  has  enabled  sugar  to  be  grown  with  white  labour,  it 
cannot  compete  with  that  of  Java  and  Fiji,  where  black  workers 
are  available,  and  it  only  retains  the  home  market  by  a  protective 
tariff. 

Scattered  as  are  the  five  great  Australian  States,  it  was  obvious 
that  sooner  or  later  some  sort  of  Federation  would  be  essential . 
It  was  suggested  by  Sir  Henry  Parkes  in  1889,  and  after  ten  years' 
controversy  the  five  States  came  to  an  agreement.  In  1901 
the  commonwealth  of  Australia  came  into  being.  The 
terms  of  the  federation  differ  from  those  of  Canada.  In 
the  latter  all  powers  not  definitely  reserved  to  the  provinces 
become  functions  of  the  Dominion  ;  Australia  followed  America, 
and  decreed  that  all  powers  not  definitely  handed  over  to  the 
central  Government  remained  with  the  federating  States.  Pro- 
vincialism is,  in  fact,  very  strong  in  Australia,  so  strong  that  even 
the  present  dominant  Labour  Party,  which  stands  to  gain  by  the 
change,  opposes  any  increase  in  the  central  control.  The  chief 
advantages  gained  by  the  Federation  are  : — 

(a)  Inter-colonial  trade  is  relieved  of  customs  tariffs. 

(b)  There  is  a  common  policy  for  railways,  irrigation,  land, 
and  the  treatment  of  natives. 

(c)  All  questions  of  foreign  labour  and  of  arranging  trade 
disputes  are  treated  alike  throughout  the  Commonwealth. 


IMPERIALISM   AND   SCRAMBLE   FOR  MARKETS     117 

(d)  There  is  one  High  Court  of  Justice  for  all  Australia. 

(e)  It  is  easier  and  cheaper  for  the  Federation  to  borrow  capital 
in  Europe  and  America  than  for  the  individual  States. 

The  staple  product  of  Australia  is  wool,  with  minerals,  especially 
gold,  a  good  second.  The  coastal  belt,  reaching  some  400  miles 
inland,  is  damp  enough  for  agriculture,  and  the  sheep  grown 
there  are  used  for  mutton  rather  than  wool  ;  but  the  "  back- 
blocks,"  stretching  away  to  the  desert  centre,  are  the  great  home 
of  the  merino  sheep.  The  Australian  climate  improves  wool, 
and  the  wool  of  the  merino  sheep  has  become  longer,  softer,  and 
more  elastic  since  its  introduction  and  the  weight  of  the  fleece 
increased.  Twelve  acres  of  land  are  needed  to  a  sheep,  and 
paddocks  may  be  forty  miles  round  the  fence.  Unfortunately, 
while  the  sheep  improved  the  land  did  not.  When  white  men 
first  came  to  Australia  the  rolling  plains  were  covered  with  grass, 
and  the  settlers  set  about  "  clearing  "  it  by  removing  the  low 
scrub  bushes.  But  Nature's  equilibrium  here  was  not  the  same 
as  in  the  damp,  cold  North,  and  when  the  bushes  went  there 
was  no  screen  to  the  winds,  and  rapidly  the  light  soil  blew  away, 
leaving  nothing  but  hard  red  clay  ;  much  of  the  grass  has  dis- 
appeared and  droughts  are  a  constant  enemy.  For  a  time  the 
early  squatters  tided  over  crises  by  borrowing,  one  good  season 
paying  the  debt  on  the  bad.  From  1891-1902  came  a  run  of 
bad  seasons  and  the  flocks  were  reduced  by  half.  English 
investors  drew  back,  banks  failed,  and  the  Colony  had  a  bad 
time.  After  1906  there  was  recovery,  and  science  was  brought 
to  bear  on  the  problem  ;  irrigation  by  artesian  wells  was  intro- 
duced, railways  pushed  forward,  and  the  rivers  provided  with 
locks  for  water  transit  and  water  storage.  One-third  of  the  wool 
of  the  world  is  produced  within  the  British  Empire  and  over  one- 
half  of  that  comes  from  Australia  and  New  Zealand. 

The  chief  gold-producing  areas  are  now  in  West  Australia, 
giving  more  than  double  the  quantity  from  Victoria.  The  grc.it 
boon  brought  to  Australia  by  its  goldfields  has  been  men.  Alluvial 
gold  mining,  unlike  the  reef-boring  of  the  Rand,  is  a  poor  man's 
job,  asking  little  capital,  and  any  news  of  such  gold  brings 
thousands  of  immigrants. 

Wheat  and  dairy  produce  supply  the  home  market,  and  since 
1890  there  has  been  a  surplus  to  export.     On  the  east  coast  the 


u8     ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

dairies  are  ousting  both  wheat  and  sugar-cane  fields.  The 
farmer  merely  produces  milk  ;  all  the  rest  is  done  in  factories, 
from  which  the  cheese  and  butter  are  loaded  into  the  freezing 
chambers  of  coastal  steamers,  and  from  these  again  to  the  big 
boats  at  Sydney.  All  the  produce  is  inspected  and  graded  by 
the  Government  before  export.  The  frozen  meat  trade  is  not 
so  great  in  Australia  as  in  New  Zealand,  and  really  disposes  only 
of  surplus  stock.  The  small  merino  sheep  is  not  so  popular  as 
mutton  as  are  the  large  cross-breds  of  New  Zealand,  and  the 
great  distances  from  the  interior  in  Australia  make  its  transport, 
whether  alive  or  dead,  difficult.  Up  to  1891  horse  breeding  was 
a  growing  industry,  but  since  then  has  been  stationary.  Queens- 
land, as  we  have  seen,  produces  sugar  ;  fruit  and  wine  and 
hard  woods  are  increasing  exports. 

The  external  trade  of  Australia  is  large  and  valuable  ;  estimated 
per  head  of  the  population,  it  amounted  in  19 14  to  £45.  The 
great  need  of  Australia  is  a  constant  supply  of  water,  and  there  is 
now  promise  of  its  attainment.  The  central  plain  has  far  below 
its  surface  a  layer  of  porous  rock  which,  on  the  edge  of  the  plateau, 
shows  an  outcrop  of  varying  breadth,  sometimes  seventy-five 
miles.  Much  of  the  river  water  that  flows  over  this  outcrop  is 
soaked  up,  and,  owing  to  a  tilting  of  the  layer,  it  pours  down  and 
back  westward  under  the  plateau.  Artesian  wells  of  sufficient 
depth  can  strike  this  water  almost  anywhere,  and  with  it  can  turn 
dry  sheep  runs  into  green  orchards  and  gardens,  and  water  great 
flocks  which  are  otherwise  at  the  mercy  of  the  rainfall.  As  man 
comes  to  understand  scientifically  the  way  to  manage  these  great 
areas,  Australia  should  increase  its  already  considerable  happiness 
and  prosperity. 

One  further  development  must  be  noted  ;  in  1907  Australia 
herself  took  a  step  on  the  Imperial  road,  and  is  now  responsible 
for  the  government  of  a  strip  of  territory  in  New  Guinea. 

New  Zealand. — There  were  settlers  in  New  Zealand  by  the 
beginning  of  the  nineteenth  century,  and  missionaries  arrived  in 
1 8 14.  The  native  Maoris  were  a  very  different  people  from  the 
Australian  black  fellows,  and  while  trickery  and  ill-treatment  by 
some  of  the  settlers  brought  fighting  and  resistance,  decent 
treatment  at  the  hands  of  others,  and  later  by  the  Government, 
brought  peace  and  good  feeling.     Almost  alone  among  lands  of 


IMPERIALISM   AND   SCRAMBLE   FOR   MARKETS     119 

the   British   Commonwealth,   New   Zealand   can  show  a   fairly 
contented  and  rapidly  civilising  native  population. 

A  British  resident  was  first  appointed  in  1833,  but  the  first 
party  of  any  size  arrived  in  1840,  sent  out  by  the  New  Zealand 
Land  Company.  They  began  badly  by  buying  from  Maori 
chiefs  for  trifling  trade  articles  land  which  the  chiefs  had  no 
power  to  sell.  Maori  tribal  organisation  held  land  in  common, 
and  it  belonged  to  the  tribe  and  not  to  the  chief.  But  the  Company 
claimed  to  have  bought  a  million  acres  of  land  for  an  expenditure 
of  less  than  £9,000.  At  the  same  moment  the  French  were 
planning  a  settlement,  and  it  was  evident  that  if  New  Zealand 
did  not  become  British  it  would  become  French.  So  in  1840  it 
was  annexed  and  a  treaty  made  with  the  Maoris,  called  the  Treaty 
of  Waitangi.  The  chiefs  were  promised  full  and  undisturbed 
possession  of  their  lands  collectively  and  individually,  the  Crown 
to  have  the  first  claim  on  any  lands  the  Maoris  might  wish  to 
sell.  Subsequent  troubles  were  due  to  breaches  of  the  treaty. 
The  New  Zealand  Land  Company  defied  the  treaty  and  set  about 
occupying  the  land  out  of  which  they  had  swindled  the  natives. 
England  sent  out  a  Commissioner  to  determine  the  quarrel,  but 
the  colonists  would  not  wait,  and  the  Maoris  burnt  the  surveyor's 
tents  and  resisted  the  trespass.  The  usual  atrocities  and  reprisals 
followed.  In  1845  Captain  George  Grey,  who  had  just  put 
South  Australia  on  its  feet,  was  sent  as  Governor.  He  reassured 
the  natives,  refused,  even  at  the  command  of  the  Colonial  Office, 
to  repudiate  the  treaty,  and  succeeded  in  controlling  both  colonists 
and  Maoris.  Meanwhile,  in  1848,  a  Scotch  Presbyterian  settle- 
ment, Otago,  was  made  in  the  South  Island,  and  in  1850  the 
Canterbury  district,  with  Christchurch  as  centre,  was  established 
by  Church  of  England  colonists.  From  these  settlements  grew 
the  wool  industry.  The  South  Island  was  happy  in  having  no 
native  problem.  In  1853  a  constitution  was  made  arranging  for 
both  central  and  provincial  Governments,  which  division  later 
produced  quarrels.  The  Maoris  were  not  excluded  from  the 
franchise,  but  few  of  them  had  the  necessary  property  qualifica- 
tion, so  that  practically  they  were  unrepresented,  though  they 
formed  a  majority  of  the  population  and  paid  half  the  taxes. 
The  same  year  Captain,  by  that  time  Sir  George,  Grey  went  to 
South  Africa,  and  under  succeeding  Governors  the  interests  >>t 


120     ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

the  Maoris  were  neglected.  Education  lapsed  and  native  magis- 
trates were  not  appointed,  while  the  worser  kind  of  colonists 
defied  the  law,  sold  the  natives  drink,  and  repudiated  their 
marriages  with  Maori  women.  The  result  was  a  deplorable 
series  of  wars  that  dragged  on  from  1859-70.  The  Maoris 
were  outnumbered  and  outgunned  by  the  Imperial  troops,  but 
their  fighting  was  heroic  and  their  tactics  difficult  to  counter. 
Sir  George  Grey  returned  in  1861,  but  the  breach  was  too  wide 
and  the  memory  of  past  misdeeds  on  both  sides  too  keen.  Mean- 
while, the  discovery  of  gold  in  1852,  1858  and  1861  produced  a 
rush  to  the  Colony,  and  the  population  doubled  in  three  years. 
In  1865  another  rich  field  was  discovered  and  individual  colonists 
flourished,  though  the  finances  of  the  Colony  were  drained  to 
the  uttermost  by  the  interminable  war.  In  1868  the  franchise 
was  altered,  and  the  Maoris  given  four  Members  of  their  own. 
Since  then  there  have  been  Maori  Members  of  the  Upper  House 
and  of  the  Executive  Council. 

In  1870  the  prospects  of  the  Colony  turned  the  corner.  The 
Maori  War  ended,  the  University  was  founded,  vote  by  ballot 
adopted,  a  Government  Insurance  Office  and  Registry  of  Land 
established,  and  in  1872  a  Public  Trustee  appointed. 

Even  more  than  Australia,  New  Zealand  has  moved  in  the 
path  of  State  Control.  In  1870  a  new  policy  of  public  works 
was  organised.  The  Colony  borrowed  £10,000,000  for  public 
works  and  assisted  emigration,  and  a  period  of  great  prosperity 
followed.  In  1877  a  uniform  system  of  education  for  the  whole 
Colony  was  established  free,  compulsory,  and  secular  ;  in  1879 
triennial  Parliaments  were  decreed  and  manhood  suffrage. 
Women's  suffrage  followed  in  1893,  and  the  abolition  of  plural 
voting  in  1896.  Members  of  both  Houses  are  paid.  New 
Zealand  passed  the  first  Compulsory  Arbitration  Act  in  1895, 
and  Old  Age  Pensions  were  granted  in  1898.  Already  in  1893 
Local  Option  in  the  matter  of  alcoholic  drinks  was  working,  and 
the  country  rapidly  moved  towards  total  prohibition.  There  is 
a  State  Bank.  New  Zealand  was  also  the  first  State  to  impose 
graduated  taxes  on  land  and  incomes.  The  same  tendency  as 
in  Australia  towards  leasing  rather  than  selling  State  land  is 
seen,  and  land  of  large  estates  has  been  bought  back  and  let  in 
smaller  parcels  at  a  5  per  cent,  quit  rent.     There  are  very  stringent 


IMPERIALISM   AND   SCRAMBLE   FOR  MARKETS     121 

Factory  Acts,  and  the  early  closing  of  shops  was  one  of  New 
Zealand's  pioneer  measures.  In  spite  of,  or  because  of,  all  this 
State  regulation,  the  trade  of  the  Colony  nearly  doubled  between 
1896  and  1906.  The  chief  exports  besides  wool  and  gold  are 
frozen  mutton  and  dairy  produce,  both  carefully  fostered  by  the 
Government,  which  provides  cold  storage  at  the  ports  ;  in  the 
early  years  this  was  free  of  charge. 

In  191 2  the  Government  established  a  standing  Commission 
for  industrial  investigation  and  then  nationalised  the  iron  industry. 
It  is  evident  that,  if  the  future  centre  of  the  world  is  to  be  the 
Pacific,  rather  than  the  Atlantic,  the  British-sprung  portion  of  it 
will  not  be  behind  the  others  in  enterprise  and  initiative. 

Other  Expansions. — Such  was  the  history  of  the  great  Colonies. 
Meanwhile,  we  did  not  neglect  to  acquire,  with  an  absent-minded 
air,  strategic  points  dotted  about  the  world.  In  1839  we  occupied 
Aden,  an  important  point  on  the  overland  route  to  India,  and  in 
1 84 1  Hong  Kong  was  ceded  by  the  Chinese  as  a  guaranteed 
base  from  which  we  might  import  the  opium  they  wished  to  keep 
out.  In  the  same  year  Sarawak  in  Borneo  came  under  the  control 
of  an  Englishman,  Rajah  Brooke.  In  1850  the  Danish  settle- 
ments on  the  Gold  Coast  passed  to  us,  to  be  followed  in  1861  by 
Lagos,  and  in  1872  by  the  Dutch  stations  in  West  Africa.  In 
1854  we  annexed  the  Kuria  Muria  Isles,  and  in  i860  Kowloon 
was  demanded  as  a  safeguard  to  Hong  Kong.  In  1874  the  Fiji 
Isles  were  occupied. 

The  debates  in  the  House  of  Commons  on  this  last  annexation 
illustrate  well  the  divergent  opinions  of  the  time  on  Imperial 
expansion.  The  situation  had  the  usual  complications  of  the 
misdeeds,  real  or  asserted,  of  lawless  British  subjects,  for  a  band 
of  adventurers  had  established  a  system  of  supplying  Polynesian 
labour  to  Australia  and  elsewhere  that  was  said  to  be  slavery  and 
to  be  maintained  by  kidnapping.  In  1873  these  men  had  estab- 
lished a  Government  of  some  kind  on  the  islands,  and  the  Glad- 
stone Ministry  had  determined  to  recognise  it.  The  natives  and 
the  other  white  folk  in  Fiji  asked  for  annexation  as  an  alternative, 
and  Australia  protested  strongly  against  the  recognition  of  a  band 
of  lawless  slave  traders,  for  such  they  maintained  was  their 
real  character.  The  Opposition  urged  that  Fiji  desired  annexa- 
tion, that  the  islands  would  form  a  much-needed  naval  station, 


122     ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

and  that  the  natives  would  obtain  British  justice  and  order,  instead 
of  being  exploited  by  British  adventurers.  Gladstone  replied  that 
the  evidence  of  slave  trading  was  not  conclusive,  and  the  men  were 
entitled  to  the  benefit  of  the  doubt,  that  by  freeing  our  trade  we  had 
made  the  acquisition  of  fresh  territory  unnecessary  for  our  com- 
merce, and  he  foresaw  with  dismay  increased  expenditure  on  the 
Colonies.  Another  speaker  doubted  whether  we  were  such  excel- 
lent governors  that  our  rule  abroad  must  be  extended.  In  1874, 
when  Disraeli  returned  to  power,  the  annexation  was  made. 

The  African  Scramble. — Up  to  about  1880  English  interests  in 
Africa  were  confined  to  the  south  and  a  few  places  on  the  west 
coast,  and  the  general  attitude  towards  this  vast  little-known 
continent  was  a  total  political  indifference,  tempered  by  philan- 
thropic and  commercial  interest  in  the  doings  of  missionaries  and 
explorers.  But  about  that  date  it  became  obvious  that,  however 
indifferent  English  politicians  might  be,  it  was  far  otherwise  with 
Continental  statesmen.  The  start  obtained  by  Britain  from  her 
priority  in  time  in  machine  production  and  steam  navigation 
was  about  to  be  challenged  by  two,  at  least,  of  the  other  European 
nations.  By  1884  English  traders  on  the  Lower  Niger,  where 
palm  oil  was  becoming  an  important  article  of  commerce,  found 
that  the  French,  penetrating  from  Algeria  in  the  north,  had 
established  themselves  securely  in  the  Upper  Niger  and  blocked 
the  way  to  expansion  inland.  In  1883  Germany,  seeking  her  share 
of  the  new  markets  for  tropical  produce,  claimed  control  of  a 
territory  east  of  the  Niger,  lying  along  the  River  Kameroon. 
Obviously,  some  working  agreement  was  necessary,  unless  the 
nations  were  prepared  to  fight  again  and  on  a  larger  scale  the  wars 
for  overseas  markets  of  the  eighteenth  century.  In  1885  a 
conference  was  held  at  Berlin,  at  the  suggestion  of  Portugal, 
when  various  matters  were  settled.  Great  Britain  was  later 
allowed  a  protectorate  over  the  Lower  Niger  area,  and  six  years 
later  the  British  territory  was  extended  inland  to  a  line  joining 
Say,  on  the  river,  to  Lake  Chad.  The  Conference  also  settled 
the  future  of  the  Congo  basin,  and  created  the  Congo  Free  State, 
a  territory  already  occupied  by  the  International  African  Associa- 
tion, of  which  Leopold,  King  of  the  Belgians,  was  chief  promoter. 
Agreements  were  come  to  as  to  trade  and  the  navigation  of  the 
rivers,  the  suppression  of  slavery,  and  the  definition  of  "  spheres 


IMPERIALISM   AND   SCRAMBLE   FOR  MARKETS     123 

of  influence."     There  was  to  be  freedom  of  trade  throughout  the 
Congo  basin  and  eastward  to  the  Zambesi  and  Mozambique. 

The  story  of  East  Africa  illustrates  the  rivalry  even  more  forcibly. 
The  great  lakes,  Tanganyika,  Albert,  and  Victoria,  had  already 
been  discovered,  when,  about  1870,  we  began  to  take  an  interest 
in  Zanzibar,  occupied  then  by  Arabs,  who  had  settled  there  from 
South-East  Arabia  some  three  centuries  before.  By  1879  there 
was  a  cable  from  Zanzibar  to  Aden,  but  when  in  1878  the  British 
India  Steam  Navigation  Company  tried  to  lease  1,100  miles  of 
coast  line  and  a  total  area  of  590,000  square  miles  from  the  Sultan 
of  Zanzibar,  the  British  Government  disallowed  it.  In  1885, 
however,  a  German  company  secured  a  large  part  of  the  area,  and 
were  backed  by  a  charter  from  the  Emperor  ;  the  English  Govern- 
ment became  alive  to  the  existence  of  a  new  rival,  and  in  1886 
the  two  European  nations  agreed  to  divide  the  whole  between 
them,  and  to  confine  the  Sultan  to  a  strip  of  coast  ten  miles  wide. 
In  1888  the  British  East  Africa  Company  was  chartered,  and  in 
1890  we  exchanged  Heligoland,  an  island  off  the  coast  of  Germany, 
for  the  right  to  extend  considerably  the  East  African  Protectorate, 
which  now  included  Zanzibar.  France  here  put  in  a  word,  but 
agreed  to  recognise  our  protectorate,  if  we,  in  return,  recognised 
hers  in  Madagascar.  Finally,  in  1891,  the  Sultan  of  Zanzibar 
leased,  and  later  sold,  the  last  bit  of  his  property  to  Italy.  By 
1895  the  British  East  Africa  Company  had  failed,  and  the  English 
Government  bought  up  their  rights  for  £250,000  ;  an  Arab 
revolt  was  suppressed  and  the  Protectorate  administered  as  a 
Crown  Colony. 

To  the  south  a  series  of  missionary  and  trading  ventures, 
followed  by  international  squabbles,  led  to  a  final  agreement 
between  England  and  Portugal  in  1891  concerning  the  territory 
round  Nyasa.  Free  navigation  of  the  Zambesi  and  the  Shire 
was  secured  and  "  spheres  of  influence  "  defined.  A  protectorate 
was  formed  over  the  Nyasaland  district  and  called  the  British 
Central  Africa  Protectorate,  and  the  rest  was  formed  into  North- 
East  and  North- West  Rhodesia. 

A  special  reference  is  necessary  to  Egypt,  usually  coloured  red 
on  English  maps,  to  answer  the  question  "  What  arc  we  doing 
there  ?  "  The  average  Englishman  is  even  more  ignorant  on 
the  point  than  Andrew  Lang  pretended  to  be  in  his  Letter  to 


124     ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

Herodotus.  "  But  what  they  did  there  (as  Egypt  neither  belongs 
to  Britain,  nor  Britain  to  Egypt)  I  know  not,  neither  could  they 
tell  me."  The  outline  of  the  story  is  this.  In  1875,  Ismail, 
Khedive  of  Egypt,  had  sold  his  shares  in  the  Suez  Canal  to  the 
British  Government ;  in  1876,  having  nothing  more  to  sell  and 
having  wrung  the  last  possible  farthing  out  of  his  unfortunate 
subjects  to  pay  for  his  extravagances,  he  fell  back  on  the  simple 
plan  of  repudiating  his  debts.  Thereupon  an  international  debt 
commission  was  formed  in  the  interest  of  the  creditors,  and  soon 
after  England  and  France  assumed  control  of  Egyptian  finance. 
In  1 881  Arabi  Pasha  became  chief  Egyptian  minister  and  set 
about  plans  to  remove  these  foreign  bailiffs,  who  held  up  the 
country  for  its  tyrant's  debts.  Neither  France  nor  England 
seemed  anxious  at  first  to  take  up  the  challenge,  but  in  1882  the 
English  Fleet  bombarded  Alexandria,  and  the  Khedive  dismissed 
Arabi,  who  led  an  armed  revolt  and  was  defeated  at  Tel-el-Kebir. 
The  creditors'  rights  thus  established,  it  was  natural  for  the  troops 
to  be  withdrawn,  but  England  decided  to  leave  10,000  "  as  a 
temporary  measure,"  the  dual  control  was  abolished,  and  England 
remained  supreme.  France  was  not  exactly  pleased  ;  after  all, 
it  was  the  genius  and  money  of  her  citizens  that  had  built  the 
Suez  Canal  ;  England  was  only  the  capitalist  absorber  of  other 
men's  work.  However,  England  had  her  way,  the  troops  stayed, 
the  debt  was  a  first  charge  on  the  taxes  paid  by  the  fellaheen,  and 
she,  and  she  alone,  was  in  1904  recognised  as  being  the  proper 
person  to  decide  the  time  of  her  own  withdrawal.  The  Egyptians 
have  long  thought  the  time  overdue  ;  the  English  Government 
still  thinks  otherwise.  To  some  extent  the  English  occupation 
has  been  mitigated  by  the  carrying  out  of  great  irrigation  works, 
both  in  the  Delta  and  at  Assouan,  where  the  great  dam  was 
completed  in  1902. 

Let  us  take  one  look  at  the  map  of  Africa .  What  do  we  find  ? 
Roughly,  we  may  say  that  France  and  Great  Britain  share  the 
largest  part  ;  this  was  the  case  in  1914,  and  since  the  War  it  is 
even  more  marked,  for  the  German  colonies  have  all  been  taken 
aWay.  If  we  include  Egypt,  though  we  have  no  right  to,  there  is  a 
solid  block  of  land  stretching  from  the  Mediterranean  to  the  Cape 
directly  governed  by  Great  Britain.  There  is  also  an  important 
area  in  the  west,  and  many  islands.     The  French  African  Empire 


IMPERIALISM   AND   SCRAMBLE   FOR   MARKETS     125 

covers  most  of  the  western  half  of  Africa,  north  of  the  Equator, 
and  stretches  from  Morocco,  Algiers  and  Tunis  across  the  Sahara 
to  the  Gulf  of  Guinea.  On  the  south-east  France  holds  Mada- 
gascar. The  rest  of  the  continent  is  divided  between  the  Portu- 
guese, the  Italians,  and  the  Belgians.  Only  two  independent 
bits  remain — the  negro  republic  of  Liberia  and  the  kingdom  of 
Abyssinia. 

Railways  have  been  such  an  important  factor  in  the  opening 
up  of  Africa  that  they  have  been  constructed  directly  by  the 
Government.  The  Bechuanaland  Railway  received  a  subsidy  in 
1893,  so  that  there  might  be  economy  in  administration  of  the 
territory  ;  the  West  African  railways  are  State-owned,  for  they 
are  essential  both  to  peaceful  trading  and  to  warlike  expeditions  ; 
the  railway  from  Cairo  up  the  Nile  was  strategic  in  origin,  but 
was  also  expected  to  open  up  the  Soudan  to  commerce.  The 
Uganda  Railway  was  State-constructed  by  direct  labour,  and  is  run 
at  a  profit. 

What  justification  can  we  white  races  offer  for  this  ruthless 
taking  possession  of  so  large  a  piece  of  the  world,  without  con- 
sideration of  the  wishes  of  the  present  occupiers  ?  It  would  be 
exceedingly  difficult  to  make  any  final  judgment  as  to  the  ethics 
of  this  newer  Imperialism.  One  or  two  points  are,  however, 
worth  discussion.  In  the  first  place,  all  the  nations  of  Europe 
have  combined  to  abolish  the  Arab  slave  trade.  Recent  converts 
themselves,  they  have  been  all  the  more  zealous  in  imposing 
their  new  faith  on  others,  and  it  is  something  to  the  positive  side 
of  the  account  that  a  great  authority  can  assure  us  that,  though 
slavery  exists  still  in  many  parts  of  Africa,  the  slave  trade  is 
almost  dead,  and  quite  dead  wherever  Europeans  are  in  real 
effective  control. 

As  to  our  right  to  force  ourselves  into  the  country  and  impose 
rules  and  conditions  on  the  inhabitants,  that  would  seem  to  vary 
with  the  district.  Obviously,  in  a  world  getting  rather  crowded 
and  with  a  fast-rising  standard  of  comfort,  it  is  no  use  claiming 
that  a  few  thousand  uncivilised  tribes  should  remain  undisturbed, 
scattered  over  a  large  area  full  of  things  useful  to  other  men,  but 
which  they  neither  use  nor  preserve.  Room  must  be  made  for 
the  men  who  can  employ  these  natural  gifts.  But  when  the 
invading  nations  take  to  exploiting  the  backward  people,  forcing 


126  ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

them  to  work  for  little  or  no  return,  tying  them  down  to  trade  only 
with  certain  monopolists  and  get  badly  swindled  in  the  process  ; 
when  they  force  on  them  their  civilised  poisons  and  infect  them 
with  their  civilised  diseases,  it  is  time  to  protest  on  behalf  of  the 
oppressed.  Lately  in  this  country  there  has  been  a  strong 
reaction  against  all  Imperialism,  and  cynical  gibes  are  often 
made  at  arrogant  talk  of  the  "  duty  "  of  the  white  races,  and 
especially  of  the  Anglo-Saxon  to  play  pedagogue  to  the  world. 
Much  of  this  derision  is  deserved,  for  commercialism  has  lurked 
but  thinly  veiled  beneath  the  crusade.  But  it  was  not  quite  all 
a  lie  ;  there  have  been  men  and  women  who  have  really  shouldered 
the  "  white  man's  burden,"  and  spent  their  all  of  health  and  life 
in  the  service  of  those  they  ruled  ;  there  have  been  moments 
when  nations  have  genuinely  risen  to  the  call  to  help  the  childish 
races  without  hope  of  reward  or  gain.  Unfortunately,  such 
people  and  such  moments  are  not  the  most  numerous,  and  the 
tendency  to  exploit  the  weak  and  the  fear  inherent  in  commercial 
rivalry  have  been  given  pride  of  place.  It  will  be  a  great  step 
forward  if  the  nations  can  agree  to  develop  the  resources  of 
tropical  Africa  on  some  mutual  plan  of  fair  division,  making  the 
welfare  of  the  native  races  a  first  consideration  in  every  move. 
There  is  this  to  the  credit  of  Great  Britain,  that  she  stands  for 
freedom  of  opportunity  for  all  alike,  and  that  some  of  her  aggres- 
sions have  been  forced  on  her  by  the  need  to  anticipate  a  rival 
power,  whose  occupation  would  mean  exclusion  of  others  and  a 
rigid  monopoly. 

Market  Rivalry. — The  same  competition  is  seen  in  other 
places  besides  Africa.  In  the  East,  France  still  challenges 
England,  there  is  the  keenest  rivalry  between  us  and  the  United 
States  in  South  America,  while  China  has  been  cursed  by  constant 
demands  on  behalf  of  competing  nations  to  be  allowed  to  exploit 
her  great  resources  and  the  marvellous  industry  of  her  people. 
For  fifty  years  Great  Britain  had  practically  monopolised  the 
Chinese  trade,  but  after  1897  Russia  in  the  north,  Germany  in 
the  Shantung  Peninsula,  France  in  the  south,  and  the  Japanese 
wherever  they  could  get,  forced  concession  after  concession  from 
a  people  that  only  asked  to  be  let  alone*.  As  each  nation  secured 
something  another  came  with  a  demand  for  an  equivalent.  Behind 
it  all  was  the  haunting  fear  that  the  time  would  come  when  the 


IMPERIALISM   AND    SCRAMBLE   FOR   MARKETS     127 

dominance  of  the  Pacific  Ocean  would  be  fought  for,  and  the  riches 
and  millions  of  China  might  play  a  decisive  part.  America 
found  herself  here  a  very  interested  party.  Lastly  came  what 
was  considered  a  fresh  menace  from  Germany  in  the  building 
of  the  Bagdad  Railway,  with  its  threatened  rivalry  of  our  Eastern 
seaborne  trade. 

Problems  of  Empire. — It  is  time  to  take  a  general  view  of  what 
such  extension  of  Empire  involves  in  economic  problems. 

(a)  The  need  for  linking  the  Empire  into  some  sort  of  unit 
was  becoming  obvious  during  the  later  years  of  the  nineteenth 
century.     It  would  seem  that  the  crying  need  was  for  its  general 
defence,  but  it  soon  appeared  that  colonial  sentiment  was  un- 
prepared for  the  central  control  implied  in  any  measures  for 
joint  action.     At  the  Imperial  Conference  of  1902  Canada  refused 
even  money  contributions  for  the  purpose,  and  both  Australia 
and  Canada  refused  to  set  up  an  Imperial  Reserve  Force  of  troops. 
Under  the  influence  of  Joseph  Chamberlain  the  move  towards 
unity  was  directed  into  the  channel  of  preferential  trade.     England 
in  1900  seemed  unalterably  fixed  in  its  policy  of  free  trade  and  a 
tariff  for  revenue  only.     The  Colonies  were  more  or  less  ready  to 
lower  their  customs  to  British  goods,  but  it  was  difficult  to  find  a 
way  in  which  some  exchange  favour  could  be  made,  since  no 
party  in  England  could  induce  the  poorer  class  to  risk  a  rise  in 
the  price  of  food,  whatever  counterbalancing  advantages  were 
offered.     Too  well  had  they  learnt  the  lesson  of  the  earlier  part 
of  the  century.     But  most  of  the  goods  supplied  by  our  Colonies 
were  either  food  or  raw  materials,  and  the  manufacturers  objected 
just  as  strongly  to  any  tax  on  raw  produce  as  the  workers  did  to 
one  on  food.     However,  in   1897,  England  terminated  all  her 
treaties  with  foreign  nations  that  prevented  her  giving  preference 
to  her  own    Colonies  on  such  customs  as  she  did  impose  (tea, 
sugar,  wines,  etc.),  though  it  risked  a  £77,000,000  trade  to  increase 
a  £24,000,000  one.     Canada  replied,  as  we  have  seen,  by  granting 
a  large   preference   on   English  goods,   South  Africa  and   New 
Zealand  followed  in  1903,  and  Australia  in  1908.     Besides  these, 
inter-colonial   preferences   have   been   established,  such   as   that 
between  Canada  and  British  Guiana  in  1912.     Canada  and  New- 
Zealand    extend   their    British    preferential    tariff   to    the    whole 
Empire,  and  South  Africa  has  special  treaties  with  other  Colonies. 


i28     ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

We  have  already  seen  how  the  construction  of  railways  has 
pushed  forward  the  boundaries  of  Empire  ;  indeed,  one  may 
say  that,  as  Rome  consolidated  her  Empire  with  roads,  Britain 
has  done  the  same  with  railways  and  steamships.  A  tramp 
steamer  taking  manufactures  to  the  Cape  ships  a  cargo  of  coal  at 
Natal  for  India,  where  it  may  load  up  with  raw  material  and  so 
home  by  Suez.  Such  a  route  cuts  down  freights  by  eliminating 
the  difficulties  of  finding  a  return  cargo  and  the  possibility  of 
having  to  charge  freight  on  the  outward-bound  cargo  to  cover  the 
cost  of  return  with  empty  holds.  Indeed,  lower  freights  do  more 
to  build  up  trade  than  any  tariff  concessions  possible.  A  subsidy 
of  £40,000  a  year  to  a  line  of  steamers  has  almost  restored  pros- 
perity to  the  West  Indies,  by  creating  a  great  fruit  market  to 
replace  or  supplement  their  dwindling  sugar  industry.  Sub- 
sidised mail  services,  both  from  Britain  outwards  and  inter- 
colonial, make  possible  speedy  and  accurate  delivery  of  goods, 
and  "  all  British  "  cables,  made  with  an  eye  on  war,  tend  to  turn 
the  line  of  commerce  to  our  colonies  rather  than  elsewhere.     In 

1898  was  established  the  imperial  penny  post.  In  1900 
the  colonial  stock  act,  which  placed  such  stock  on  the 
list  allowable  for  trust  funds,  lowered  the  rate  of  interest 
at  which  colonial  Governments  could  borrow,  and  saved  the 
Colonies  and  India  some  £10,000,000  a  year,  in  itself  a  handsome 
preference.  In  1899  the  Commercial  Intelligence  Branch  of  the 
Board  of  Trade  was  opened,  and  in  1908  four  special  Trade 
Commissioners  for  the  Colonies  were  established,  with  twenty- 
three  local  correspondents.  In  191 3  the  Imperial  Bureau  of 
Entomology  was  founded  to  deal  with  insect  pests  throughout 
the  Empire,  and  the  Dominions  contribute  to  its  cost.     Since 

1899  there  have  been  Schools  of  Tropical  Medicine  in  London 
and  Liverpool,  and  permanent  research  laboratories  have  been 
established  in  many  outlying  parts  of  the  Empire.  The  progress 
towards  making  the  tropics  possible  for  white  men  has  been 
considerable. 

The  result  of  all  these  links  has  been  to  turn  the  stream  of  British 
emigration  towards  our  own  Colonies.  Between  1891  and  1900 
28  per  cent,  of  the  total  migration  went  there,  by  1913  the 
proportion  had  risen  to  78  per  cent. 

(b)  The    second    great    problem    that    confronts    the    British 


IMPERIALISM   AND    SCRAMBLE  FOR   MARKETS    129 

Commonwealth  is  the  labour  question.  We  have  discussed  the 
effect  on  labour  questions  of  the  determination  to  have  a  "  white 
Australia."  In  South  Africa  the  question  presents  equally 
serious,  though  quite  different  difficulties.  After  the  South 
African  War  it  was  found  very  difficult  to  secure  enough  black 
men  to  work  the  Rand  mines.  The  African  Kaffir  naturally 
preferred  to  work  only  so  long  and  so  hard  as  would  supply  his 
primitive  needs,  he  saw  no  reason  to  increase  his  wants  at  the 
price  of  increasing  his  work.  His  position  was  not  illogical,  and 
he  had  the  right  to  choose.  As  to  white  labour  in  the  mines, 
there  was  not  enough  available  of  that  either,  and  if  there  had 
been  the  owners  of  the  mines  did  not  intend  to  diminish  their 
dividends  by  paying  white  men's  wages.  So,  for  a  time, 
indentured  Chinese  labour  was  tried.  There  is  not  much  to 
be  said  for  indentured  labour  at  any  time,  there  is  nothing  in  its 
favour  if  the  indentured  labourer  does  not  become  a  colonist, 
and  this  the  Chinaman  was  not  allowed  to  be.  At  the  end  of  his 
term  he  was  shipped  home  again.  After  some  years  of  trial, 
the  plan  was  given  up.  The  same  fate  met  the  attempt  to  intro- 
duce Melanesians  into  Australia. 

The  question  of  Indian  immigration  to  our  Colonies  is  more 
complicated.  In  the  first  place,  the  immigrants  are  not  all 
unskilled  labourers  ;  artisans,  traders  and  men  of  education 
often  seek  a  permanent  home  less  crowded  than  their  native  one. 
There  are  large  Indian  populations  in  Natal  and  in  British  East 
Africa,  and  in  both  places  its  members  are  bitterly  discontented 
with  their  position.  They  urge,  and  with  justification,  that  as 
they  are  members  of  the  British  Commonwealth  there  should  be 
no  discrimination  against  them,  and  that  they  should  not  be 
stigmatised  by  special  regulations,  limiting  their  freedom  of 
movement  and  occupation  of  land.  In  East  Africa  the  handful 
of  white  settlers  object  to  Indian  immigrants,  who  outnumber 
them  by  two  to  one,  having  any  share  in  government,  and  they 
rigidly  exclude  them  from  all  the  high-lying  land  of  the  colony. 

The  problem  of  Japanese  immigration  is  even  more  difficult  ; 
for  while  it  is  fairly  safe,  for  a  time,  to  bully  China  and  ignore 
the  grievances  of  our  own  subjects,  the  Japanese  claims  equality 
with  the  white  man,  and  has  proved  it  in  the  white  man's  special 
field — machine  industry  and  modern  armament.     For  the  moment 

E.D.li.  ' 


130     ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

Japan  refrains  from  challenging  a  white  Australia,  and  has  met 
British  Columbia  by  an  agreement  by  which,  without  foregoing 
her  claim  for  an  open  door  for  her  people,  she  promises  to  restrict 
their  numbers  and  allow  no  indentured  labourers  to  come  unless 
the  Government  of  British  Columbia  asks  for  them.  One  of  the 
most  pressing  of  the  world's  problems  is  to  find  an  outlet  for 
Japanese  emigration  and  enterprise,  where  her  industrious 
workers  will  not  pull  down  by  competition  the  standard  of  life 
of  men  who  cannot  live,  as  they  can,  on  a  little  rice. 

(c)  In  considering  the  economic  unity  of  the  Empire  we  have 
to  face  the  fact  that  at  present  it  cannot  be  said  to  be  self-sufficing. 
It  may  eventually  become  so,  but. as  things  are, much  of  the  food 
required  by  our  home  45  millions  is  drawn  from  outside  the 
Empire.  Also  of  our  total  trade  in  1913  only  26-2  per  cent,  was 
with  other  parts  of  the  British  Commonwealth.  The  salient  fact 
about  us  still  is  that,  more  than  any  other  nation,  world  peace  and 
world  prosperity  is  essential  to  us.  The  welfare  of  Germany  or 
Russia  or  South  America  is  as  essential  to  our  trade  as  that  of 
Australia  or  Canada.  Ours  is  a  world  market,  and,  if  Germany 
is  too  poor  to  buy  Brazilian  coffee,  Brazil  becomes  too  poor  to  buy 
our  Manchester  goods,  and  we  may  thereby  become  too  poor  to 
buy  Australian  mutton  or  butter.  It  is  probably  beyond  human 
power  now  to  weld  our  far-flung  people  into  an  economic  whole, 
defying  the  world  in  splendid  isolation,  even  were  the  dream  a 
pleasant  one. 

(d)  On  the  other  hand,  the  range  of  products  of  the  Empire 
is  very  striking  ;  there  is  very  little  that  cannot  be  obtained  at 
all  within  its  borders,  while  nickel,  asbestos,  jute,  mica,  palm-oil, 
palm-kernels  and  plantation-rubber  are  hardly  obtained  outside. 
Within  our  borders  are  found  45  per  cent,  of  the  world's  supply 
of  wool  and  60  per  cent,  of  its  gold.  It  is  one  of  the  problems  of 
government  what  measures,  if  any,  shall  be  taken  to  increase  the 
quantity  of  things  we  do  produce,  or  to  add  others  to  the  list. 
One  of  these  centres  round  raw  cotton,  of  which  there  is  a  growing 
world  shortage.  As  we  have  seen,  the  United  States  is  using  an 
increasing  proportion  of  its  own  supply,  and  at  the  same  time  the 
cotton  boll- worm  is  extending  its  havoc  among  the  crops.  The 
Uganda  Railway  was  largely  built  to  encourage  cotton-growing 
in  the  Soudan,  and  a  subsidy  of  £10,000  a  year  was  granted 


IMPERIALISM   AND    SCRAMBLE   FOR  MARKETS    131 

in  1910  to  the  British  Cotton  Growing  Association  for 
experiment.  Nigeria  is  said  to  be  a  very  promising  area  for  this 
development.  In  Egypt  measures  were  taken  to  supply  good  seed 
and  to  fight  the  boll-worm,  another  partial  justification  for  our 
illegitimate  presence  in  that  country. 

In  India  much  scientific  investigation  is  being  applied  to 
agriculture,  especially  of  tobacco,  wheat,  indigo,  fruit,  sugar,  jute 
and  silk.  Lastly,  the  Government  has  helped,  though  in  some- 
what niggardly  fashion,  the  wonderful  war  waged  by  men  of 
science  against  disease,  with  the  result  that  we  now  know  how  to 
prevent  yellow  fever  and  malaria,  if  we  will  go  to  the  trouble  and 
expense. 


i  2. 


Total  Value  of  our  Exports  and  Imports  with  Nine    Chief   Countries 
£  (in  Millions). 


200 

1 



n 
11 

ll 

180 

;; 

160 

/ 

? 

i  ■ 

140 

'l 

ll 

II 

120 

II 
II 

// 

// 
// 

f 

/ 

/ 

j 

IOC 

li 
/' 
II 

59 

••• 

if 

II 
II 
II 

/ 

• 
i 

80 

j 

II 
ll 
II 

r 

/   * 

$ 

^ 

"S 

p 

6 

II 

f> 

^^y 

s 
..•• 

2 

''* 

0 
• 

i 

CO 

li 
ii 
ii 

/, 

v 

„«•• 

..— 

,.»•• 

«? 

••>** 

< 

e 

0 

/ 

40 

H 

y>' 

..• 

,."•' 

^— — 

----- 

'2- 

m'*/* 

V'1 

/ 

-^ 

lf-ff!i' 

^'"U 

•» 

4^* 

o 
a 

3 

20 

/      J 

<?. 

^ 

*>- 

-<r  *"*  *** 

'*****, 

>•• 

no 

-a* 

a^ 

So'^ 

;  OoOflC 

0  oo<JA«- 

«»' 

n 

■st- 

* 

i. 

1055     W60 


Ifa/'O 


1890 


1890 


1900 


I9IQ 


U.S.A.  a--  =  s 

India,  Ceylon  and  Straits  Settlements  — 

Germany 

France  

South  America :  East  Coast  only  0  •  0  ■  a 
Australia  and  New  Zealand  -  =  =  =  =« 

Holland 

Belgium  —  —  -  -  - 
Russia  x  x  x  x  x 


CHAPTER   VII 

COMMUNICATIONS  AND   THE  MOVEMENT  OF  TRADE. 
BANKING  AND  EXCHANGE 

Railways. — English  railways  date  from  the  'thirties  ;  the  time 
of  their  rapid  extension  was  the  'forties.  The  early  days  were 
days  of  chaos,  for  Parliament,  in  its  zeal  to  prevent  a  monopoly, 
encouraged  the  establishment  of  innumerable  small  companies, 
whose  average  mileage  was  fifteen  !  It  soon  became  evident  that 
such  lack  of  system  was  not  only  wasteful,  but  impossible,  and 
amalgamations  rapidly  took  place,  until  by  1874  there  had  crystal- 
lised out  the  dozen  or  so  great  companies  familiar  to  all  of  us 
before  the  recent  further  combinations.  Up  to  1874  there  had 
been  a  very  determined  opposition  by  Parliament  to  all  attempts 
of  the  Government  to  control  in  any  way  the  private  enterprise 
of  these  holders  of  vital  links  in  the  nation's  life,  for  the  theory 
of  laisser-faire  was  almost  universally  accepted.  The  chief 
interest  of  the  next  forty  years  lies  in  the  gradual  abandonment 
of  this  principle,  as  far  as  railways  were  concerned,  so  much  so 
that  by  1914  nationalisation  seemed  the  inevitable  next  step. 

In  1873  a  public  body  called  the  Railway  and  Canal  Com- 
mission had  been  appointed  to  supervise  the  companies'  doings, 
especially  in  matters  of  amalgamations  or  working  agreements, 
to  adjudicate  whenever  railways  proposed  to  buy  up  canals,  and 
to  decide  disputes  between  lines.  It  had  not  enough  power  to  be 
really  effective,  and  the  railway  companies  ignored  its  orders  with 
impunity.  There  were  continual  complaints  as  to  the  excess  of 
the  charges  made  and  of  the  chaos  in  which  all  railway  law  was 
lost,  for  up  to  1888  railway  rates  were  controlled  by  900  different 
Acts  of  Parliament.  In  that  year  the  railway  and  canal 
traffic  ACT  was  passed,  by  which  all  companies  were  com- 
pelled to  submit  within  six  months  to  the  Board  of  Trade  a  schedule 
of  their  charges,  and  after  exhaustive  examination  several  Acts 
were   passed  securing  certain   maximum   rates,   that  came    into 

133 


134     ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

force  in  1893.  Some  of  these  maxima  were  lower  than  the  rates 
the  railways  had  been  charging,  some  were  higher.  To  recoup 
themselves  for  loss  on  the  former,  some  companies  raised  those 
not  already  at  the  maximum.  The  consequent  outcry  caused 
the  passing  of  another  railway  and  canal  traffic  act 
in  1894,  which  forbad  the  railways  ever  to  raise  rates  once 
in  use.  The  result  is  that  the  railways  can  reduce  rates  but  not 
raise  them.  In  1913  a  fresh  railway  and  canal  traffic 
act  allowed  rates  to  be  raised  above  the  1892  level  in  con- 
sideration of  the  great  improvements  made  in  the  service. 
These  Acts  had  the  effect  of  stabilising  rates  at  a  fixed  point,  for 
experimental  lowering  was  in  practice  abandoned  on  account  of 
the  difficulty  of  raising  the  rates  again,  should  the  experiment 
turn  out  a  loss.  Competition  in  rates  between  the  companies 
ceased,  and  their  rivalry  was  turned  to  giving  better  conveniences 
and  facilities.  Those  who  remember  travelling  in  the  'eighties 
will  not  regret  this  result. 

Since  1894  the  movement  has  been  towards  amalgamation,  for 
expenses  increased  and  rates  could  not.  As  we  have  seen, 
combinations  among  the  workmen  promised  to  force  the  companies 
to  remedy  the  scandal  of  long  hours  and  insufficient  wages,  and 
competition  was  forcing  up  the  speed  and  comfort,  and  consequent 
expense,  of  all  services.  Dividends  shrank,  and  the  only  cure 
lay  in  more  economical  working.  In  1899  the  South  Eastern 
and  the  Chatham  joined  up,  and  in  1909  it  was  proposed,  pre- 
maturely, to  combine  the  Great  Northern,  the  Great  Eastern,  and 
the  Great  Central.  Such  combinations  eliminated  all  competition, 
and  the  question  arose  whether,  in  that  case,  private  enterprise 
could  be  entrusted  with  so  essential  a  life  line  of  the  body  politic. 
The  attitude  of  the  directors  towards  the  new  demands  of  labour 
endangered  the  whole  nation,  and  the  movement  for  nationalisation 
grew.  Defects,  such  as  the  600,000  private  trucks,  that  wander 
half  their  time  empty  seeking  their  owners,  when,  if  they  belonged 
to  the  company,  they  could  take  a  return  load  ;  loss  of  life  which 
might  be  prevented  by  extra  outlay  of  capital,  such  as  the  burning 
of  victims  in  the  smash  of  a  train  lit  by  gas  instead  of  electricity — 
these  things  all  tended  to  make  the  railway  shareholder  unpopular, 
and  to  convert  many,  who  were  not  Socialists,  to  the  idea  of 
running  railways  at  least  "  for  service  and  not  for  profit."     In 


TRADE— BANKING  AND  EXCHANGE  135 

Germany,  France,  Russia,  Switzerland  and  other  European 
countries  the  railways  were  wholly  or  partly  owned  and  worked 
by  the  State,  and  they  were  often  superior  to  our  own. 

The  condition  in  England  in  1914  is  thus  summed  up  by  a 
recent  writer  :  "  The  situation  in  19 14  was  that  the  railway  workers 
were  demanding  the  reconsideration  of  the  arrangements  of  191 1, 
that  individual  citizens  felt  that  they  were  '  the  helpless  subjects  of 
huge  monopolistic  organisations.'  The  impasse  was  that  no  effec- 
tive system  of  control  had  been  devised  ;  that  amalgamations  had 
taken  place  to  such  an  extent  that  competition  could  not  be  trusted 
to  provide  adequate  safeguards,  and  that  the  railways  could  not 
continue  as  they  were  with  a  growing  wage  bill  and  further  demands 
for  reduction  of  hours,  which  was  creating  an  impossible  financial 
situation."  1  The  railway  dividend  was  round  about  4  per  cent.  ; 
about  a  quarter  of  the  capital  paid  over  5  per  cent,  and  another 
quarter  less  than  2  per  cent. 

Tramways  and  Road  Traffic. — Though  the  first  tramway  (in 
the  modern  sense)  was  laid  in  Birkenhead  at  the  end  of  the  'fifties, 
it  was  not  till  after  1870  that  they  became  general.  From  the 
first  some  had  been  owned  by  the  Municipalities,  and  most 
Tramway  Acts  allowed  for  their  purchase  by  Town  Councils  at 
the  end  of  a  term  of  years.  This  was  due  to  public  dissatisfaction 
with  the  use  which  private  gas  and  water  companies  had  made  of 
their  monopoly.  In  1891  Huddersfield  got  Parliamentary  per- 
mission not  only  to  own,  but  to  manage  its  tramways,  and  after 
1892  public  management  as  well  as  public  ownership  became 
common.  The  first  electric  tram  system  was  built  in  Kansas 
City  in  1884  ;  Leeds  was  the  first  English  city  to  adopt  it,  in  1891. 
The  early  systems  had  overhead  wires  ;  underground  conduit 
and  surface-contact  systems  came  later.  By  1910  there  were 
176  tramway  undertakings  owned  by  Local  Authorities  and  124 
private  ones.  Two-thirds  of  the  total  mileage  belonged  to  the 
municipalities. 

In  1885  a  "  safety  bicycle  "  was  invented,  and  the  consequent 
change  in  the  habits  of  the  people  was  revolutionary.  Road 
traffic  without  horses  is  not  quite  a  modern  invention.  From 
1827-35  various  steam  carriages  were  invented  for  road  travel, 

1  L.   C.  A.   Knowlcs,   "  Industrial   and   Commercial   Revolutions  in   I 
Britain,"  p.  290. 


136  ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

some  of  which  attained  a  speed  of  20  m.p.h.     They  met  the  most 

furious   opposition.     For   five   years    Sir   Goldsworthy   Gurney 

worked,  and  spent  £30,000,  to  introduce  steam  road  carriages. 

Baffled  by  the  turnpike  trusts,  he  succeeded  in  getting  a  Select 

Committee  of  the  House  of  Commons  appointed  in  1834,  which 

reported  favourably,  but  the  Bill  authorising  his  carriages,  which 

passed  the  Commons,  was  thrown  out  by  the  Lords,  and  at  that 

Gurney  gave  it  up.     Traction  engines  were  produced,  however, 

and  increased,  but  in  1861  they  were  forced  by  Act  of  Parliament 

to  carry  two  men  and  limit  their  speed  to  10  m.p.h.  ;    in  1865 

this  was  cut  down  to  four  miles  and  a  man  had  to  walk  in  front 

with  a  red  flag.     This  was  the  legal  position  to  be  faced  when, 

after  1895,  Continental  engineers  evolved  a  motor  vehicle  for  road 

work.     In  1896  light  motor  vehicles  under  3  tons  in  weight  were 

freed  from  the  1885  restrictions  and  might  run  up  to  12  m.p.h*. 

This  made  a  place  for  pleasure  cars,  but  not  for  the  heavier 

trade  vehicles.     In  1903  and  1904  the  weight  allowed  was  increased 

to  6|  tons  and  the  speed  to  20  m.p.h.     By  191  o  there  were  124,860 

registered  motor  cars  and  86,414  motor  cycles,  and  in  that  year 

a  Road  Board  was  appointed. 

The  effect  on  trade  of  this  new  carrier  was  great,  and  has  not 
yet  exhausted  itself.  In  the  first  place  it  led  to  an  enormous 
improvement  in  the  surface  of  our  main  roads,  then  the  motor 
delivery  van  greatly  increased  the  area  served  by  the  retail  shops 
of  the  large  towns  and  so  assisted  in  the  building  up  of  great 
businesses.  The  motor  omnibus  (the  London  General  Com- 
pany ran  its  last  horse  'bus  in  191 1)  is  spreading  out  the  cities 
and  threatening  to  make  the  north  and  the  south-east  of  England 
each  one  vast  suburb.  It  is  helping  to  bring  about  a  counter- 
movement  to  the  nineteenth  century  drift  to  the  towns,  not  only 
by  allowing  the  workers  to  live  farther  from  their  place  of  business, 
but  also  by  letting  the  business  detach  itself  from  the  great  railway 
centres.  For  small  light  goods  road  motor  traffic,  which  can  start 
anywhere  and  go  in  any  direction,  is  likely  to  replace  railways. 
There  is  therefore  no  longer  the  same  need  for  factories  to  crowd 
into  the  expensive  cities,  where  rent  and  rates  run  up  the  working 
costs. 

One  other  method  of  transport,  invented  to  meet  the  demands 
of  the  larger  cities,  where  spare  space  on  the  surface  no  longer 


TRADE— BANKING  AND  EXCHANGE  137 

exists,  is  the  underground  electric  railway.  The  first  "  tube  "  at 
a  deep  level  was  the  City  and  South  London,  opened  in  1890. 

Air  traffic  hardly  comes  into  our  time  limit  of  1914  ;  the  war 
gave  it  its  real  birth.  It  will  eventually  in  all  probability  revolu- 
tionise the  world  as  much  or  more  than  the  steam  engine  has  done. 

Shipping. — The  change  from  sails  to  paddles  and  screws,  and 
from  wooden  to  iron  and  then  to  steel  ships,  does  not  seem  so 
revolutionary  as  the  change  from  horse  to  steam  traction,  perhaps 
because  the  ship  still  remains  fundamentally  a  ship — even,  to 
some  extent,  of  the  same  shape.  In  European  history  there  have 
been  two  great  moments  of  change  in  sea  transit — when  sails 
replaced  oars  and  when  steam  engines  replaced  sails.  Until  the 
sixteenth  century  the  chief  theatre  of  sea  commerce  and  the  only 
theatre  of  sea  war  was  the  Mediterranean,  and  for  both  purposes 
in  this  enclosed  sea  oars  were  the  chief  means  of  propulsion,  sails 
but  supplementary.  But  when  the  trade  routes  shifted  to  the 
Atlantic,  something  stouter  than  an  oared  galley  was  necessary, 
and  there  was  a  rapid  development  of  the  round  ship  or  trading 
vessel,  and  later  of  the  galleon  for  a  mixture  of  war  and  trade. 

Up  to  the  nineteenth  century  ships  remained  what  we  should 
now  consider  small,  500  to  1,000  tons,  only  the  great  East  India- 
men  reaching  the  latter  figure.  Naturally  all  ships  were  of  wood. 
The  first  vessel  propelled  by  steam  was  the  Charlotte  Dundas  in 
1802  ;  in  1 819  the  Savannah  crossed  the  Atlantic  in  twenty-nine 
and  a  half  days  with  supplementary  steam,  and  the  first  crossing 
wholly  under  steam  was  in  1838,  taking  fifteen  days.  Not  till 
then  was  steam  a  certain  success,  even  for  passengers  and  mails  ; 
for  cargoes  sailing  vessels  held  their  own  for  another  twenty 
years.  From  1840  to  1850  America  seriously  challenged  our 
place  as  seamen,  with  "  clipper  "  ships,  long  and  narrow  and  of 
considerable  speed.  We,  however,  caught  her  up  and  after  her 
Civil  War  (1862-5)  she  turned  to  other  enterprise.  Clipper 
ships  continued  up  to  1874  to  bring  tea  from  China,  and  later, 
right  on  to  1900,  wool  from  Australia. 

The  early  steamships  were  of  wood  and  were  driven  by  paddles  ; 
the  first  all-iron  vessel  was  Brunei's  Great  Britain,  built  at 
Bristol  in  1843.  In  1858  the  invention  of  the  compound 
engine  solved  the  problem  of  how  to  carry  enough  coal  for  ion- 
voyages,  by  halving  the  consumption. 


Mercantile  Marines  ;  Five  Largest 


Tons  (in 
Millions). 


11 

/ 

/    § 
/    • 

f        9 

9 

1 

1 
1 
1 

/ 1 

t 

1 

8 

/ 1 

/ » 

1 1 

■  ■      i 

* 

7 

/ 1 
/ 1 

/ 1 
1 1 

6 

■ 

/   i 

< 

\ 

/    / 

/    * 
/    * 

1    i 

5 

N 

f    * 
i 
$ 
I 

/ 

/ 

^,- 

\         /       ' 

2 

<! 

/ 

V" 

^ 

N 

it 

\ 

u 

V 
II 
H 

*// 

* 
* 

\ 

/■j 

\ 

8 

i 

* 

V 

ii 
it 

X 

/ 

3 

/ 

***£», 

// 

!***«. 

*« 

* 

\ 
\ 

\ 

j 
-■,'/' 

ft 
ft 
ft 

t 

/ 

< 

X      • 

A? 
•    \ 

/* 
it 
it 

y 

s 

• 

• 

^f 

ft 
t 

tSS*» 

4 

,*** 

? 

.•• 

• 
• 

> 

-■ 

..** 

**& 

tgm 

k££5 

MOopOO 

•*■><**, 

"•"•., 
,,•• 

<■; 

°--i 

t*< 

/ 

^-» 

;••• 

.«•• 

— , 

*& 

«.o.-" 

■  mux  W 

1&80 


IS90 


British  Empire  steamships  — — — — - 

British  Empire  sailing  ships 

United  Kingdom  steamships  —  —  -  —  - 

United  Kingdom  sailing  ships 

German  Empire  steamships 

German  Empire  sailing  ships  0  0  „  0  0 

U.S.A.  (total  for  lakes,  rivers  and  seas)  steamships  ^—: 

U.S.A  (total; for  lakes,  rivers  and  seas)  sailing  ships  =~  = 

Japan  steamships  x  X  X  X  x 

Japan  sailing  ships  x  x  x  x  x 


TRADE— BANKING  AND   EXCHANGE  139 

In  1870  Great  Britian  had  the  lead  in  shipbuilding  against  the 
whole    world,   and   maintained   it.     In    19 12    half   the    world's 
trade  was  carried   in  British  ships  and   two-thirds  of  all  ships 
built    between    1890    and    1914    were    built    in    Britain.      The 
mechanical    developments   were   rapid   and   startling.     In    1874 
the  largest  ship  was  of  some  5,500  tons,  had  a  single  screw  and 
compound  engines,  and  made  sixteen  knots.     In  1881  came  the 
triple-expansion   engine,   followed   in    1894    by  the    quadruple- 
expansion  engine,  and  in  the  same  year  the  first  turbine  steamer 
was  launched  on  the  Tyne.     The  triple-expansion  engine  was 
made  possible  by  the  use  of  corrugated  furnaces  and  the  substitu- 
tion of  mild  steel  for  iron.     In  1888  twin  screws  were  used,  and 
in  1893  the  twin-screw  triple-expansion  engined  Campania  was 
built  for  a  speed  of  twenty- two  knots,  and  crossed  the  Atlantic 
in  five  days  nine  hours.     Then  on  the  Atlantic  route  came  a  race 
for  size  and  speed  ;    by  1907  the  Mauretania,  of  nearly  32,000 
tons,  70,000  horse-power  and  762  ft.  long,  was  racing  across  the 
Atlantic  in  four  days  ten  hours  at  a  speed  of  twenty-five  knots. 
She  is  run  by  turbines  and  has  four  screws.     Her  speed  has  not 
been  exceeded,  though  the  Imperator  and  the  Acquitania  are  longer 
by  nearly   150  ft.     At  these  monsters,  built  in  Hamburg  and 
Glasgow,  in  1913  and  1914  respectively,  of  over  60,000  horse- 
power and  about  50,000  tonnage,  the  increase  of  size  has  so  far 
stayed.     On  other  routes  the  size  development  has  not  been  so 
great.     For  one  thing,  the  Suez  Canal  imposes  a  limit,  and  neither 
speed  nor  luxury  is  so  great  a  consideration.     The  tendency  is 
to  run  one  class  of  boat,  reasonably  comfortable.     The  turbine, 
as  first  invented,  was  only  economical  at  high  speeds,  and  was 
used  on  the  Atlantic  route  and  for  cross-Channel  boats,  but  in 
1910  the  geared  turbine  made  it  useful  at  lower  speeds.     It  used 
less  coal  and  oil  than  triple-expansion  engines,  reduced  wear  and 
tear,  was  more  reliable  in  rough  weather  and  allowed  increased 
cargo  room.     It  is,  however,  threatened  with  the  rivalry  of  the 
internal  combustion  engine,  the  noted  Diesel  engine,  first  used  in 
Russia  in  1903. 

The  above  is  largely  the  story  of  the  great  liners,  which  travel 
to  and  fro  on  fixed  routes,  timed  to  start  and  arrive  to  the  day, 
almost  to  the  hour.  But  the  greater  number  of  ships  are  cargo 
boats,  generally  known  as  "  tramps."  A  "  tramp  "  travels  from  port 


140     ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

to  port,  picking  up  cargoes  as  it  may.  The  problem  of  her 
construction  is  by  no  means  a  small  one.  For  instance,  where 
shall  the  engines  be  placed  so  that  as  she  empties  or  fills  with 
cargo  she  shall  balance  truly  ?  Too  much  weight  forward  and 
she  is  down  by  the  head,  all  the  weight  in  the  middle  when  she 
travels  with  empty  holds,  and  she  may  strain  badly  as  she  lifts 
on  two  waves  fore  and  aft.  Engines  and  fuel  have  complicated 
marine  construction  more  than  enough.  Requirements  of  trade 
have  complicated  it  still  further.  There  are  now  ships  built 
with  holds,  insulated  from  changes  of  temperature,  that  bring 
cargoes  of  perishable  food  in  cold  storage,  meat,  butter,  eggs  and 
fruit  ;  ships  that  are  just  gigantic  oil  tanks  ;  ships  that  carry  live 
cattle  over  thousands  of  miles. 

The  first  shipment  of  Australian  mutton  was  400  carcases  in 
1880.  In  1900  the  total  import  was  7,000,000,  and  by  1910 
17,000,000.  In  1914  there  were  200  steamers  in  the  trade. 
The  insulating  is  done  by  filling  a  space  between  the  walls  of  the 
hold  and  of  the  ship  with  either  charcoal  or  silicate  cotton,  and 
the  temperature  is  kept  down  by  steam-worked  refrigerating 
machinery.  In  1 894  the  total  charge  for  slaughtering  and  freezing 
the  sheep  in  New  Zealand,  with  freight,  insurance  and  London 
dues,  averaged  2d.  a  pound. 

The  first  specially  constructed  tank  steamer  was  built  in  New- 
castle in  1886.  In  1 912  there  were  fifty  sailing  and  258  steam 
ships  carrying  oil  in  bulk  and  480,000  tons  more  in  process  of 
construction. 

What  all  this  expansion  has  meant  to  trade  can  be  seen  from 
a  few  freight  figures.  In  1868  a  ton  of  wheat  cost  in  carriage 
from  Chicago  to  Liverpool  65s.  ;  in  1884  the  cost  had  dropped 
to  245.  Between  1872  and  1888  the  freights  for  cotton  and  yarn 
from  or  to  India  had  been  halved.  Then  came  the  inevitable 
reaction  from  competition  that  cut  the  margin  of  profit  so  fine,  and 
the  combines  and  shipping  conferences  arose  as  already  told.1 

British  shipping  has  so  far  held  its  own  almost  without  Govern- 
ment subvention  ;  there  are  certain  subsidies  paid  for  services 
rendered,  such  as  mail  carrying,  and  in  the  case  of  some  of  the 
fast  liners  that  they  may  be  available  as  cruisers  in  time  of  war. 
The  only  exception  has  been  a  loan  of  £2,600,000  at  a  very  low 

1  See  p.  74. 


TRADE— BANKING  AND  EXCHANGE  141 

interest  to  the  Cunard  Line  to  enable  them  to  build  the 
Mauretania  and  Lusitania  to  outrace  the  Kaiser  Wilhelm 
across  the  Atlantic.  On  the  other  hand,  its  rivals  have  been 
aided  by  an  elaborate  bounty  system,  started  in  1881  by  France 
and  followed  by  Germany,  Italy,  Austria-Hungary,  Japan,  Russia, 
Denmark,  Spain,  Belgium  and  the  United  States. 

There  has  been  certain  progressive  legislation  to  secure  safety 
and  decent  conditions  at  sea,  though  much  remains  to  be  done. 
In  1874  a  Commission  was  appointed  to  inquire  into  the  over- 
loading of  ships,  and  it  was  followed  by  an  Act  compelling  the 
owners  to  make  a  line  on  the  ship  which  would  give  the  maximum 
depth  to  which  she  would  sink  when  fully  loaded.  This  is  the 
"  Plimsoll  Mark,"  so  called  from  the  man  whose  insistence 
secured  the  reform.  After  1882  Lloyd's  undertook  the  marking  ; 
in  1906  it  was  raised  to  allow  English  ships  to  compete  with 
foreign  ones.  Lloyd's  has  developed  into  two  great  institutions — 
one  insures  ships  ;  the  other  registers,  inspects  and  classifies 
them.  They  are  inspected  every  four  years  and  after  every 
accident,  and,  if  necessary,  re-classed.  In  1894  was  Passed  the 
Merchant  Shipping  Act,  securing  some  sort  of  decent  treatment 
and  conditions  to  seamen  and  prescribing  minimum  accommoda- 
tion ;  it  has  been  amended  and  improved  several  times  since, 
especially  in  1906. 

The  Board  of  Trade  is  responsible  for  merchant  shipping. 
Among  its  duties  are  the  survey  of  ships,  their  equipment  and 
life-saving  appliances  ;  questions  of  seaworthiness,  overloading 
and  under-manning  ;  the  examination  and  certifying  of  officers  ; 
the  maintenance  of  the  laws  protecting  and  controlling  seamen  ; 
international  conventions  and  code  signals.  A  good  deal  of 
control  is  exercised  by  Orders  in  Council.  One  great  help  to 
seamen  comes  from  the  Meteorological  Office,  founded  in  1854. 

The  Suez  Canal.— This  was  opened  in  1869.  It  had  been  built 
in  ten  years  by  Lesseps,  a  French  engineer,  with  French  and 
Egyptian  money.  The  English  Government  and  shipping 
interests  had  bitterly  opposed  the  scheme,  for  it  closed  the  List 
to  sailing  "  clippers,"  and  would  force  our  Eastern  merchants  to 
take  to  steam.  For  the  first  six  years  its  success  was  doubtful. 
A  mixture  of  French  management,  French  and  Egyptian  juris- 
diction,   Egyptian   sovereignty,   Turkish   suzerainty,   and    traffic 


142     ECONOMIC   DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

very  largely  British  did  not  tend  to  smooth  working.  In  1875 
the  British  Government  bought  up  the  Khedive's  shares  for 
£4,000,000.  Since  then,  whether  as  a  result  or  not,  the  financial 
success  of  the  Canal  has  been  great,  and  in  191 3  the  original  £20 
shares  were  worth  £220.  In  1883  came  a  crisis,  owing  to  com- 
plaints from  the  users  of  the  Canal  that  their  needs  were  not 
considered  and  the  tolls  extortionate.  An  International  Com- 
mission investigated,  and  as  a  result  the  Canal  has  been  deepened 
and  straightened  and  widened.  Sixty  per  cent,  of  the  tonnage 
passing  through  is  British . 

The  Panama  Canal  is  in  some  ways  an  even  more  remarkable 
achievement,  though  it  had  the  advantage  of  previous  experience 
at  Suez.  Its  triumph  was  due  at  least  as  much  to  the  man  of 
science  as  to  the  engineer,  for  the  prevalence  of  malaria  and 
yellow  fever  baffled  all  attempts  at  construction  by  killing  the 
workers  by  hundreds.  The  discovery  by  Sir  Ronald  Ross  that 
malaria  is  carried  by  a  certain  mosquito  suggested,  what  was 
afterwards  proved,  that  another  mosquito  might  be  the  evil 
agent  of  yellow  fever.  When,  therefore,  the  Americans  took 
up  the  cutting  of  the  Isthmus  of  Panama,  they  first  set  about 
ridding  the  country  around  of  these  insects.  A  thorough  cleansing 
of  every  building  in  the  neighbouring  towns  was  instituted,  and 
a  sprinkling  of  every  pool  with  paraffin  to  kill  off  the  mosquito's 
young.  It  was  made  an  offence  to  leave  about  any  tin  capable 
of  holding  water.  The  result  was  that  yellow  fever  disappeared 
from  the  Canal  and  malaria  was  reduced  to  one-third  of  its 
incidence.  The  Canal  was  opened  in  191 5,  and  is  bound 
eventually  to  effect  a  shift  in  the  world's  trade  routes. 

Docks. — In  London  the  chief  addition  to  the  docks  since 
1874  was  made  in  1886,  when  Tilbury  Docks  were  opened.  A 
short  description  of  the  docks  of  London  as  they  were  in  19 14 
may  be  of  interest.  They  stretch  from  London  Bridge  to  Tilbury, 
a  distance  of  over  twenty-two  miles.  On  the  south  side  are  the 
Surrey  Commercial  Docks  in  Rotherhithe,  which  are  centres 
for  timber  and  grain,  also  for  bacon,  cheese  and  general  produce 
from  Canada.  The  timber  is  stacked  either  on  floats  in  shallow 
ponds  or  on  an  area  of  200  acres  of  land  ;  some  is  under  sheds. 
From  21,000,000  to  37,000,000  pieces  of  timber  are  landed  per 
year.     Grain,  if  it  is  in  bulk,  is  discharged  by  pneumatic  or  bucket 


TRADE— BANKING  AND   EXCHANGE  143 

elevators  attached  to  band  machinery  ;    if  in  sacks,  by  porters. 
The  Surrey  Docks  are  equipped  with  cold  storage. 

On  the  north  side  are  St.  Katherine's  Docks,  once  the  place 
of  delivery  of  the  China  tea  trade,  and  so  supplied  with  large 
bonded  warehouses.  Much  of  the  valuable  or  dutiable  cargoes 
is  stored  here,  such  as  tea,  indigo,  wool,  tortoise-shell  and  marble. 
One  of  the  warehouses  is  a  scent  factory,  where  the  flower  extract, 
sent  from  Southern  Europe  mixed  with  fat,  is  extracted  and  mixed 
with  alcohol  for  export.  By  manufacturing  "  in  bond  "  the  maker 
need  not  pay  duty  on  the  alcohol,  as  it  is  re-exported.  At  the 
London  Docks  are  wine  vaults,  whose  gangways  are  over  twenty- 
eight  miles  in  length,  while  thirty-two  acres  of  warehouse  flooring 
house  the  wool,  the  handling  of  which  during  the  wool  sales  six 
times  a  year  employs  1,200  hands.  The  fleeces  of  100,000,000 
sheep  enter  the  Port  of  London  yearly.  The  West  India  Docks 
house  rum,  sugar,  hops,  grain  and  valuable  woods.  Millwall  Dock 
takes  two-thirds  of  the  grain  entering  London  Port.  Its  central 
granary  has  thirteen  floors  and  machinery  for  handling  500  tons  of 
grain  an  hour.  Below  Blackwall  are  the  Victoria  and  Albert  Docks, 
taking  half  of  all  the  shipping  tonnage  entering,  for  they  are  the 
docks  for  big  steamers.  Tilbury  Docks,  furthest  down  the  river, 
have  two  very  large  graving  docks,  850  ft.  long,  from  which  the 
12,000,000  gallons  of  water  can  be  pumped  in  one  and  a  half 
hours.  The  Port  of  London  Authority  controls  the  river  from 
Teddington  Lock  to  the  mouth,  a  distance  of  seventy-four  miles. 

In  value  of  the  trade  passing  through  it  London  must,  however, 
now  give  place  to  Liverpool,  though  this  has  only  been  so  since 
1 91 3.  Liverpool  is  the  great  exporting  centre,  London  the 
importing,  and  Liverpool  trade  has  not  the  variety  of  London. 
It  imports  raw  cotton  and  foodstuffs,  and  exports  cotton,  steel 
and  woollen  goods.  Its  docks  are  a  triumph  of  organisation  and 
planned  development. 

The  third  port  of  the  United  Kingdom,  strange  as  it  may  seem, 
is  Manchester,  whose  place  on  the  map  suggests  an  inland  town. 
This  is  due  to  the  enterprise  of  its  leading  men,  who  in  1S82 
conceived  the  plan  of  a  ship  canal  to  bring  its  raw  cotton  close  to 
its  factory  doors.  In  spite  of  strenuous  opposition  from  Liverpm  >1 
and  the  railway  companies,  it  secured  its  Act  of  Parliament,  and 
was  opened  in  1894.     Up  to  1912  it  had  cost  nearly  £17,000,000. 


144     ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

It  is  thirty-five  and  a  half  miles  long,  its  uniform  depth  is  28  ft., 
and  for  its  greater  part  it  is  120  ft.  wide  at  the  bottom.  Its  largest 
lock  is  600  ft.  by  80  ft.,  its  smallest  150  by  30  ft.,  and  a  large 
steamer  of  12,500  tons  can  be  passed  through  its  chief  lock  in 
eight  minutes.  The  company  owns  eighty-four  miles  of  railway, 
and  has  water  communication  with  fourteen  large  canals.  Much 
of  the  stock  is  held  by  the  Corporation  of  Manchester.  At  one 
point  an  aqueduct  carries  over  it  the  Bridgwater  Canal.  It  has 
not  wrested  from  Liverpool  the  import  of  American  cotton,  but 
it  imports  much  Egyptian,  and  it  takes  large  deliveries  of  grain. 
For  this  it  has  two  grain  elevators,  each  capable  of  storing  40,000 
tons.  The  largest  can  discharge  from  six  berths  at  once,  and  at 
the  rate  of  900  tons  an  hour. 

The  grain  is  taken  out  of  the  holds  by  a  series  of  buckets  working 
on  an  endless  band  ;  these  deliver  the  grain  on  to  a  band  running 
under  the  pavement  of  the  quay  to  the  elevator,  where  it  is  again 
lifted  in  buckets  to  the  floor  required  and  poured  into  great  scales, 
which  weigh  it  automatically  and  empty  it  into  the  bins.  When 
wanted  it  can  be  sacked  and  loaded  into  thirty  railway  waggons 
and  twenty  carts  at  once. 

The  port  also  owns  fifty-nine  great  oil  tanks,  and  has  cold  storage 
accommodation,  in  or  near  the  docks,  2,000,000  cubic  ft.  in 
volume.  The  quays  at  Manchester  itself  are  six  and  a  half  miles 
in  length. 

Cables. — An  essential  part  in  the  development  of  world  trade 
has  been  played  by  the  submarine  cable,  which  came  into  use 
after  1869.  This  invention  was  the  first  in  that  process  of 
annihilating  time  and  distance  which  still  goes  on  so  rapidly. 
Twelve  main  cables  link  Great  Britain  to  Canada  and  Newfound- 
land ;  another  joins  us,  via  the  Azores,  to  New  York  ;  there  are 
four  to  Gibraltar,  and  thence  three  to  West  Africa  and  the  Cape  ; 
Canada  is  linked  to  Bermuda,  the  West  Indies,  and  South  America ; 
a  network  of  cables  radiates  from  Aden  to  India,  to  Zanzibar,  to 
Natal ;  three  thence  link  us  to  Australia,  and  another  passes  from 
Vancouver  to  Fiji,  and  thence  to  New  Zealand  and  Australia. 

General  Movement  of  Trade. — It  will  be  well  to  take  a  short 
general  survey  of  the  movement  of  trade  from  1870.  There 
were  two  serious  depressions,  one  from  1875  and  the  second  from 
1883-8,  and  the  whole  time  was  far  from  prosperous.     That 


TRADE— BANKING  AND  EXCHANGE 


!45 


which  began  in  1875  was  due  to  the  reaction  from  the  post-war 
boom  of  1872  and  the  disturbance  caused  by  the  payment  to 
Germany  of  the  French  indemnity  of  £200,000,000  ;  and  through- 
out the  'eighties  the  rivalry  of  other  nations,  already  noticed,  was 
encroaching  on  our  monopoly.  The  development  of  the  American 
Middle  West,  coupled  with  increasing  quickness  and  cheapness 
of  transit,  was  pouring  into  Europe  the  wheat  of  the  prairies,  and 


£'sin 
Millions. 


Imports  and  Exports. 


mo 


/(*S 


Ib'JO 


1900        &CS        sw 


Imports 


Exports  ... 


agriculture  began  its  downward  course.  We  have  told  the  story 
of  the  resulting  move  for  "  fair  trade."  One  of  the  effects  of  this 
rivalry  was  the  growth  of  joint  stock  enterprises,  since  an  investor 
could  thus  spread  his  risks  over  several  industries.  Another  was 
the  somewhat  belated  discovery  that  the  relative  contraction  of 
our  trade  was  partly  our  own  fault.  We  had  extended  our  love 
for  laisser-faire  to  the  realm  of  education  and  research  as  well  as 
of  industry,  and  the  work  of  our  inventors  had  seemed  to  justify 
such  casual  treatment.     But  other  countries,  Germany  in   par- 


E.D.E. 


K 


146     ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

ticular,  began  to  show  us  the  difference  between  the  casual 
acceptance  of  the  works  of  men  of  genius  and  the  organised 
effort  of  an  intelligent  nation.  Other  nations  found  it  worth 
while  to  pay  men  to  study,  to  discover  and  to  invent ;  and  when 
by  1900  we  realised  that  whole  trades,  such  as  the  making  of 
aniline  dyes  and  potato  spirit  and  the  production  of  beet-sugar, 
had  passed  to  the  nation  that  believed  in  scientific  investigation, 
some  small  belief  in  education  crept  into  the  general  mind.  In 
1902  the  State  first  took  real  cognisance  of  secondary  and  higher 
education,  and  the  movement  to  found  modern  Universities, 
free  from  the  classical  tradition,  grew  apace.  1883  saw  the 
University  of  Wales  founded  ;  1903  Manchester,  Liverpool  and 
Leeds  ;  while  Birmingham,  Sheffield  and  Bristol  followed  later. 
Birmingham  adventurously  started  a  Faculty  of  Commerce, 
London  a  School  of  Economics. 

We  have  seen  the  enormous  increase  of  our  food  imports  after 
1870  ;  the  consequence  was  a  great  drop  in  prices  after  1873. 
We  drew  our  food  from  almost  every  region  of  the  world,  and 
the  supply  was  almost  continuous.  In  the  case  of  wheat  it  was 
entirely  so.  In  1905  wheat  arrived  at  English  ports  from  some- 
where nearly  every  month  : 

In  January  from  the  American  Pacific  coast. 
In  February  and  March  from  the  Argentine. 
In  April  from  Australia. 
In  May,  June  and  July  from  India. 
In  July  and  August  from  America  (winter-sown  wheat). 
In  September  and  October  from  America  (spring-sown)  and 
from  Russia. 

In  November  from  Canada.1 

From  1 91 0-14  there  was  great  commercial  prosperity  throughout 
the  world. 

One  phenomenon  of  the  thirty  years  before  the  war  deserves 
attention,  the  effect  of  the  changes  on  retail  trade.  Not  only 
has  the  general  tendency  towards  large  scale  organisation  shown 
itself  there  as  elsewhere,  but  the  speeding  up  of  transport  has 
enormously  widened  the  area  supplied  by  the  central  shop,  while 
postal  and  telegraph  facilities  have  almost  eliminated  trade  in 
some  rural  areas.  Big  firms  in  London  and  other  great  cities 
1  L.  C.  A.  Knowles,  "  Industrial  and  Commercial  Revolutions,"  p.  202. 


TRADE— BANKING   AND   EXCHANGE  147 

supply  areas  of  thirty  or  more  miles  radius  ;  a  postcard  overnight 
will  produce  a  delivery  of  food  in  a  village  twenty  miles  out  of 
London  almost  by  return.  Textile  houses  do  a  large  retail  trade 
by  post  to  every  corner  of  the  country,  and  Grimsby  fish  in  small 
basketloads  finds  its  way  to  Dorset  and  Devon. 

Banking  and  Exchange.— The  principles  of  English  banking 
were  established  during  the  period  1844-74,  and  its  history 
since  has  been  that  of  a  great  expansion  along  the  lines  then  laid 
down.  The  determination  arrived  at  in  1844  gradually  to  limit 
note  issue  to  the  Bank  of  England  has  been  practically  carried 
out,  few  other  banks  now  issuing  their  own  notes.  Besides 
this  the  custom  has  grown  up  for  all  other  English  banks  to  keep 
their  reserves  in  the  form  of  deposits  in  the  Bank  of  England,  and 
they  have  thus  made  it  the  central  reservoir  of  the  flow  of  money 
in  all  English  markets.  At  the  same  time,  as  we  shall  presently 
see,  it  has  come  to  be  the  central  regulating  valve  for  most  of  the 
world  flow  as  well. 

But  while  the  banks  have  ceased  to  function  as  banks  of  issue, 
their  business  of  all  other  kinds  has  enormously  increased,  and 
great  joint-stock  banks  have  arisen,  partly  by  new  growths  and 
partly  and  increasingly  by  amalgamations.  Between  1877  and 
1886  there  were  absorbed  in  larger  concerns  forty- two  banks, 
between  1887  and  1895  there  were  ninety  similar  cases,  and  from 
1896  to  1907  there  were  100.  This  tendency  was  already  becoming 
a  serious  menace  before  the  war  ;  events  since  then  have  put  the 
control  of  English  money  into  the  hands  of  some  half-dozen 
great  combines. 

The  great  growth  of  banking  business  (in  1907  it  was  estimated 
that  the  total  assets  of  English  banks  amounted  to  some 
£1,000,000,000)  is,  of  course,  the  natural  outcome  of  the  great 
extension  of  world  trade.  Let  us  see  how  a  transaction  between 
New  York  and  London  is  usually  carried  out.  Suppose  a  Mr. 
Brown  in  New  York  ships  to  a  Mr.  Jones  in  London  a  large 
amount  of  wheat  ;  he  does  not  want  to  wait  for  his  money,  nor 
does  Mr.  Jones  want  the  bother  and  expense  of  sending  gold 
across  the  Atlantic  in  payment.  So  Mr.  Brown  makes  out  an 
order  to  Mr.  Jones  to  pay  whoever  presents  him  with  the  docu- 
ment, called  a  bill  of  exchange,  the  sum  of,  say,  £20,000,  at  a  date 
three   months   hence.     Mr.    Brown   then   goes   into   the   money 


K   2 


148     ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT   OF  ENGLAND 

market  and  sells  this  bill  to  a  Mr.  Robinson  for  something  less 
than  £20,000,  say  for  £19,750  ;    he  has  then  got  his  bill  dis- 
counted at  5  per  cent.     Robinson  may  sell  it  again,  or  perhaps  he 
himself  is  buying  goods  in  London  from  Mr.  Wall,  which  he 
orders  to  be  sent  to  New  York.     In  payment    he  sends  Brown's 
bill  on  Jones  to  Wall,  who  presents  it  to  Jones  and  gets  the  money. 
Thus  two  transactions  have  been  carried  out  across  the  ocean,  and 
no  money  has  travelled  beyond  London.     Of  course,  the  history 
of  a  bill  of  exchange  is  not  usually  so  simple  as  this  ;  it  may  pass 
through  several  hands,  but  any  merchant  sending  goods  across 
the  seas  gets  paid  in  this  way,  he  sells  his  claim  on  the  other 
man,  and,  as  time  is  taken  up  before  actual  payment  can  be  made, 
he  sells  it  for  rather  less  than  its  face  value.     The  same  plan  is 
adopted  for  sales  in  the  same  place  when  cash  is  not  paid.  Suppose 
a  farmer  wants  to  buy  some  big  machine  and  undertakes  to  pay 
for  it  when  he  has  sold  his  harvest  ;  the  man  who  sells  the  machine 
draws  a  bill  on  the  farmer  for  a  date  three  months  hence,  sells  it 
to  some  one  at  a  discount,  and  the  farmer  pays  the  some  one  when 
the  time  comes.     Obviously  it  may  be  troublesome  to  hawk 
round  such  a  bill  to  find  a  buyer,  and  so  two  classes  of  people 
have  grown  up  to  do  the  exchange,  bill-brokers  and  bankers. 
The   latter   are   our   immediate   concern.     Bankers'   profits   are 
made  by  lending  at  interest  the  deposits  of  their  clients,  and,  as 
these  deposits  may  be  asked  for  at  very  short  notice,  ordinary 
industrial  or  other  stocks  are  not  much  use  to  a  banker  for  more 
than  a  small  portion  of  his  funds,  and  Government  stock  does  not 
carry  high  enough  interest  to  pay  him.     Bills  of  exchange,  how- 
ever, can  quickly  be  sold  at  need,  and  in  any  case  are  paid  after  a 
short  interval,  and  are  fairly  safe  if  made  out  or  endorsed  by 
reputable  traders.     Hence  bankers  deal  largely  in  these  documents 
and  thereby  greatly  influence  the  money  market.     For  money 
has  its  market  as  well  as  any  other  form  of  human  wealth,  and, 
indeed,  a  very  variable  one.     If  trade  is  brisk  there  is  a  great 
demand  for  money,  and  its  price  may  go  up,  and  vice  versa. 
Again,  if  New  York,  over  a  period,  sends  London  more  goods  than 
London  sends  New  York,  the  balance  will  have  to  be  paid  for  in  a 
transfer  of  actual  money,  London  merchants  will  have  to  buy 
American  money  to  pay  with,  the  demand  will  raise  the  price, 
and  the  American  dollar  will  go  up  in  value  as  against  the  English 


TRADE— BANKING  AND  EXCHANGE     140. 

pound,  and  M  the  exchange  will  be  against  us."  Of  course, 
there  are  other  factors  that  influence  the  rate  of  exchange,  but 
this  is  a  simplified  instance  of  how  one  important  cause  of  variation 
works. 

Many  causes  have  combined  to  make  London  the  central 
money  market  of  the  world,  principally  the  large  and  widely 
travelling  English  mercantile  marine.  Not  that  Berlin  and 
Paris  and  New  York  had  not,  up  to  1914,  important  markets 
of  their  own,  but  there  was  a  convenience  in  London  that  made 
it  dominant.  Part  of  this  was  due  to  the  established  policy  of 
the  Bank  of  England  of  attempting  to  control  the  flow  of  gold 
by  manipulation  of  its  rate  of  interest,  which  its  central  position 
as  holder  of  the  reserves  of  the  entire  English  banking  system 
enabled  it  to  do,  and  part  to  its  reputation  for  stability.  For, 
although  the  Bank  of  England  is  a  private  company  in  no  way 
guaranteed  by  the  State,  there  is  a  very  well-founded  faith  in  the 
indestructibility  of  its  credit.  "  Safe  as  the  Bank  of  England  "  is 
no  mere  phrase.  In  the  first  place,  it  is  the  bank  for  the  Treasury. 
All  taxes  are  paid  into  the  Treasury  account  there  ;  all  expenditure 
has  to  come  out  of  that  account.  Were  the  Bank  to  close  its 
doors,  the  finances  of  the  State  would  at  once  be  in  inextricable 
confusion.  Besides  this,  the  Government  trusts  to  the  reserve 
of  the  Bank  of  England  to  cover  its  own  emergencies,  as  indeed 
do  all  the  other  banks.  Against  the  156  millions  in  the  Post 
Office  Savings  Bank  no  reserve  has  been  built  up  ;  should  the 
withdrawals  at  any  moment  exceed  deposits,  the  Post  Office 
would  have  to  draw  on  the  Bank  of  England.  It  is  obvious  that 
the  State  would  have  to  come  to  the  rescue  if  the  Bank  were  in 
difficulties,  and  so,  though  without  guarantee,  none  the  less  the 
Bank  of  England  has  in  practice  behind  it  the  credit  of  the  English 
nation. 

The  changes  in  our  currency  have  been  more  a  matter  of 
spontaneous  growth  than  those  of  our  banking  system.  In 
1874  gold,  silver  and  banknotes,  together  with  bills  of  exchange, 
formed  our  principal  currency.  Gold  and  silver  are  limited  by 
the  world's  production  of  these  metals,  banknotes  strictly  by 
action  of  the  Bank  Act,  1844.  Bills  of  exchange  have  grown 
with  expanding  trade  and  have  no  limit  except  the  lack  of  need 
for  them.     But  they  are  only  suitable  for  fairly  big  transactions. 


150     ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

What  has  been  the  most  striking  advance,  in  England  especially, 
of  the  last  fifty  years,  is  the  use  of  cheques.  Previously  only  men 
of  substance  kept  banking  accounts  ;  now  almost  any  one  with  an 
income  of  £300  a  year  or  more  keeps  a  current  account  and  pays 
most  sums  over  £1  by  cheques.  These  are  simply  orders  to  the 
banker  to  pay  money  out  of  the  drawer's  account,  and  often  the 
payment  only  takes  the  form  of  a  book  transfer.  If  you  and  I 
have  accounts  at  the  same  bank,  and  I  give  you  a  cheque  for  £5, 
the  banker  merely  enters  in  my  account  £5  paid  out  and  in  yours 
£5  paid  in  ;  no  coin  passes  at  all.  If  our  banks  are  different 
there  is  merely  a  day's  delay  in  passing  the  cheque  through  the 
clearing  house.  This  general  use  of  cheques  has  greatly  simplified 
the  currency  supply,  for  a  cheque  comes  into  being  when  needed, 
and  goes  out  of  existence  with  the  close  of  the  transaction.  The 
result  is  that  cheques  and  bills  of  exchange  now  form  the  greater 
part  of  our  currency. 

None  the  less,  currency  problems  are  still  with  us.  The  old 
debates  as  to  how  far  it  is  possible  to  use  paper  money,  which 
does  not  represent  real  existing  gold  and  silver,  and  for  which  no 
guarantee  exists  to  change  it  for  gold  and  silver,  still  go  on,  and  are 
greatly  increased  since  the  War,  during  which  every  nation  but 
America  was  forced  to  abandon  all  attempts  at  a  gold  standard, 
and  to  live  as  best  it  could  by  uncovered  paper.  The  balance  of 
trade  took  most  of  the  gold  to  America,  and  shifted  the  central 
money  market  to  New  York.  But  in  19 14  these  things  were 
undreamed  of.  The  world  seemed  very  safe  then,  money  flowed 
freely  wherever  it  was  wanted,  the  nations  seemed  inextricably 
linked  by  the  million  filaments  of  a  world  trade  done  largely  on 
credit ;  no  one  seriously  believed  that  any  one  would  deliberately 
explode  the  whole  network,  and  those  who  pointed  out  the 
explosive  character  of  colossal  armaments  or  tried  to  warn  the 
people  what  the  breakdown  of  this  delicate  interweaving  of  trade 
would  mean  in  human  misery  were  scoffed  at,  or  ignored.  Then 
came  August,  1914,  and  catastrophe  immediate  and  irremediable 
was  only  postponed  by  the  authoritative  abrogation  of  the  whole 
scheme  of  commerce  by  Act  of  the  Government.  The  disaster 
was  postponed  and  spread  over  a  period  of  years  thereby,  but 
it  was  proved  to  the  uttermost  for  all  to  see  that  war  and  modern 
civilised  life  could  not  exist  on  the  same  continent. 


CHAPTER  VIII 

TAXATION.      CHANGES  IN  ECONOMIC  THEORY   AND   OUTLOOK 

Taxation. — In  the  early  Middle  Ages  taxation  for  the  needs 
of  Government  was  an  occasional,  not  a  normal,  matter.  The 
theory  was  held  that  "  The  King  should  live  of  his  own,"  and  as 
the  Crown  demesne  was  very  extensive,  for  a  long  time  it  proved 
adequate.  The  King's  business  was  to  govern,  and  his  office 
was  sufficiently  endowed  for  the  purpose.  It  will  be  remembered 
that  the  most  prominent  right  claimed  by  the  barons  in  121 5 
was  freedom  from  taxation,  except  on  certain  fixed  and  recognised 
occasions.  Besides  his  feudal  estates  the  King  had  acknowledged 
rights  of  toll  on  trade,  and  "  customs  "  were  fully  recognised. 
Gradually  as  government  became  more  expensive,  and  foreign 
wars  more  numerous,  more  money  was  required,  and  the  King's 
needs  were  supplied  on  terms.  By  consent  of  the  leading  people 
capital  levies  and  taxes  on  income  from  land  were  exacted,  and 
later,  when  more  was  required,  additional  subsidies. 

The  seventeenth  century  established  the  control  of  the  Commons 
over  the  nation's  purse  and  for  the  next  150  years  the  King's 
income,  apart  from  his  private  estate,  was  drawn  mainly  from 
indirect  taxes,  i.e.,  customs  and  excise,  and  next  in  importance 
from  a  tax  on  land.  With  the  enormously  increased  expenditure 
of  the  Revolutionary  Wars  came  Pitt's  device  of  an  income  tax, 
much  hated  and  regarded  purely  as  a  war  duty.  Throughout 
the  time  the  customs  were  levied  with  a  Protectionist  object  on 
the  lines  of  the  mercantilist  theory.  The  extreme  poverty  and 
misery  that  followed  the  Peace  of  1815,  aggravated  by  the  appalling 
condition  of  Ireland,  forced  a  Conservative  Prime  Minister,  in 
1846,  to  repeal  the  Corn  Laws,  and  let  corn  into  the  country  tree. 
Peel's  action  was  followed  up  by  the  Liberals,  who,  during  the 
next  twenty  years,  mainly  directed  by  Gladstone,  bit  by  bit 
abolished  the  tariffs  and  shifted  the  burden  of  taxation  so  that  it 
was  nearly  evenly  distributed  between  direct  and  indirect  taxati 

151 


152     ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

By  1874  the  doctrine  was  firmly  established  that  English  Chan- 
cellors of  the  Exchequer  should  propose  taxes  for  revenue  only, 
and  not  with  any  idea  of  protecting  this  or  that  home  industry  or 
trade,  or  for  any  political  purpose.  Taxes  on  imports  were  strictly 
confined  to  luxuries,  and  things  the  country  itself  did  not  produce. 
The  chief  tax  was  on  alcoholic  drinks,  and  here  there  had  to  be  an 
excise  on  home-made  beer  to  balance  the  duty  on  imported. 

During  the  next  forty  years  this  principle,  apparently  so  firmly 
established  as  the  foundation  of  English  finance,  successfully 
withstood  an  attack  from  the  commercial  side,  but  was  completely 
undermined  from  another,  and  "  taxation  as  an  instrument  of 
social  reform  "  became  an  accepted  practice.  The  most  noticeable 
features  of  the  period  in  financial  matters  were  the  great  increase 
in  national  expenditure,  the  rapid  growth  of  direct  taxation  and 
the  objection  to  any  increase  in  indirect,  the  establishment  of 
taxes  graduated  in  accordance  with  the  wealth  of  the  payer,  the 
beginnings  and  rapid  rise  of  expenditure  by  local  authorities. 

The  increase  of  Government  expenditure  from  some 
£73,000,000  in  1874-5  to  nearly  £200,000,000  in  191 3-4  is  a 
startling  fact,  and  demands  explanation  ;  it  is  only  a  little  less 
remarkable  if  expressed  as  £2  2s.  -$d.  per  head  of  the  population 
in  1874,  and  £3  11s.  8d.  in  191 3,  or  nearly  70  per  cent,  increase. 
There  were  two  obvious  causes  ;  on  the  one  hand,  the  growth  of 
an  imperialistic  spirit,  not  merely  in  England,  but  throughout 
Europe,  brought  about  a  greatly  increased  expenditure  on  the 
Army  and  Navy,  especially  the  latter  ;  on  the  other,  a  growing 
social  conscience,  and  an  increasing  belief  in  the  desirability  of 
certain  commercial  services,  such  as  postal  facilities  and  higher 
education,  of  municipal  services,  such  as  trams,  water  supplies, 
roads  and  schools,  for  which  grants  in  aid  became  common.  If 
the  Conservatives  wanted  more  ships,  the  Liberals  demanded  more 
schools  ;  if  the  Conservatives  paid  half  the  farmers'  rates,  the 
Liberals  supplemented  his  workers'  wages  with  Old  Age  Pensions 
and  Sick  Insurance.  Neither  party  hesitated  to  spend  money 
for  what  it  believed  to  be  the  general  welfare  ;  the  horror  of 
taxation  was  gone. 

In  1890  the  first  recognition  of  "  higher  education  "  by  the 
State  was  made  when  the  "  whisky  money,"  a  new  duty  on  spirits, 
was  handed  over  to  the  County  Councils,  with  leave  to  use  it  for 


TAXATION.     ECONOMIC  THEORY,   ETC.        153 

technical  education  if  they  chose.  At  the  same  time  elementary 
education  became  free  to  all.  The  1902  Education  Act  made 
every  kind  of  education  a  State  service,  not  as  yet  free,  but  very 
heavily  subsidised.  Old  Age  Pensions,  National  Insurance 
against  Sickness  and  Unemployment,  and  other  necessary  reforms, 
though  usually  schemes  on  a  contributory  basis,  still  ate  up  huge 
subsidies. 

It  was  in  1889  that  George  Goschen,  in  his  Budget  speech, 
indicated  the  opening  of  the  controversy  that  was  to  dominate  the 
debates  for  the  next  seventeen  years,  whether  it  was  wiser  to  widen 
the  scope  of  taxation  by  including  a  variety  of  taxes,  or,  as  had  been 
the  rule  since  Peel's  time,  to  take  every  possible  opportunity  of 
simplification.  In  practice,  this  meant  more  taxes  on  articles  of 
consumption,  or  more  taxes  on  income  and  property,  indirect  or 
direct  taxation.  One  party  feared  that  the  taxable  limit  in  direct 
taxation  might  be  reached,  and  if  sudden  need  arose  there  would 
be  no  possibility  of  increase  ;  the  other  feared  an  increase  in  the 
cost  of  food  to  the  poorer  classes,  and  a  consequent  decrease  in 
real  wages.  Later  came  other  considerations,  not  financial,  and 
the  movement  for  Tariff  Reform.  In  the  long  run  the  people  of 
England  decided  emphatically  against  "  broadening  the  basis  of 
taxation,"  and  throughout  the  period  direct  taxation  has  gone 
steadily  up  and  indirect  relatively  steadily  down.  The  following 
table  gives  the  actual  proportions  : — 


Direct 
Indirect 


1841-2 


Per  ceut. 
27 

73 


1861-2 


Per  ceut. 
38 
62 


1891-2     1895-6 


Per  cent. 

44 
56 


Per  cent. 
48 

52 


1899-1900 


Per  ceut. 


48 
52 


1905-6 


Per  cent. 
50 


1911-2 


I'er  ceut. 

57 
43 


In  taxation  per  head  indirect  taxes  actually  declined.  There  is 
no  doubt  that  indirect  taxationdid,  and  does,  press  heavily  on  the 
poor,  and  since  1897  there  has  been  continuous  agitation  for  its 
remission.  "  The  free  breakfast-table,"  i.e.,  the  abolition  of  the 
tea  and  sugar  duties,  has  become  a  well-known  party  cry.  The 
sugar  duty  dates  from  1901,  and  has  been  particularly  unpopular. 
In  the  middle  of  the  nineteenth  century  it  was  believed  to  be 


iS4     ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

impossible  to  devise  any  scheme  for  graduated  taxation  that  would 
work.  It  was  admitted  that  while  a  10  per  cent,  tax  might  be  a 
serious  drain  on  the  resources  of  a  man  with  a  few  hundreds  a  year, 
it  was  a  mere  trifle  to  the  man  with  £10,000,  but  no  one  dared  to 
propose  attempting  an  adjustment.  It  was  in  1889  that  Goschen 
ventured  to  lay  an  extra  estate  duty  on  estates  worth  over  £10,000, 
and  perhaps  opened  the  way  to  the  more  elaborate  schemes  of 
Sir  William  Harcourt  and  his  successors.  In  1894  the  real 
attack  on  the  accumulations  of  the  rich  began.  The  legacy  and 
succession  duties  were  simplified,  and  several  old  estate  duties 
merged  into  one,  and  this  one  graduated  according  to  the  total 
amount  of  the  deceased  person's  possessions.  A  tax  varying 
from  1  per  cent,  for  sums  between  £100  and  £500  to  8  per  cent, 
on  a  million  was  imposed.  This  has  since  been  raised  to  15  per 
cent,  at  the  higher  limit,  and  pro  rata.  The  total  annual  receipts 
from  the  death  duties  rose  from  £14,000,000  in  1895-6  to 
£25,000,000  in  1 91 2-3.  In  the  same  Budget  incomes  under 
£400  were  allowed  an  abatement  of  £160,  and  from  £400  to  £500 
one  of  £100.  In  1907  came  the  first  distinction  between  "  earned  " 
and  "  unearned  "  income  in  estimating  tax  on  incomes  under 
£2,000. 

All  these  graduations  have  been  meant  to  transfer  the  weight 
of  taxation  to  the  wealthier  members  of  the  community,  and  to 
a  large  extent  have  done  so  ;  in  spite  of  throw-backs  since  the  war 
the  principle  may  be  taken  as  established  that  this  is  just.  But  it 
is  to  be  noted  that  such  legislation  would  have  seemed  mad  to  our 
grandfathers,  and  is  the  combined  outcome  of  a  democratic 
franchise,  and  that  growth  of  Socialist  thought  which  we  shall 
describe  further  on.  There  is  a  danger,  often  emphasised  by  the 
more  Conservative,  that  when  the  bulk  of  the  voters  pay  little  tax 
there  is  no  check  on  expenditure  ;  it  is  easy  to  vote  taxes  that  you 
will  not  have  to  pay  yourself.  It  is  a  danger  to  be  noted,  but  not 
necessarily  to  be  intimidated  by. 

The  main  development  in  the  supply  of  communal  services  has, 
however,  taken  place  in  the  realm  of  local  taxation.  Such  services 
include  Education,  Water  and  Gas  Supply,  Tramways  and 
Houses,  and  there  are  movements  that  aim  at  greatly  increasing 
these.  Matters  of  public  health,  such  as  the  supply  of  pure  milk, 
the  control  of  markets,  etc.,  have  for  years  been  discussed  as 


TAXATION.     ECONOMIC  THEORY,   ETC.        155 

desirable  moves  forward.  Some  ports,  e.g.,  Bristol,  own  and 
manage  their  own  docks.  The  amount  of  local  taxation  (usually 
called  "  rates  ")  rose  from  £54,000,000  in  1880-1  to  £169,000,000 
in  191 3-4  (these  figures  include  the  poor  rate)  ;  while  the  per- 
manent debt  incurred  by  local  authorities  had  risen  by  1910-1 
to  £629,000,000  ;  within  measurable  distance  of  the  £762,000,000 
of  the  National  Debt  of  the  same  year.  The  two  sums  together 
amounted  to  £31  per  head  of  the  population.  Certain  national 
contributions  are  made  to  aid  these  rates  ;  for  roads,  to  allow 
a  reduction  on  agricultural  land  of  one-half  the  rate,  etc.,  these 
amounted  in  1913  to  £22,000,000. 

The  above  are  the  main  features  of  the  development  of  taxation 
in  the  forty  years  before  the  war.  There  are  also  some  others 
of  interest.  Since  Sir  William  Harcourt's  Budget  of  1894,  taxes 
have  been  deliberately  used  as  a  tool  for  Social  Reform.  The 
remodelled  death  duties  of  that  year  had  a  double  purpose,  to 
adjust  the  burden  of  taxation  more  fairly  by  removing  the  greater 
burden  to  the  wealthy,  also  to  help  modify  that  uneven  distribution 
of  wealth  due  to  the  accumulation  in  fewer  hands  of  large  aggrega- 
tions of  capital  that  was  becoming  increasingly  obvious.  By 
1 91 3  the  death  duties  supplied  £25,000,000  of  revenue,  or  more 
than  one-eighth  of  our  annual  taxation.  But  the  great  year  of 
the  new  departure  was  1909,  which  saw  the  revolutionary  Budget 
of  Mr.  Lloyd  George.  Its  new  features  were  the  introduction  of 
the  super-tax,  a  supplementary  income  tax  on  all  incomes  over 
£5,000  a  year,  and  the  partial  acceptance  of  the  principle  of  taxing 
the  "  unearned  increment  "  by  a  levy  of  20  per  cent,  on  all  increases 
of  site  values  of  land  whenever  it  changed  hands,  and  a  tax  of  Id. 
in  the  pound  on  all  site  values.  By  these  taxes  it  was  hoped  to 
prevent  the  holding  up  of  land  necessary  to  the  community,  and 
to  secure  for  the  people  part  of  the  value  that  accrued  to  land- 
owners without  any  effort  on  their  part.  Land,  perhaps  bought 
at  £40  an  acre  as  agricultural  land,  often  by  the  mere  chance  of  I 
city's  spreading  towards  it,  or  a  quick  railway  service  being  supplied 
to  its  neighbourhood,  would  sell  for  £500  an  acre  or  more.  After 
1909  a  small  part  of  this  £460  of  unearned  increment  was  claimed 
by  the  community.  That  effective  measures  to  reduce  the 
growing  inequalities  of  possessions  between  man  ami  man  were 
badly  needed  is  evident  from  the  figures  of  the  estate  duty.     The 


156     ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

total  property  passing  at  death  in  191 2-3  was  £276,000,000  ;  of 
this  one-third  belonged  to  292  persons,  one-half  to  1,300,  and 
two-thirds  to  4,000  ;  but  out  of  425,000  adults  who  died,  335,800 
"  had  died  without  any  property  upon  which  it  was  worth 
anybody's  while  to  pay  the  10s.  to  obtain  the  authority  of  the 
Inland  Revenue  to  deal  with  it  legally."  l 

The  taxes  on  alcoholic  drinks  are  advocated  by  some  as  a  means 
of  restraining  the  habit,  by  others  as  a  highly  profitable  tax.  It 
is  possible  that  they  achieve  something  in  the  first  respect,  and 
certain  that  they  are  effective  in  the  second.  Still,  the  most 
remarkable  fact  about  them  is  their  steady  diminishing.  From 
1900-14  the  amount  of  wines  and  spirits  drunk  rapidly  decreased  ; 
that  of  spirits  nearly  halved.  The  consumption  of  beer  has  also 
declined,  but  not  so  rapidly  ;  in  1899  it  was  32-6  gallons  per  head 
of  the  population,  in  1912  it  was  26-8.  A  "  penny  off  beer  "  is 
always  a  popular  cry,  and  "  the  trade  "  is  politically  strongly 
organised,  but  the  growing  expenditure  of  the  State  compels  the 
Chancellor  of  the  Exchequer  to  stick  to  this  very  fruitful  source 
of  taxation,  and  a  strong  section  of  the  nation  regards  these  taxes 
as  socially  beneficial.  They  are  likely  to  remain  for  many 
years. 

But  if  a  growing  social  conscience  has  forced  the  nation  into 
an  increase  of  expenditure  that  would  have  seriously  disturbed 
the  contemporaries  of  W.  E.  Gladstone,  the  competitive 
Imperialism  that  began  in  the  'eighties  brought  the  demand  for 
far  greater  sums  to  be  spent  in  armament.  From  1890  onwards 
the  expenditure  in  the  Navy  grew  rapidly,  partly  in  consequence 
of  our  growing  aggressive  Imperialism  and  the  scramble  for 
markets,  partly  inevitably  from  the  increasing  complexity  and  size 
of  instruments  of  destruction.  In  1889-90  we  spent  £15,500,000 
on  the  Navy,  by  1902-3  the  cost  of  the  Service  had  more  than 
doubled,  by  1912-3  the  charge  had  reached  £45,000,000,  one- 
quarter  of  our  total  revenue.  Over  the  same  period  the  cost  of 
the  Army  rose  from  £17,500,000  to  £27,500,000.  These  were 
the  sums  in  times  of  nominal  peace  ;  during  the  Boer  War,  which 
added  nearly  £150,000,000  to  the  National  Debt,  the  annual 
charge  of  the  Army  rose  in  190 1-2  to  £94,000,000,  and  the 
Morocco  crisis  of  191 1  ran  that  of  the  Navy  up  by  some  £4,000,000. 

1  Mr.  Lloyd  George's  Budget  Speech,  1913. 


TAXATION.     ECONOMIC   THEORY,   ETC.        157 

Altogether  in  twenty-five  years  the  cost  per  head  of  the  population 
for  total  armament  rose  from  16s.  8d.  to  31$.  Sd. 

There  only  remains  to  be  considered  the  change  in  the  amount 
of  the  National  Debt.  During  the  century  between  the  close 
of  the  Napoleonic  War  and  the  outbreak  of  the  Great  War  the 
National  Debt,  left  in  181 5  at  £858,000,000,  fluctuated  about  the 
figure  of  £750,000,000,  being  at  its  lowest  in  1899,  when  it  was 
£628,000,000,  and,  after  rising  in  consequence  of  the  Boer  War, 
it  had  again  sunk  to  £651,000,000  in  1914.  So  the  century  may 
claim  to  have  paid  for  its  own  wars,  and  some  £200,000,000  and 
the  interest  on  £600,000,000  of  the  former  ones.  Considering 
the  wealth  that  was  piled  up  in  that  period,  it  was  little  enough  to 
have  done.  More  than  a  hundred  years  after  the  quarrel  is  dead 
we  still  pay  interest  on  the  loans  that  financed  Prussia  and  Austria 
to  resist  Napoleon,  though  our  great-grandfathers  paid  nearly 
half  the  cost  of  those  wars  out  of  annual  revenue,  while  the  men 
of  1900  were  content  to  throw  on  posterity  nearly  three-quarters 
of  the  cost  of  the  much  smaller  South  African  War.  Of  this, 
£127,000,000  out  of  the  £150,000,000  left  over  was  paid  off  by 

1914. 

Changes  in  Economic  Theory  and  Outlook. — The  economic 
changes  of  the  early  nineteenth  century  were  so  rapid  and  so 
startling  that  men  began  to  investigate  to  see  if  there  were  dis- 
coverable any  laws  governing  the  changes  and  any  means  of  con- 
trolling their  direction.  Just  before  the  industrial  revolution 
Adam  Smith  had  published  in  1776  his  "  Wealth  of  Nations,"  in 
which  he  examined  exhaustively  the  economic  basis  of  society, 
strongly  attacked  the  prevailing  theories  of  the  mercantilist  era, 
and  advocated  freedom  for  trade  and  industry.  His  book  had 
enormous  influence,  and  when  the  pioneers  of  the  new  industries 
found  themselves  hampered  by  obsolete  regulations  and  trading 
shackles,  a  school  of  thought  rapidly  grew  up  that  advocated  a 
doctrine  of  "  let-alone."  At  the  same  time,  the  Utilitarian 
philosophy  of  Bentham  had  great  vogue,  and  men  of  all  kinds 
became  convinced  that  the  object  of  social  arrangements  should 
be  the  greatest  good  to  the  greatest  number,  and  that  that  good 
would  be  best  achieved  by  allowing  the  law  of  supply  and  demand 
to  work  itself  out  unchecked.  Unfortunately  for  the  theory,  the 
increasingly  obvious  results  of  the  new  righru  included  not  only 


158     ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

a  great  increase  of  the  nation's  wealth,  but  a  still  greater  increase 
in  the  poverty  and  misery  of  the  manual  worker.  This  aspect  of 
the  question  was  examined  by  Malthus,  who  discovered  that 
Nature  declared  there  was  no  help  for  it,  since  population  always 
tended  to  outgrow  subsistence,  and  to  increase  the  comfort  of  a 
proletariat  was  only  to  make  it  more  prolific.  Other  writers 
contributed  chapters  to  the  "  dismal  science,"  e.g.,  Ricardo,  in 
his  law  of  rent  and  his  wages  fund,  and  John  Stuart  Mill  summed 
it  all  up  in  the  'fifties.  The  law  of  supply  and  demand  was  a 
law  as  immutable  as  those  of  Newton,  all  State  interference  was 
bad,  though,  if  they  could  be  shown  to  have  not  too  dire  results, 
Factory  Acts  and  the  protection  of  children  might  be  conceded 
to  philanthropy  by  a  wealthy  nation. 

Meanwhile,  a  group  of  Socialists,  starting  with  Robert  Owen, 
denied  the  truth  of  the  whole  theory,  premises  and  superstructure. 
They  maintained  that  co-operation  and  not  competition  was  the 
true  path  to  social  well-being,  and  tried  to  create  Communist 
Utopias  in  a  desert  of  individualism.  They  failed,  but  their  ideas 
lived  on.  Gradually  the  free  play  of  competition  was  modified  in 
practice,  though  still  maintained  in  theory,  and  bit  by  bit  the 
current  dogmas  were  denied.  By  the  end  of  the  'sixties  the 
great  follower  of  Bentham  himself,  John  Stuart  Mill,  had  aban- 
doned most  of  his  earlier  economics  and  was  approaching  a 
Socialist  outlook.  When  in  the  'seventies  he  gave  up  the  wages 
fund  theory  it  had  seriously  shaken  popular  belief  in  the  classical 
school  of  Political  Economy,  and  for  some  time  the  whole  science 
suffered  considerable  discredit. 

Soon  after  1880  a  revival  of  its  study  set  in  from  several  quarters. 
At  the  Universities  interest  came  from  the  work  of  Jevons  at 
Manchester,  and  Marshall  at  Cambridge,  and  a  new  chair  of 
Political  Economy  was  founded  at  Edinburgh.  About  the  same 
time  arose  a  school  of  historians  who  sought  to  trace  the  economic 
rather  than  the  political  history  of  the  nation  ;  the  pioneers  were 
Thorold  Rogers,  Seebohm,  Ashley  and  Cunningham.  Toynbee's 
"  Industrial  Revolution  "  first  put  together  the  facts  of  the 
preceding  century,  and  later  came  inquiries  into  the  conditions  of 
the  workers,  like  Booth's  "  London  Life  "  and  the  great  studies 
of  Sidney  and  Beatrice  Webb.  After  the  turn  of  the  century, 
inquiries  of  all  kinds  and  short  historical  studies  on  special  points 


TAXATION.     ECONOMIC  THEORY,   ETC.        159 

increased  rapidly.     After  1890  the  British  Economic  Association 
was  founded,  also  the  Economic  Journal. 

But  however  important  in  the  world  of  thought  any  modifica- 
tions of  the  old  theories  might  be,  in  the  world  of  action  the 
importance  lay  with  ideas  more  revolutionary.  As  M.  Beer  says 
in  his  "  History  of  British  Socialism,"  the  years  between  1875  an^ 
1890  saw  a  struggle  between  Liberalism  and  Socialism  for  the 
soul  of  the  working  class.  In  this  fight  Gladstone  stood  as  the 
great  bulwark  of  Liberal  Industrialism  ;  against  this  Liberal- 
Labour  combination  were  thrown  the  Social  Democratic  Federa- 
tion of  Hyndman,  preaching  a  "  class  war,"  the  Fabians  trying  to 
apply  Socialism  to  practical  capitalist  policies,  and  the  Independent 
Labour  Party  of  Keir  Hardie  working  to  discredit  the  "  Lib.- 
Lab."  compromise  and  to  imbue  the  Trade  Unions  with  Socialism. 

THE     SOCIAL     DEMOCRATIC    FEDERATION    was     founded    in    1 88 1 

by  Henry  Hyndman,  who  was  a  convinced  follower  of  Karl 
Marx,  with  a  programme   largely  political,  but  containing  one 
proposal  of  a   Socialistic  nature — land   nationalisation.     It  was 
joined  by  all  prominent   Socialists,  including  William   Morris, 
and  in  1883  extended  its  list  of  reforms.     In  1885  Morris  left  it, 
but,  dominated  by  Hyndman,  the  small  band  threw  itself  into 
parliamentary  action.     Failing  here,  Hyndman,  Burns,  Champion 
and  Williams  led  a  demonstration  of  unemployed,  which,  angered 
by  gibes  from  the  club  windows  of  Pall  Mall,  became  riotous,  and 
the  leaders  were  arrested,  but  afterwards  acquitted.     A  Mansion 
House  Fund  of  £75,000  for  the  unemployed  followed.     In  1887 
the  new  Conservative  Government  forbad  a  meeting  of  unem- 
ployed in  Trafalgar  Square,  and  the  Radicals  joined  the  Socialists 
in  protest.     An  attempt  to  break  the  police  cordon  led  to  the 
arrest   of    John   Burns   and    Cunninghame    Graham    and    their 
sentence  of  six  weeks'  imprisonment.     This  year  saw  the  culmina- 
tion of  the  influence  of  the  S.D.F.,  which  then  had  thirty  branches. 
Its  weakness  lay  in  its  hesitation  between  two  policies — reform 
as  a  step  to  revolution  and  hostility  to  all  change  that  was  not 
the  complete  one.     It  never  quite  made  up  its  mind  as  to  the 
possibility  of  evolutionary  rather  than  revolutionary  Socialism. 
With  the  rise  of  the  New  Unionism  after  1890,  it  seemed  to  see  its 
way  more  clearly  and  advised  its  members  to  join  Trade  Unions, 
and  use  their  influence  to  spread  Colleetivist  ideas. 


160     ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

Meanwhile,  william  morris,  poet,  painter  and  craftsman, 
was  influencing  hundreds  of  minds  toward  the  new  outlook. 
"  What  he  did,"  says  G.  D.  H.  Cole,  "  was  to  put  clearly  before 
the  world  the  baseness  and  iniquity  of  industrialism,  and  its 
polluting  effect  on  civilisation,  despite  the  increase  of  material 
wealth.  ...  He  wanted  passionately  that  the  things  men  had  to 
make  should  be  worth  making — a  joy  to  the  maker  and  to  the  user." 

In  1893  came  the  independent  labour  party,  the  creation 
of  Keir  Hardie,  a  body  Socialist  from  the  first,  but  differing 
from  the  Social  Democratic  Federation  in  its  belief  in  the 
power  of  the  Trade  Union.  Its  main  object  was  to  convert 
the  Trade  Unions  to  Socialism  and  away  from  Liberalism,  to 
send  Socialist  members  to  Parliament  and  to  Municipal  Bodies. 
In  the  latter  it  was  very  successful,  and  by  1900  it  had  established 
the  Parliamentary  Labour  Party. 

By  that  date,  too,  the  final  victory  of  Socialism  over  Liberalism 
among  the  manual  workers  was  no  longer  in  doubt,  though  the 
long  list  of  Liberal  reforms  of  a  Socialistic  character  between 
1906  and  1914  held  back  the  tide  for  a  time.  But  "  the  mentality 
of  the  working  classes  is  now  passing  from  politics  to  economics, 
and  from  economics  to  social  ethics." 1  The  older  Socialist 
claimed  that  labour  differs  from  other  commodities  in  that  it 
produces  a  surplus  value  ;  the  new  lays  more  emphasis  on  the 
fact  that  labour  is  the  product  of  a  human  soul,  from  which  it 
cannot  be  separated.  After  1907  came  a  rise  of  prices  and  a 
lowering  of  real  wages,  the  Socialist  ferment  began  to  rise  and 
the  unrest  became  general.  From  1903,  too,  there  had  been  a 
strong  educational  movement  among  the  workers.  The  workers' 
educational  association  was  founded  in  that  year,  with  the 
object  of  bringing  University  teaching  to  the  manual  worker  ; 
Ruskin  College  at  Oxford,  for  working  men,  and  the  Central 
London  College  were  opened.  The  Workers'  Educational  Associa- 
tion has  now  1,071  Trade  Union  Branches  and  Trades  Councils 
affiliated  to  it  and  384  Co-operative  Societies. 

The  general  effect  of  Socialistic  thought  on  the  nation,  outside 
the  actual  Socialistic  ranks,  has  been  summed  up  thus  by  an 
American  writer  : — 2 

1  M.  Beer,  "  History  of  British  Socialism,"  Vol.  II.,  p.  199. 

2  Haney,  "  History  of  Economic  Thought,"  p.  391. 


TAXATION.     ECONOMIC  THEORY,   ETC.        161 

(a)  The  idea  that  social  institutions  are  not  the  product  of 
natural  law,  but  of  historic  growth  and  of  man's  dealing,  has 
modified  the  dogmatism  of  the  classical  science. 

(b)  There  has  been  a  change  of  emphasis  from  exchange  value 
to  social  utility. 

(c)  Problems  of  distribution  rather  than  of  production  have 
become  prominent.  The  question  has  been  raised  :  "  What  is 
a  just  wage  ?  " 

(d)  There  has  been  much  weakening  in  the  opposition  to  State 
activity. 

(e)  It  is  Socialism  that  has  brought  to  the  fore  the  problem  of 
the  "  unearned  increment." 

(/)  The  general  attack  of  capital  has  led  to  a  more  careful 
analysis  of  the  doctrines  of  Smith  and  Ricardo. 

karl  marx  (181 8-1 883). — It  is  time  to  turn  to  the  founder  of 
revolutionary  Socialism  in  its  modern  phase  and  ask  what  this 
much-discussed  thinker  and  teacher  actually  said  and  did.  Marx 
was  by  race  a  Jew,  born  of  parents  who  had  accepted  Protestant 
Christianity,  and  who  moved  in  high  enough  middle-class  society 
for  their  son,  Karl,  to  marry  into  the  lesser  German  nobility. 
Such  an  origin  does  not  usually  lead  to  a  life  of  revolt  against 
constituted  authority,  except  in  very  strong  characters  by  reaction. 
Marx  evidently  was  of  this  kind,  for  in  1843,  at  the  age  of  twenty- 
five,  he  had  to  flee  to  Paris  when  the  authorities  suppressed  a 
newspaper  he  was  conducting.  In  1848  he  returned  to  Germany, 
took  part  in  the  Revolution  of  that  year,  and  when  it  failed  fled  to 
London,  where  he  lived  the  rest  of  his  life.  He  was  really  a 
student  and  a  man  of  intellect  rather  than  of  action,  though  he 
made  for  revolution  even  more  than  most  thinkers.  His  great 
book  was  "  Das  Kapital,"  of  which  the  first  volume  appeared  in 
1867,  and  the  two  others  after  his  death,  in  1885  and  1894.  It 
is  not  often  that  Continental  writers  and  thinkers  have  great 
influence  in  England.  Lassalle,  a  name  to  conjure  with  in 
Germany  in  the  'sixties,  was  almost  unknown  here  ;  the  whole 
school  of  French  Socialists  were  hardly  to  us  even  a  name.  Marx's 
influence  is  due  to  his  long  residence  here,  from  which  he  came  to 
know  most  of  the  advanced  leaders  of  the  time,  and  to  the  fact 
that  he  based  his  theories  on  facts  drawn  from  British  history  and 
British  industrial  organisation.     His  friendship  with  Engela,  who 

E.D.E.  L 


i62     ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

had  been  in  business  in  Manchester  and  knew  English  Socialism, 
tended  to  turn  his  mind  in  the  same  direction.  Marx's  theories 
may  be  divided  into  four  main  groups  : — 

(a)  Surplus-Labour  and  Surplus- Value. — He  followed  the  older 
economists  in  asserting  that  the  value  of  a  thing  was  measured 
by  the  amount  of  crystallised  labour  it  contained.  All  workers 
produce  more  than  is  required  to  keep  them  in  efficient  working 
trim,  and  this  surplus  value  the  capitalist  seizes.  The  extra  hours 
worked  at  the  demand  of  the  employer  to  produce  this  surplus 
value  he  calls  surplus  labour.  To  increase  the  surplus  value  the 
employer  enforces  longer  hours,  increases  his  machinery,  or  forces 
down  the  cost  of  living  ;  or  he  may  employ  cheap  labour  (women 
and  children),  or  speed  up  the  intensity  of  work.  In  any  case,  the 
worker  never  gets  the  full  value  of  his  labour,  and  Marx  maintains 
that  it  is  of  the  essence  of  the  capitalist  system  that  he  should  not. 
Then,  as  labour-time  alone  measures  value,  the  increase  of 
machinery  reduces  the  value  per  commodity,  and  if  profit  is  to 
be  maintained,  production  on  an  increasing  scale  is  necessary. 
Whence  follows  his  second  theory. 

(b)  The  Law  of  Concentration  of  Capital. — Marx  traces  the 
story  of  capital  from  the  sixteenth  century  down  to  its  modern 
concentration  in  the  hands  of  the  few.  The  tendency  was  evident 
when  Marx  wrote,  and  he  foresaw  it  must  grow  stronger  ;  indeed, 
he  held  that  such  a  destiny  was  inherent  in  the  system.  Joint 
stock  companies  with  idle  shareholders  show  the  evil  in  all  its 
nakedness,  trusts  and  combines  even  more  so.  To  Marx  "  private 
property  "  is  not  the  right  of  the  worker  to  what  he  has  produced, 
but  the  right  of  others  to  appropriate  it  to  themselves.  This 
right,  as  the  blocks  of  capital  grew  larger  and  in  fewer  and  fewer 
hands,  would  become  a  fiercer  and  fiercer  tyranny,  and  finally  a 
fetter  on  production.  At  this  point  the  workers  would  seize 
control  and  constitute  themselves  the  nation  and  would  expro- 
priate the  capitalists.  This  was  the  inevitable  social  revolution, 
"  the  dictatorship  of  the  proletariat."  Marx  did  not  so  much 
advocate  this  revolution  as  prophesy  it. 

(c)  The  Class  War  was  a  necessary  result  of  the  above  theses. 
Wages  and  profits  were  mutually  exclusive  ;  what  one  gained 
the  other  lost.  No  compromise  was  possible,  the  bourgeoisie 
were  drones  living  on  the  workers  and  must  be  deprived  of  all 


TAXATION.     ECONOMIC  THEORY,  ETC.        163 

power.  But  the  victory  of  the  worker  was  sure,  once  he  became 
conscious  that  a  better  system  was  possible. 

(d)  His  theories  were  the  result  of  minute  and  prolonged 
historical  study,  which  convinced  him  that  the  real  history  of  man 
had  a  materialistic  basis.  The  material  needs  of  man  and  his 
methods  of  satisfying  them  determine  his  legal,  political,  social 
and  intellectual  relations.  "  The  method  of  producing  com- 
modities, speaking  generally,  fixed  the  social,  political  and  intel- 
lectual processes  of  life.  A  man's  conscience  has  less  to  do  with 
determining  his  manner  of  life  than  has  his  manner  of  life  with 
determining  the  state  of  his  conscience."1  Hence,  when  the 
productive  forces  change  they  get  out  of  gear  with  the  political 
and  social  superstructure  and  society  enters  on  a  revolutionary 
period.  But  in  spite  of  his  "  class  war,"  which  did  indeed  make 
an  effective  rallying  cry,  Marx's  idea  of  revolution  was  an  English 
rather  than  a  French  one,  comparatively  peaceful,  possibly  even 
parliamentary. 

Such  were  the  theories  that  have  profoundly  modified  the 
outlook  of  every  modern  thinker  whether  he  acquiesce  in  them 
or  no,  and  which  have  fired  a  revolutionary  blaze,  greater  than  that 
of  France,  whose  end  is  not  yet.  But  Marx's  real  fame  depends 
less  on  the  truth  or  falsity  of  his  doctrines  than  on  his  encyclo- 
paedic knowledge  of  economic  facts  and  in  his  appreciation  of  the 
movement  of  the  working  class.  He  was  the  first  Socialist  to 
grasp  the  role  of  the  proletariat,  to  believe  that  liberty  could  be 
won  by  their  own  action  alone,  not  bought  for  them  or  given  them 
by  others.  His  modern  followers  have  rejected  his  theory  of 
surplus  value  and  modified  the  others.  Though  capital  has 
concentrated  as  Marx  foresaw,  it  has  at  the  same  time — and  this 
he  did  not  foresee — also  spread.  We  have  great  amalgamations, 
trusts,  combines,  which  would  seem  to  him  just  what  he  expected, 
but  he  would  have  been  startled  to  learn  that  shareholders  of 
joint-stock  companies  include  thousands  of  manual  workers,  and 
that  Trade  Union  funds  to  the  amount  of  many  millions  are 
similarly  invested.  The  capitalist  system  is  less  simple  than  it 
seemed.  So,  too,  with  the  class  war  ;  modern  life  again  is  not 
so  simple,  and  a  struggle  between  two  clear-cut  interests  is 
neither  likely  nor,  indeed,  possible.     The  wage-earner's  inte: 

1  Marx,  "  Kritik  dcr  politischcn  (Ekonomio,"  p.  5. 

1    J 


164     ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

is  not  absolutely  confined  to  wages  ;  collectively,  if  not 
individually,  his  class  is  no  longer,  strictly  speaking,  a  proletariat 
devoid  of  possessions.  Modern  Collectivism  is  based  on  Marx, 
but  its  revolutionary  Socialism  has,  in  England  at  least,  tamed 
down  to  evolutionary  Socialism  by  Act  of  Parliament. 

Anarchism. — To  devote  a  paragraph  to  the  Anarchists  in  a 
history  of  England  may  seem  at  first  absurd,  for  Anarchism  has 
had,  in  fact,  few  followers  anywhere  outside  Russia  and  the  Latin 
nations.  Actually,  however,  Anarchist  thought  has  exercised 
considerable  influence  on  the  later  schools  of  Socialism.  It  owes 
its  foundation  to  two  Russian  aristocrats,  Bakunin  (1814-76) 
and  Prince  Kropotkin.  Bakunin  began  his  career  in  the 
Russian  Army,  but  an  experience  of  crushing  a  revolt  in 
Poland  led  to  his  resignation,  and  he  spent  six  years  in  the  study 
of  philosophy.  By  1842  he  had  become  a  revolutionary,  was  in 
Berlin  and  Paris,  where  he  met  Proudhon.  In  1848  he  took  part 
in  the  revolutions  at  Prague  and  Dresden,  was  arrested,  twice 
condemned  to  death,  and  finally  handed  over  to  Russia.  He 
suffered  brutal  imprisonment  and  then  exile  to  Siberia,  whence 
he  escaped  in  1861  to  London.  Thence  he  directed  revolu- 
tionary activities  in  Switzerland,  Italy  and  France.  In  1869  he 
joined  the  International,  bringing  with  him  a  large  Latin  con- 
tingent, quarrelled  with  Marx  in  1872  and  was  expelled.  He  died 
in  1876. 

Kropotkin  in  his  early  years  was  interested  in  natural  history 
and  geography.  About  1871  he  began  to  educate  some  of  the 
working  men  of  St.  Petersburg,  was  arrested  and  imprisoned  in 
the  fortress  of  St.  Peter  and  St.  Paul.  In  1876  he  escaped  to 
England.  In  1884  he  was  wrongfully  imprisoned  for  three  years 
at  Clairvaux,  in  France,  and  such  was  his  reputation  as  a  man  of 
science  that  not  only  Ernest  Renan,  but  the  Paris  Academy  of 
Science  placed  their  libraries  at  his  disposal  during  his  imprison- 
ment. From  1887  to  1 917  he  lived  in  England,  and  returned  to 
Russia  on  the  outbreak  of  the  Revolution. 

Though  Bakunin  followed  Marx  in  his  schemes  for  organising 
production  in  the  new  State  and  Kropotkin  was  a  Communist, 
they  both  held  the  essential  idea  of  Anarchism,  that  all  authority 
is  a  denial  of  human  right.  The  State  is  par  excellence  the  agent 
of  all  exploitation  and  oppression  ;   "  it  is  a  flagrant  negation  of 


TAXATION.    ECONOMIC  THEORY,  ETC.        1C5 

humanity."  Bakunin  called  it  "  the  visible  incarnation  of 
infuriated  force,"  and  "  force  is  a  permanent  negation  of  liberty." 
There  should  be  no  compulsion  even  of  the  smallest  minority. 
"  A  society  of  free  men,  perfectly  autonomous,  each  obeying  only 
himself,  but  subservient  to  the  authority  of  reason  and  science, 
such  is  the  ideal  which  the  Anarchists  propose,  a  preliminary 
condition  of  its  realisation  being  the  overthrow  of  every  established 
authority."  *  The  Anarchists  believe  that  the  essential  thing  in 
humanity  is  its  profound  instinct  of  mutual  help  and  reciprocal 
friendship.  Anarchist  society,  from  which  the  tyranny  of 
oppression  and  the  fear  of  economic  distress  would  be  removed, 
would  consist  of  a  federation  of  free  associations  which  every  one 
could  enter  and  leave  at  will. 

One  of  the  most  useful  and  effective  demonstrations  that  we 
owe  to  the  Anarchists  is  that  the  world  could,  if  properly  organised, 
double  and  treble  its  productiveness.  Five  hours'  work  a  day 
from  all  between  twenty-two  and  forty-five  would  supply  the 
needs  of  the  race.  Kropotkin  believed  that  in  a  happy  community 
idlers  would  be  so  few  and  so  despised  that  the  community  could 
risk  giving  them  a  minimum  support.  What  no  Anarchist 
scheme  has,  however,  allowed  for  is  the  difficulty  of  restraining 
any  group  of  madmen  who  should  combine  to  use  force  ;  if  an 
armed  attempt  to  seize  power  were  made,  would  not  the  com- 
munity have  to  use  compulsion  against  them  ? 

With  such  doctrines  it  is  strange  that  Anarchism  should  have 
attracted  for  a  time  such  a  large  contingent  of  men  and  women 
who  believed  in  destruction  as  a  remedy. 

The  belief  of  the  leaders  that  a  forcible  destruction  of  all 
existing  authority  was  the  first  step  towards  freedom  was  probably 
the  cause,  and  that  belief  arose  from  the  circumstance  that  these 
men  had  been  victims  of  a  tyranny  for  which  it  was  probably 
true  there  was  no  remedy  but  forcible  destruction.  With  Russian 
Czardom  no  compromise  was  even  thinkable.  Consequently,  the 
body  that  believed  in  the  possibility  of  men  living  in  peace  ami 
order  by  mere  mutual  goodwill,  attracted  to  itself  "  much  that 
lies  on  the  borderland  of  insanity  and  common  crime."  -  I  I<>\\vver, 
the  throwing  of  bombs  was  not  the  essential  ami  permanent  part 

1  Gide  and  Rist,  "  A  History  of  Economic  Dm.  trims,''  p.  67. 

2  Bcrtrand  Russell,  "  Roads  to  Freedom,"  p.  U~ . 


1 66     ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

of  the  creed,  and  the  terrorist  campaign  practically  ceased  in 
1894. 

To  turn  from  the  Anarchists  to  The  Fabians  is  to  leave  the 
land  of  dreamers,  for  that  of  our  own  more  temperate  climate  of 
compromises.  In  1884  a  small  band  of  some  dozen  young  men 
formed  a  society  to  study  social  questions  and  bring  about  social 
reform.  Frank  Podmore  invented  the  title  from  Fabius 
Cunctator,  who  knew  how  to  bide  his  time  and  then  strike  hard. 
A  few  months  after  its  foundation  it  was  joined  by  Sidney  Webb 
and  George  Bernard  Shaw,  who  were  to  give  it  its  peculiar 
characteristics.  For  three  years  their  chief  occupation  was  the 
study  of  social  phenomena  and  of  economic  theory.  Throughout, 
the  dominating  thought  has  been  Sidney  Webb's,  ably  assisted  by 
his  wife,  and  commanding  the  enthusiastic  service  of  a  man  of 
genius  to  force  the  ears  of  the  people.  Beer  compares  their 
influence  on  Socialism  to  that  of  Bentham  and  Mill  on  British 
Liberalism  fifty  years  before.  The  Fabians,  while  generally 
Socialist,  preached  as  a  body  no  specific  Socialist  doctrine. 
Sidney  Webb  saw  that,  since  Marx  wrote,  conditions  had  changed, 
and  class  war  and  revolution  were  no  longer  essential  preliminaries 
to  the  building  of  a  Collectivist  State.  England  was  now  poten- 
tially a  democratic  State  with  a  working  class  whose  economic 
power  was  increasing.  All  that  was  needed  was  to  teach 
democracy  how  and  for  what  ends  to  use  that  power.  Owen 
had  seen  no  way  but  to  build  a  co-operative  commonwealth 
outside  the  State  ;  Marx  judged  destruction  of  the  State  a  neces- 
sary preliminary  ;  Webb  proposed  to  examine  each  evil  in  the 
light  of  Socialist  doctrine,  to  consider  possible  remedies,  and  then 
persuade  the  nation  to  adopt  them.  The  business  of  the  Fabians 
was  first  to  get  knowledge  and  then  to  permeate  with  it  the 
existing  machinery  of  government .  Though  Webb 's  own  Socialist 
theory  was  based  on  an  extension  of  the  economic  theory  of  rent, 
the  society  as  a  whole  bound  itself  to  no  particular  theory,  only  to 
certain  practical  proposals.  By  means  of  taxation,  municipalisa- 
tion  and  nationalisation,  the  power  to  exact  rent  in  any  form 
must  be  removed  from  the  individual  and  transferred  to  the  com- 
munity. In  1896  the  society  announced  its  objects  to  be : 
"  To  persuade  the  nation  to  make  their  political  constitution 
thoroughly  democratic,  and  so  to  socialise  their  industries  as 


TAXATION.     ECONOMIC  THEORY,   ETC.        167 

to  make  the  livelihood  of   the   people   entirely   independent   of 
capitalism."1 

Side  by  side  with  this  policy  of  permeation  went  the  collection 
and  publication  of  authentic  statistics  and  facts  dealing  with 
present  evils.  Its  publications  have  been  many  and  various  ; 
nearly  200  Fabian  Tracts  have  been  put  forth,  with  a  total  circula- 
tion of  near  a  million.  In  191 2  it  established  a  Research  Depart- 
ment. In  1908  the  Fabian  Women's  Group  was  formed.  The 
total  influence  of  the  society,  which  is  small  in  numbers,  has  been 
great.  Though  its  appeal  has  been  almost  entirely  to  the  educated, 
it  has  reached  through  them  the  organised  workers,  and  much  of 
the  present  programme  of  the  Labour  Party  is  based  on  the  work 
of  distinguished  Fabians. 

The  Nationalisation  of  Land  and  the  Single  Tax. — Proposals 
for  the  nationalisation  at  least  of  land  did  not  come  only  from 
Socialists.  The  question  of  the  unearned  increment  of  land  was 
not  long  in  coming  to  the  fore,  once  the  extension  of  the  great 
cities  began.  Even  in  England,  and,  of  course,  more  so  in  the 
newer  lands  of  America  and  the  Colonies,  the  rapid  increase  in 
the  exchange  value  of  land  as  the  cities  spread  was  startling. 
Ground  rents  in  London  between  1870  and  1S95  rose  by 
£7,000,000;  Hyde  Park,  bought  in  1672  for  £17,000,  is  now 
worth  £8,000,000.  A  quarter  of  an  acre  in  Chicago  sold  in  1830 
for  20  dollars,  in  1836  for  25,000  dollars,  and  in  1894  was  valued 
at  1,250,000  dollars.  That  sums  of  such  magnitude  should  go 
into  the  pockets  of  people  who  had  merely  sat  idly  and  waited 
for  the  demand  to  rise  was  too  obvious  an  injustice  to  escape- 
notice.  The  difficulty,  too,  in  securing  agricultural  land  for 
small  holdings  was  great.  For  this  state  of  affairs  two  remedies 
were  proposed.  For  the  latter  difficulty  Alfred  Russel  Wallace 
in  1882,  and  others  at  various  times,  urged  that  the  ownership  of 
land  should  be  transferred  to  the  State,  which  would  rent  it  to  all 
who  wished.  Every  man  should  have  the  opportunity  once  in 
his  life  of  choosing  a  plot  of  1  to  5  acres,  provided  he  would 
occupy  and  work  it.  How  he  was  to  obtain  the  capital  Decesfl 
to  do  so  was  not  so  obvious.  The  matter  of  unearned  increment 
had  been  considered  by  J.  S.  Mill,  whose  plan  tor  dealing  with  it 
was  for  the  State  to  annex  all  future  increases  leaving  the  present 
1  M.  Beer,  "  History  of  British  Socttliim,"  Vol.  H.,  p.  -S4. 


1 68     ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

holders  with  their   present  values.     This  would   necessitate   a 
valuation  of  all  land,  and  periodic  revaluations  ;   there  must  also 
be  distinction  between  increase  due  to  communal  activity  and  that 
due  to  private  improvements.     If  the  owner  preferred  to  give 
up  his  land,  the  State  should  buy  it  at  its  present  value.     In  1850 
Patrick  Dove,  a  Scottish  reformer,  proposed  to  nationalise  all 
rent  and  make  it  the  sole  tax.     The  real  founder  of  the  move- 
ment for  the  "  Single-Tax  "  was  an  American,  henry  george 
(1839-97).     In  I^79  he  published  "  Progress  and  Poverty,"  in 
which  he  set  out  to  show  that  the  poor  condition  of  the  labourer, 
in  spite  of  the  great  increase  of  collective  wealth,  was  due  to 
interception  of  all  economic  rent  by  the  owner  of  the  land.     No 
matter  what  progress  material  civilisation  may  make,  as  long  as 
rent  is  allowed  for  land,  all  increase  must  find  its  way  to  the 
pocket  of  the  landowner.     Get  rid  of  this  rent  and  poverty  will 
cease  with  the  inequality  of  wealth.     For  practical  proposals 
George  put  forward  the  suggestions  that  in  new  countries  the 
State  should  not  give,  but  rent,  the  land  to  all  who  asked  ;  in 
old  countries  where  the  land  had  already  been  given  away  it  should 
be  taxed  nearly  up  to  its  rental  value.     He  argued  that  it  was  no 
more  unjust  to  expropriate  landowners  than  slave-owners,  which 
latter  America  had  recently  done  without  compensation.     Henry 
George  utterly  repudiated  Socialism  ;   he  held  individualism  and 
competition  to  be  necessary  for  freedom  ;  none  the  less,  his  book 
had  great  influence  among  Socialists.     They  did  not  consider  it 
solved  the  problem ;  they  held  that  other  "  rents  "  besides  land 
rent  held  up  the  proper  distribution  of  wealth  ;  but  the  nationalisa- 
tion of  land  was  an  important  and  essential  first  step  in  their 
programme.     Land  rents  might  or  might  not  be  a  sufficient 
"  single  tax  "  to  supply  all  the  revenue  needed,  there  were  plenty 
of  other  good  reasons  for  nationalising  other  things.     At  the  same 
time,  the  "  single  tax  "  idea  was  taken  up  by  a  considerable 
number   of  Liberal   individualists.     A   small   movement   in   its 
direction  was  made  by  Mr.  Lloyd  George  in  his  1909  Budget,  in 
an  attempt  to  tax  increased  land  values,  an  attempt  he  later  aban- 
doned when  a  member  of  a  Coalition  Government. 

The  last  movement  we  have  to  study  is  Syndicalism  and  its 
English  version,  Guild  Socialism.  Syndicalism  is  a  movement 
practically   confined  to  France  and  Italy,  and  represented  by 


TAXATION.     ECONOMIC  THEORY,   ETC.        169 

the  Confederation  Generate  du  Travail.  Syndicalists  have 
re-emphasised  the  essentially  proletarian  character  of  Socialism  ; 
they  take  no  interest  in  any  but  the  manual  worker,  and  repudiate 
all  political  action.  The  movement  grew  out  of  disgust  with  the 
constant  failure  of  loyalty  in  men  who  rose  to  political  power 
by  Socialist  votes  and  then  repudiated  their  creed.  France  has 
suffered  much  from  these  gentry.  The  essential  feature  of 
Syndicalism  is  organisation  by  bodies  of  producers,  not  by 
political  units.  It  may  be  described  as  revolutionary  Trade 
Unionism.  Each  industry  is  to  be  controlled  by  the  workers  in 
it,  and  the  power  is  to  be  won  by  direct  action,  the  big  weapon 
being  the  "  general  strike."  Syndicalism,  as  such,  has  no  hold 
in  England,  though  some  in  Scotland,  which  it  reached  by  way 
of  America.  In  the  United  States  there  is  a  strong  body,  known 
as  the  I.W.W.,  the  "  Industrial  Workers  of  the  World,"  founded 
in  1905  and  permeated  with  Syndicalist  methods.  In  America, 
where  the  class  struggle  is  more  bitter  than  anywhere  else  in  the 
civilised  world,  the  theories  of  class  war  and  direct  action  are 
bound  to  take  greater  hold.  It  is  to  be  noted  that  while  Socialism 
had  attacked  economic  problems  from  the  point  of  view  of  an 
ideal  State,  Syndicalism  takes  existing  organisations,  the  Trade 
Unions,  and  proposes  to  develop  them  to  achieve  communal 
organisation. 

In  England,  a  version  of  Syndicalism  known  as  guild  socialism 
has  lately  attracted  much  notice.  Its  creators  were  G.  D.  H. 
Cole,  A.  R.  Orage  and  S.  G.  Hobson,  and  it  dates  from  1912. 
The  scheme  is  as  follows  :  the  community  will  own  the  means  of 
production,  and  will  rent  them  to  bodies  of  workers  organised  as 
Guilds  for  each  industry.  All  workers  will  be  members  of  some 
Guild,  and  each  Guild  will  be  a  democratic  body  controlling  the 
condition  of  its  labour,  and  electing  its  own  managers.  A  Parlia- 
ment will  represent  the  people  as  consumers,  and  the  final  authority 
will  be  a  joint  committee,  representing  as  to  one-half  the  Guilds, 
and  as  to  the  other  the  Parliament.  This  joint  committee  will 
determine  the  rent  the  Guilds  shall  pay  for  their  instruments  of 
production,  and  the  price  they  shall  receive  for  their  produce. 
How  that  price  is  to  be  distributed  among  the  members  <>t  etch 
Guild,  whether  equally  or  according  to  an  estimate  of  the  value 
of  each  man's  work,  will  be  left  to  the  Guild  to  settle. 


1 7o     ECONOMIC  DEVELOPMENT  OF  ENGLAND 

Whether  this  scheme  or  some  other  form  of  "  Nationalisation 
with  democratic  control  "  will  be  the  final  one,  it  is  certain  that 
the  idea  contained  in  the  phrase  quoted  has  seized  the  minds  of 
the  British  workers.  It  is  a  typically  British  product,  and  bids 
fair  to  reach  eventually  the  stage  of  experiment. 

Scientific  Theory  and  its  Influence  on  Economic  Thought. — 
The  growth  of  economic  theory  was  naturally  not  uninfluenced 
by  that  profound  revolution  in  human  outlook  produced  by  the 
general  acceptance  of  the  Theory  of  Evolution.  The  only  change 
comparable  with  it  was  the  displacement  of  the  earth  from  the 
centre  of  the  universe  in  men's  minds,  and  its  reduction  to  an 
insignificant  fragment  whirling  round  one  of  the  smaller  stars. 
Even  then  it  was  still  possible  to  regard  man  as  a  conquering 
king  of  that  universe,  occupying  for  a  time  a  specially  favoured 
corner  of  it,  with  all  things  created  solely  for  his  use,  and  having 
no  reason  to  exist  apart  from  him.  The  new  outlook  started 
with  the  publication  in  1859  of  Darwin's  "  Origin  of  Species," 
and  was  made  general  by  the  devoted  exertions  of  Thomas 
Huxley  in  expounding  it.  Gradually  the  idea  of  growth  and 
change  as  the  history  of  all  things  material  and  spiritual  became 
part  of  the  inherent  thought  of  Europe,  and  in  economics,  as 
elsewhere,  it  was  recognised  that  development  was  the  law  of 
progress.  For  a  time,  it  is  true,  the  emphasis  invariably  laid  on 
natural  law  in  the  new  theory  tended  to  increase  an  already  over- 
sufficient  materialism,  an  acquiescence  in  "  Nature  red  of  tooth 
and  claw,"  and  a  transference  of  a  doctrine  of  "  survival  of  the 
fittest  "  from  Nature  to  the  communities  of  men.  For  a  long  time 
men  were  blind  to  what  the  men  of  science  really  said — that  they 
did  not  use  "  fittest  "  in  any  moral  sense.  Though  the  fittest 
to  survive  in  a  world  of  physical  force  might  be  the  cunning  and 
the  strong,  it  by  no  means  followed  that  a  world  of  force  was  either 
good  or,  indeed,  inevitable.  Science  actually  showed  that  even 
in  Nature  it  was  not  the  mammoth  and  the  dinosaur  that  survived, 
but  rather  the  cunning  ape,  and  the  races  that  sacrificed  most 
for  their  offspring.  Still,  for  a  time,  science,  as  perverted  and 
popularised,  seemed  to  support  utilitarianism  and  laisser-faire, 
though  it  eventually  undermined  their  positions.  What  the  new 
thought  did  was  to  assault  the  innate  conservatism  of  all  men  by 
its  emphasis  on  growth  and  development,  its  hint  of  a  goal  towards 


TAXATION.     ECONOMIC  THEORY,   ETC.        171 

which  creation  moved,  its  hope  that  since  man  could  rise  from 
the  amceba  he  might  yet  rise  to  a  point  a  little  lower  than  the 
angels.  This  thought,  permeating  all  departments  of  human 
activity,  ate  out  the  supports  of  the  altar  of  the  M  god  of  things  as 
they  are,"  and  set  men  thinking  how  to  create  a  decent  and  whole- 
some way  of  human  living.  Probably  history  will  look  back  on 
the  nineteenth  century  less  as  the  era  of  great  material  progress 
and  expanding  Imperialism  than  as  the  age  when  science  whispered 
first  the  hope  that  evolution  is  the  law  of  all  things. 


BIBLIOGRAPHY 

Ernle,  Lord  (R.  E.  Prothero).  English  Farming  Past  and  Present. 
1912.     Longmans. 

Hasbach,  W.  A  History  of  the  English  Agricultural  Labourer.  English 
Translation,  1908.     P.  S.  King  &  Son. 

Green,  F.  E.  History  of  the  English  Agricultural  Labourer,  1870-1920. 
1920.     P.  S.  King  &  Son. 

Fay,  C.  R.  Life  and  Labour  in  the  Nineteenth  Century.  1920.  Cam- 
bridge University  Press. 

Chapman,  S.  J.  The  Lancashire  Cotton  Industry.  1904.  Man- 
chester University  Press. 

Galloway,  R.  L.    Annals  of  Coal  Mining  and  the  Coal  Trade.     1898. 

Turner,  Thomas.  The  Metallurgy  of  Iron  and  Steel.  1895.  Charles 
Griffin  &  Co. 

MacFarlane,  Walter.  Iron  and  Steel  Manufacture.  191 6.  Long- 
mans. 

Morris  and  Wood.     The  Golden  Fleece.     1922.     Clarendon  Press. 

Webb,  Sidney  and  Beatrice.  The  History  of  Trade  Unionism.  1920. 
Longmans. 

Dunlop,  O,  J.  English  Apprenticeship  and  Child  Labour.  1912. 
Fisher  Unwin. 

Hobson,  J.  A.  The  Evolution  of  Modern  Capitalism.  1917  Ed. 
Scott. 

Committee  on  Trusts,  Report  of.     1919.    Cd.  9236. 

Hutchins,  B.  L.,  and  Harrison,  A.  A  History  of  Factory  Legislation. 
1911.     P.  S.  King  &  Son. 

Anderson,  A.  M.     Women  in  the  Factory.     1922.     Murray. 

Mackay,  Thomas.    History  of  the  English  Poor  Law  (1834-1898). 

1904.  P.  S.  King  &  Son. 

Royal  Commission  on  the  Poor  Law,  Reports  of.     1909. 
Bowley,  A.  L.     England's  Foreign  Trade  in  the  Nineteenth  Century. 

1905.  Sonnenschein. 

Page,  W.     Commerce  and  Industry.     2  vols.     1919.     Constable. 
Knowles,  L.  C.  A.     The  Industrial  and  Commercial  Revolutions  in 

Great  Britain  during  the  Nineteenth  Century.     1921.     Routkdge. 
Egerton,  H.  E.     Origin  and  Growth  of  the  British  Dominions.     1903. 

Clarendon  Press. 
Egerton,  H.  E.     British  Colonial  Policy  in  the   Twentieth  Century. 

1922.     Methuen. 
Pollard,  A.  F.     The  British  Empire.     1909.     League  of  Empire. 
Woodward,   W.   H.     The  Expansion  of  the   British   Empire.     1907. 

Cambridge  University  Press. 

i73 


174  BIBLIOGRAPHY 

Mills,  R.  C.      Colonisation  of  Australia  (1829-42).     1915.    Sidgwick 

&  Jackson. 
Reeves,  W.  Pember.     State  Experiments  in  Australia  and  New  Zealand. 

1902.     Grant  Richards. 
Johnston,   Sir   Harry.    History  of  Colonisation   of  Africa.     191 3. 

Cambridge  University  Press. 
Kirkcaldy,  A.  W.    British  Shipping.     1914.    Kegan  Paul. 
Pratt,  E.  A.    A  History  of  Inland  Transport  and  Communication  in 

England.     191 2.     Kegan  Paul. 
Cleveland-Stevens,  E.    English  Railways.     1915.    Routledge. 
Conant,  C.  A.    A  History  of  Modern  Banks  of  Issue.     1909.    Put- 
nam's Sons. 
Dunbar,  C.  F.     Theory  and  History  of  Banking.     1900.     Putnam's 

Sons. 
Dowell,    S.    History   of   Taxation   and    Taxes   in   England.     1884. 

Longmans. 
Mallet,  Bernard.    British  Budgets  (1887-1913).     1913.    Macmillan. 
Gide,   C.,  and   Rist,   C.    A  History  of  Economic  Doctrines.     1917. 

English  Translation.     Harrap. 
Haney,  Lewis.    History  of  Economic  Thought.     191 1.     Macmillan. 
Beer,  M.    A  History  of  British  Socialism.    Vol.  I.  1919.     Vol.     II. 

1920.     G.  Bell  &  Sons. 
Russell,  Bertrand.    Roads  to  Freedom.     1918.    Allen  &  Unwin. 


INDEX 


Agricultural  Labourer,  u,  12,  13,  j   George,  Henry,  38,  62,  168 

26,27,28,29,  30,  31,32,  33,  34,  36,       Germany,  48, 49,  51,52,58,75,79,97, 
37.38,39»40,4i.90  98,   105,   122,   123,   126,   127,   130, 

America,  24,  47,  75,  76,  79,  9S,  137,  !        135,  141,  145 

146,  150,  167,  168  j    Gilds,  13,  14,  15,  59,  71 

Argentine,  24,  98,  146  I   Gold,  17,  21,  103,  106,  108,  109,  no, 

Australia,  50,  75,  97,  98,  no,  in,  112,  j        113,117,121,130 

115,  116,  117,  118,  120,  121,  127,      Great  Britain,  49,  52,  57,  77,79,  106, 


129,  130,  146 

Banking,  21,  147,  148,  149,  150 
Belgium,  51,  79,  141 
Burns,  John,  63,  64,  159 

Canada,  24,  97,  99, 100, 101, 127, 130, 

146 
Cartels,  74,  75,  77 
Coal,  43,  52,  53,  54,  55,  75,  97,  98, 

103,  106,  108,  no 
Combines,  74,  75,  76,  140 
Co-operative  Societies,  78,  80 
Corn  Laws,  17,  18,  22,  23,  151 
Cotton,  15,  43,  45,  47,  48,  49,  51,  76, 

130,  143,  144 

Egypt,  48,  123,  124,  130 

England,  9,  10,  12,  13,  17,  18,  23,  24, 

26,  34,  35,  43,  49,  50,  51.  52,  58,  71. 
74.  75.  79.  85,  89,  93,  96,  97,  98, 
100,  101,  102,  104,  106,  109,  119, 
123,  124,  126,  127,  135,  166,  167, 
169 

Fabian  Society,  64,  70,  159,  166 
Factory  Acts,  81,  82,  83,  84,  85,  86,  87, 

115,  121 
Farmer,  11,  12,  13,  18,  23,  24,  25,  26, 

27,  28,  29,  30,  31,  33,  35,  37,  38,  41, 
42,  50,  52,  58,  79,  96,  123,  124, 
125,  126,  135 


109, 122, 124,  139,  144 

Hardie,  Keir,  63,  70,  159,  160 
Hyndman,  H.  M.,  62,  63,  159 

Independent  Labour  Party,  70,  159, 

160 
India,  47,  96,  97,  103,  104,  105,  121, 

128,  146 
Iron,  13,  15,  17,  18,  43,  54,  55,  56,  57, 

77,97,98,  103,  106 
Italy,  40,  51,  123,  141 

Japan, 126, 129,  130,  141 

Labour  Party,  30,  70,  71,  160 
London,  14,  18,  47,  50,  62,  63,  72,  99, 
142, 143, 146, 147,  14S, 149, 161 


Marx,  Karl,  62,63,  65, 159, 161,  u>z, 

163,  164,  166, 167 
Minimum  Wage,  32, 40,  41,  67,84, 115 
Morris,  Win.,  62,  159,  160 


Nationalisation,  40,  67,  69,  78,  n;, 
114,  120,  121,  125,  134,  154,  166, 
167,  168, 169 

Newfoundland,  07,  100,  103 


Free  Trade,  18,  22,  63,  78,  98,  101,       New  Zealand,  24,  50,  97,   no,   n  1, 


127 


1 14,  no,  117,  1  is,  1 19,  tao,  1^7 


175 


176 


INDEX 


Oil,  50,  76,  103 
Owen,  Robt.,  60,  158 


Pensions,  Old  Age,  31,  92,  153 

Pools,  75,  76,  77,  78 

Poor  Law,  n,  90,  91,  92,  93,  94 


Railways,  19,  55, 77,  97,  99, 102,  Io6» 

113, 114, 128,  133,  134 
Russia,  51,97,  105,  126,130,  135,  141, 

164, 165 


Shipping,  18,  19,  74,  76,  128,  137, 

139, 140, 141 
Smith,  Adam,  22,  157,  161 
Social    Democratic    Federation,    70, 

159, 160 
Socialism,  63,  64,  159,  160,  161,  166, 

168 


South  Africa,  50,  79,  107,  114,  127, 

129 
Spain,  48,  50,  79,  96,  141 
Steel,  55,  56,  57,  77,  98,  143 

Tariff  Reform,  98,  127,  153 

Trade  Unionism,  22,  26,  28,  29,  30, 

33,  52,  58,  59,  60,  61,  63,  64,  65,  66, 

67,  68,  69,  70,  75,  78,  115,  159,  160, 

163, 169 
Trades  Union  Congress,  61,  63,  64, 

65,  69, 70 
Trusts,  74,  75,  76,  78,  79,  80,  109,  no 

Unemployment,  89,  90,  94,  95 
U.S.A.,  23,  52,  58,  79,  102,  103,  126, 
130,  141,  169 

Wheat,  10,  n,  23,  98,  117,  118,  147 
Wool,  10, 16,  24, 43, 49,  50,  5i,  74,  96, 
no,  117,  119,  121,  130,  143 


PRINTED    IN    GREAT    BRITAIN    BY    THE   WHITEFRIARS    PRESS,    LTD. 
LONDON    AND    TONBRIDGE. 


HBE 

9s 

i 

University  of  Toronto 

to      + 

3 
-i 

library 

d 

: 

X 

tt 

o 

K 

3 

• 

1     1 

o    I 

o 

DO  NOT        // 
REMOVE     / 

-p 
a 

CD 

i 

a 
S        o 

„>     rH 

N    O        TJ 
o    t,        o 

OJ     CO          -H 

^     s; 

Oi        o; 

a; 

CO         O 
^i        CD 

4 

CO 

•» 

CQ 

CD 

•H 

C 

o 

8 

4 

THE 

CARD 

FROM 

THIS 

POCKET 

-P         CD 

H 

0 

Acme  Library  Card  Pocket 

—           -J 

Under  Pat  "Re(.  Index  File" 

1       | 

Made  by  LIBRARY  BUREAU 

li 


§§